JP6689225B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a game machine to which a decorative substrate on which a light emitting means is mounted is attached has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1). The player is provided with a variety of effects using the light emitting effect by the light emitting means.

JP, 2016-154676, A (paragraph [0019], Drawing 5).

  However, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected on the mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the reflectance is lowered by the number for identifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate and the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means. It was difficult to make the substrate a bright light emitting surface.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a decorative substrate can be a bright light emitting surface.

The following are effective solutions for achieving the above object .

(Solution 1)
A gaming machine you progress a game based on a lottery result by the selecting means, the red emitting red light emitting element, a green light emitting element emitting green light, polychromatic emission composed of a blue light emitting element emitting blue light, A plurality of means are mounted on the decorative substrate, and a specific mounting surface of the mounting surface of the decorative substrate on which the multicolor light emitting means is mounted is a reflection of the specific mounting surface of the decorative substrate due to the light emission of the multicolor light emitting means. A first reflection efficiency reduction suppressing section capable of suppressing a reduction in efficiency ; and a first reflection efficiency reduction suppressing section having a higher reflection efficiency on the specific mounting surface of the decorative substrate due to the light emission of the multicolor light emitting means than the first reflection efficiency reduction suppressing section. 2 reflection efficiency reduction suppressing section is formed and arranged so as to face the front of the gaming machine , the second reflection efficiency reduction suppressing section is white, the first reflection efficiency reduction suppressing section is yellow, and the first reflection efficiency decrease suppression , The formed near the multicolor light-emitting device, the multi-color light emitting means is an electronic component having a white exterior, the electronic component mounted on a specific mounting surface of the decorative board, have a white outer to that, a game machine, characterized in that.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the decoration substrate can be a bright light emitting surface.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where a door frame is opened from a main body frame and a main body frame is opened from an outer frame. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine showing another embodiment, including a partially enlarged view seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and saw it from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame that is disassembled and seen from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as seen from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the lower front side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear with the lid member removed. It is the XX sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is the YY sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 39 containing a partially expanded view. It is an exploded perspective view of a foul cover unit including a partially expanded exploded view showing other forms of an operation line invalidation member. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional plan view including a partially enlarged view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operation line invalidating member. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional plan view including a partially enlarged view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operation line invalidating member. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional front view of a foul cover unit showing another mode of the operation line nullifying member, and (b) is a transverse plan view of the same. It is a vertical cross-sectional front view of a foul cover unit showing another fraud prevention means. (A), (b) is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 45 showing a normal flow of a game ball (foul ball), and (c) is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 45 showing a reverse movement prevention state of an illegal ball. . It is a top view of a foul cover unit. It is a top view of the foul cover unit which shows other forms of an operation line invalidation member. It is a vertical cross-sectional front view of a foul cover unit showing another fraud prevention means. (A) is an enlarged view of Z part of FIG. 49, (b) is an enlarged view of Z part of FIG. 49 which shows a state in which a foul ball passes. (A), (b) is an enlarged view of the Z section of FIG. 49 which shows the state in which the operation line is invalidated. (A), (b) shows a state where the operation line invalidating member is electrically operated, and is an enlarged view corresponding to the Z portion of FIG. 49 showing a state where the operation line is invalidated. It is a perspective view of the important section showing other forms of an operation line invalidation member. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in the plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing and retracting direction of the production operation section button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembles the production operation unit for each main member and is seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembles the production operation unit for each main member and is seen from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the lower front. (A) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the performance operation unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit and was seen from the lower front. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lower position, and (b) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a raised position. It is the explanation drawing which shows the relationship between the production operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in a raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a plate unit when is pressed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit by disassembling it. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of a door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the lower front. It is a front view of a door frame shown with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. It is a rear cross-sectional view which cut | disconnected the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the center of the front-back direction of the delivery blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear direction center of the dispensing blade when the ball-removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is a rear view of the payout device for explaining the rotation position of the payout blade. It is a rear view of a dispensing device for explaining ball clogging and ball drop prevention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the lower back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail and the like are assembled to a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 119 (a) disassembled and seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank flows in the upper part of the main frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main-body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back at the hinge side. It is the figure which expanded a part of sectional view cut | disconnected by CC line of FIG. 117 (a). It is another configuration of the present invention in which measures against metal powder are taken (configuration of measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment). It is another configuration of the present invention in which measures against metal powder are taken (configuration of measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment). It is another configuration of the present invention in which measures against metal powder are taken (configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment). It is another configuration of the present invention in which measures against metal powder are taken (configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment). It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the inside of a game area in which game balls are distributed on a game board. It is a front view of a center accessory and a table production unit in the table unit of the game board. It is a side sectional view of the front effect unit along with the center accessory cut in the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between LED in a front production unit, and the reflective recessed part of a front light guide plate. It is a front view which shows the light emission aspect of a front light guide plate. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front light guide plate of the front performance unit is made to emit light. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the lower front central decorative body is made to emit light in the lower movable effect unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the lower central lifting base is raised in the lower movable effect unit and the lower front central decorative body and the lower rear central decorative body are caused to emit light. In the lower movable production unit, the lower central elevating base, the lower left side elevating base and the lower right side elevating base are raised to illuminate the lower front central decorative body, the lower rear central decorative body, the lower left side decorative body, and the lower right side decorative body. It is the front view of the game board which is shown. FIG. 119 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the game board is in the state of FIG. 139 and the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The four rotary decorations, the left side rotary decorations, the left subside rotary decorations, the right side rotary decorative bodies, and the right subside rotary decorative bodies in the lower movable production unit are expanded to show the decorations of the decorative portions on each surface. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the kind (size) of the arrow light-emitted and displayed in a lower movable production unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where an upper rear left decorative body and an upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit are lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive mechanism of an upper back movable production unit roughly from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the clutch mechanism of an upper back movable production unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit is lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the upper front movable ornament of a front upper movable production unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. It is sectional drawing of the XX line of FIG. FIG. 150 is a view on arrow A in FIG. 150. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly. It is a figure which shows the structure of a frame earth substrate. It is a circuit diagram explaining an outline of a circuit configuration of a power supply board. It is the perspective view which partially enlarged the power supply board. FIG. 151 is a view on arrow B in FIG. 156. This is silk printing (part 1) of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. This is silk printing (part 2) of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. It is a perspective view explaining the outline of a discontinued electronic component. It is a configuration of a commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control board. It is a perspective view explaining the outline of wiring to the substrate handled as a main substrate. It is a block diagram explaining electrical connection of each decoration board with which a door frame is equipped. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. It is a schematic diagram of an arrangement method of a LED constant current drive circuit. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D section of FIG. 168. It is a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance and the like according to the second embodiment. It is a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment. FIG. 172 is an enlarged view of the D ′ portion of FIG. 170 or the D ″ portion of FIG. 171 viewed from the LED non-mounting surface. It is a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance and the like according to the fourth embodiment. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D "part of FIG. 173. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of main control side power supply turn-on. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 175. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a payout control part. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing in FIG. 178. FIG. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing following FIG. 179. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interruption processing. It is a modification of the payout device. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 which is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 13. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the elevated position as seen from the front right. is there. 10 and 11 are perspective views of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 13 is a front view of the pachinko machine, a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) in a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 which is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 106) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extends vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame upper member 30 are attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60, the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main frame 4 This is to rotatably support the lower frame hinge assembly 520 on the same axis and to attach the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

  Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted and the sound is emitted to the front, so that the player can hear the sound of deeper bass.

  The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the performance operation unit 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Body frame upper hinge member 510 and main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and a metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the body frame base unit 500. With a ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a payout base unit 550. The payout unit 560 for paying out the received game ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the main body frame base 501 are attached. A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 includes outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape in front view, and a front component member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view. An effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image and a rear side of the effect display device 1600 that is behind the game panel 1100. A peripheral control unit 1500 is configured as that the transparent substrate box, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effect and light emission effect in accordance with the game state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by receiving or passing the game balls B ( For example, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 for giving a predetermined number of game balls B), Is equipped with. The obstacle nail is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player can hit the game ball B by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B enters the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. It is possible to entertain the player with the operation of driving the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a, the front effect unit 2600, and the lower movable effect. The unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 and the like can perform a movable effect and a light emission effect to entertain the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. 14 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically.

  As illustrated, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 that connects the upper ends to each other, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper surface left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 respectively extend vertically and are arranged apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. The main frame 4 is for opening and closing.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is made of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 includes a recessed portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right at a rear side portion of the left side surface that divides the front-rear direction into three equal parts, and a right side portion that is opposite to the recessed portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b bulging toward one side and a cavity portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b are provided. The outer frame left member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

  Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c in a flat plate shape extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the rear lower lateral fixing portion 12c into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further front side By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, with the lower lateral fixing portion 12c on the rear side abutting on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Is attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, the upper left connecting member 12 makes the horizontal fixing portion 12a abut on the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-like upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and rearward of the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending in a short direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 contacts the rear surface of the contact portion 13d with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and contacts the left side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. When the screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, the lower left connecting member 13 makes the horizontal fixing portion 13a abut on the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the left end side, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connection member that is attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 includes a concave portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in a rear side portion of the right side surface that is divided into three in the front-rear direction, and a left side portion of the left side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 21a. A bulging portion 21b bulging toward one side and a cavity portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b are provided. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are enhanced by the recess 21a and the bulge 21b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 21c.

  Further, the outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The right upper connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower lateral fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c abutting on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, screws are screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and rearward of the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b that is behind the horizontal fixing portion, and the left side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat plate-shaped abutting portion 23d extending in a short direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and makes the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and screwing the screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 brings the horizontal fixing portion 23a into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

  The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically in the front-rear direction with a constant width and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a flat plate shape, and extends from the front side of the attachment portion 24a to the left. And a plate-like hooking piece portion 24b to which the upper frame hook 653 is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in the form of a flat plate, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. The plate-like hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and the insertion which allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that are vertically penetrated and are respectively recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on the left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at the left and right ends, respectively.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame, which is disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41 that extends left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends leftward and rightward along the outer frame lower member 41, and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain member 43, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extends to the left and right, and the front side of which is open, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear curtain member 43. And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the left-right direction length is the same as the outer frame upper member 30 left-right direction length.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a which are vertically penetrated and are respectively recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on the left and right side surfaces. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the notches 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recessed portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position near the rear in the center of the front-rear direction to the front end side. The recess 41b maximizes the volume of the curtain plate inner space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the opened rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 with the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 and becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The front curtain plate member 42 is provided with an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape having an open front. By attaching the front curtain member 42 to the front surface, the rear curtain member 43 cooperates with the front curtain member 42 to form a curtain inner space 40a which is a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends leftward and rightward and projects upward and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a at the center portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is located higher as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with a general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b that connect the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylindrical portion 43a. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the speaker unit The enclosure 624 is formed by communicating with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball catching mechanism 44 is a game ball B between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the game ball B stays in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is to prevent the product from being caught.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed to the mounting portion 44a. A first outlet 44b that is open upward at the left end of 44a, a second outlet 44c that is open upward to the right of the first outlet 44b in the mounting portion 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and inclined so that the upper surface thereof is positioned upward as it goes rearward. And a portion 44e.

  The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first outlet 44b and the second outlet 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  This ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is provided when an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. By the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placing portion 44a, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool comes into contact with the upright wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forwardly projecting upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the mounting portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving rearward, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B is retained on the placing portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is discharged to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first hole. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45, which are arranged on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, so as to be laterally spaced apart from each other, and an opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front-rear direction and attached inside the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The pair of guide members 45 are for contacting the lower ends of the door frames 3 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is made of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 connects the curtain plate internal space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders each having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted backward (in the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 according to the Helmholtz resonance principle. As a result, rich bass can be emitted to the front of the outer frame 2 (on the player side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass.

  The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43 a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In addition, the sound in the enclosure of the speaker is prevented from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 22A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 22B is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly seen from the lower front side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is mounted on the outer frame upper hinge member 51 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 mounted on the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the outer frame hinge member 51.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and extends upward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a, which is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends vertically to the center of the front extending portion 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b toward the front, and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a and a downward extending edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b around the front side to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is open. And a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a left end extending from the rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion on the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the attachment screw 53.

  The lock member 52 is capable of blocking the bearing groove 51c in a plan view in a state where the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in the direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame hinge pin 512 of the main body frame hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

  This lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock main body 52a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock main body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c. Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size that passes through the horizontal portion 60a in the vertical direction and through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion with respect to a vertical center. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and is not illustrated. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that it rolls to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling rearward of the body frame 4, and thus the outer frame. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay in the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 31. 23 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 24 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 25 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 26 is a right side view of the door frame. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the rear. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically in a front view, and is attached via the main body frame 4 so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side. Has been. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. Of the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame, the tray unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the tray unit 200 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100. The left side frame 400 of the door frame and the upper side of the dish unit are attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100. A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose front view extends vertically and penetrates in the front and back, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view, and a speaker duct 103 mounted near the right end of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in the rear view, and the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 in the rear view. The handle rear relay substrate 106, the door frame main relay substrate 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay substrate 105 from the rear side, and the handle rear relay substrate 106 from the rear side. A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The frame lower hinge member 125, the opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear rear lower part on the right side in rear view.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 182 that can be rotated by a player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved within the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launching device 540. It is for performing a game that is driven into.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. 32A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 32B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is openably and closably closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right of the front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, The rear side of the door frame base 101 is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 mounted on the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view and a door frame main relay on the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the handle rear relay board mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 on the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear handle cover relay substrate cover 108 which is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 106 and covers the rear handle substrate 106 from the rear side, and the case which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The frame lower hinge member 125, the opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear rear lower part on the right side in rear view.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1-1. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 has a door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner peripheral shape in a front view that is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically. The door window 101a has upper and left and right sides that form an inner circumference approaching the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and a lower side that forms an inner circumference vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed in a lower right corner in a front view on the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b that is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes further forward than the right end side, a handle mounting seat surface 101b, and a door window 101a. And a recessed portion in the vicinity of the right end in the front view from the rear surface toward the front, and an insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c that penetrates back and forth in the insertion lock 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated forward and backward on the left side in a front view, and the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. And a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the above.

  Further, the door frame base 101 extends to the left from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. A passage opening 101f, a top plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the penetration ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h is provided that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) as viewed from the front and penetrate through the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located rearward. The speaker 622 is located so that the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted into the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later, penetrates the through hole 101j. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion. A plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c protruding into the portion 102a and extending over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 102a and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. A plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d are provided which connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in plural in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

  The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three protrusions 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c are aligned with the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be restricted.

  Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, The axis of the tubular portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same inclined state.

[3-1-3. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The speaker duct 103 has a rear end of a tubular portion located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker opening 211b in the dish unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide the player to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (the player side).

  In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side in front view with respect to the door frame relay board cover 107, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a rectangular shape with its outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower rear corner of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 99). And FIG. 100) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an outer shape formed in an inverted L shape in which a square extending vertically is combined with a rectangle extending left and right on the right side in a front view of an upper portion of the square extending vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the decoration part decoration board 413 in the window, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4, The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are such that the door frame main relay board 104 and the portion extending vertically of the door frame sub relay board 105 are the doors when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

  The handle rear relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle with the outer shape extending leftward and rightward, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attaching seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay substrate 106 connects the door frame main relay substrate 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 140. It is for relaying. The handle rear relay substrate 106 is in a state where the rear side is covered with the handle rear relay substrate cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the handle rear relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side in front view being opened. In the assembled state of the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

  The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay substrate 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and has a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are vertically spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left and right connecting upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the left end side of the left reinforcing frame 111, which is attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that connect the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other and a plurality of vertically-spaced rear mountings of the right reinforcing frame 112 are attached to the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. The hooking member 116 is provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with a length substantially the same as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically spaced apart and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with a length substantially equal to the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction so that the vertical direction is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates forward and backward near the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position that coincides with the upper dish ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is aligned with the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right and is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It is provided with a pair of side piece portions that extend in a flat plate shape from the sides to the front side, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion that connects the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction. A door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked to these hooking members 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are stamped from a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In the door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. Then, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1-7. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for mounting the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated relative to the main body frame 4. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 that is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 that is vertically movably attached to the hinge bracket 121, and a flange that is attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a that is square in a front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b that extends forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. In the state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. The portion that extends above the protruding piece 121b and extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4.

  The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered around a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the collar member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 projects above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

  When the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves a horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the entire door frame upper hinge pin 122 is removed. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it out. it can. Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Accordingly, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1-8. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a flat plate-like mounting piece 125a in a front view, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from a lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 23 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is located at a position coaxial with the vertically extending part of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the hinge can be rotated by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. You can

[3-1-9. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used to open and close the lock. The cylinder lock 130 is a columnar cylinder body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a cylinder hole attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132 to form a regular cylinder. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end toward the front at positions facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of cutout portions to rotate the rotation. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the dish unit body 252 of the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 23 and the like).

[3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. 35 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 36 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has the entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the ball exit 141b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 that is open, and a game ball that is closed from the front end of the front cover 141 and has a box-like shape that is opened at the front and that has entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball cover member 143 having a partition part 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b on the rear side of 141, and the game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball discharge member 143 one by one on the rear cover 14 The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

  In the ball feeding unit 140, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball pulling member 143 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding members 144, respectively.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 143 on the left side of the ball removing port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball removing member 143, which will be described later, extends from 141c forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit for removing the upper bowl 241b. Also, it is formed so as to close the portion open to the rear on the upstream end side of the ball guide passage 241c from the rear side.

  The ball-removing member 143 divides the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b below the entrance 141a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 143a is lowered toward the ball-feeding member 144. Around an axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up and down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and has its lower end extending in the front-rear direction. The pivot rod 143b rotatably supported on the rod 143b, the rod-shaped operating rod 143c projecting forward from the upper end of the rod 143b, and the rod 143b below the rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a is provided. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 35 (a)). The operating rod 143c is an upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper bowl ball-sliding slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper bowl ball-sledding button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( Contact with the upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction, facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball-removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. A ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation when the ball feeding solenoid 145 drives the rod portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation to move in the left-right direction.

  In this ball feeding member 144, the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 144b faces the ball hitting supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hitting ball supply port 142a and has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the game ball B to the ball holding portion 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a) side is blocked by the blocking portion 144a, and the gaming ball B remains on the partition portion 143a (remains at the standby position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the rod portion 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Then, only one game ball B on the partition 143a, which is the standby position, is held in the ball holder 144b.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is vertically swung by driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip which is vertically swung in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the up-down direction.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that an end (right end) on the opposite side of the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending in the front and rear direction. Has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side close to the crank 147 moves upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the self-weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward centering on the right end. It rotates like this and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation rod 146, the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding crank 147 is engaged with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operation rod 146 and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operation rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. The shaft portion 147b is disposed on the side opposite to the side and is rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 36B) projecting downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, so that the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

  In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. Turn to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B at the standby position, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF). State), and the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 153) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 542.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to receive a moment such that the ball feeding unit 140 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the ball removing member 143 pivotally supported or the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding toward the front of the ball removing member 143 should come into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation thereof is restricted, in a normal state, the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to perform partitioning, and the ball outlet 141b side. The game ball B does not enter.

  When the player presses the upper plate ball removing button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate ball removing slider slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion, and the operating rod 143c moves as the operation transmitting portion moves downward. Will also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guide path 241c of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 of the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b with which the working rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 contacts is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the force is supplied with vigor, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball-removing member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is partitioned. 143a can be prevented from bouncing back.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 36 (b) and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and The operation line nullifying member 700, which is a first fraud prevention means, is mounted so as to be housed in the mounting recess 142b. The operation line nullifying member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side. There is. Note that the invalidation of the operation line means that the operation line cannot be properly operated by cutting, pinching (pinching and stopping), entwining (winding up), or bonding with hot melt or the like. It means putting into a state.

  The operation line disabling member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in a front view extends to the left and right, and is a first piece that is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. The portion 701 and the second piece portion 702, and the inclined portion 703 formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 that face each other. And are equipped with. The first piece portion 701 of the operation line invalidating member 700 is bent with respect to the flat plate surface of the operation line invalidating member 700 so that the right end in front view protrudes rearward in FIG. On the other hand, the second piece portion 702 extends on the same plane as the flat plate surface of the operation line nullifying member 700. Thus, in plan view, the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 form a shearing portion 700v that spreads in a V shape toward the right.

  The operation line disabling member 700 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 forms the hit ball supply port 142a. It will be in a state of communicating with.

  According to this operation line invalidating member 700, an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as that of a flexible string-like operation line (thread, piano wire, wire or linear member such as a catheter) is attached. Or, a synthetic resin ball having almost the same diameter as that) is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540, and is output to the upper plate 201 side attached to the illegal ball. When a fraudulent act is performed by operating the operation line to form a fraudulent ball flow path using the fraudulent sphere or moving the fraudulent sphere into and out of the first starting opening 2002 and the like, a game is played by the ball launching device 540. By inserting the operation wire attached to the illegal ball into the space between the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 by the momentum of the illegal ball that is shot (struck) with a strength that can reach the area 5a. Then, the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 Can be cut into as scissors by narrowed site of formation shear portion 700v, it is possible to suppress the fraud using a fraud sphere takes place thus invalidates the operating line.

  The first fraud prevention means provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is not limited to the above-described form, and may be in another form. For example, if the operation line attached to the illegal ball is cut or narrowed to prevent the illegal act, the operation plate invalidating member 700 may be bent or bent in a shape different from that described above. It may be provided, or a resin molded member having a shape capable of cutting or narrowing the operation line attached to the illegal ball may be provided instead of the metal plate.

  When the illegal ball is made of synthetic resin such as acrylic, a non-contact type metal game ball (for example, a proximity switch) at the above-described standby position (on the above-mentioned partition 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140 is used. ), And the detection signal is added to the driving condition of the ball feeding solenoid 145, which is an electric feeding means, so that the firing of an illegal ball can be prevented. This is because the non-contact type sensor does not detect an illegal ball made of synthetic resin, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 does not drive for ball feeding.

[3-1-11. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 37B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear with the lid member removed.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 is fired by the ball launching device 540 with a weaker force (a firing force that cannot reach the game area 5a) than a predetermined force (a firing force that can reach the game area 5a), and the foul cover unit 150 is played on the game board 5a. It is for guiding the game ball B (foul ball) that has not reached the inside to the lower plate 202 and guiding the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. .

  The foul cover unit 150 is, as shown in the figure, a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and has an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. And 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner of the front view, and the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a which is a ball opening of the dish unit 200. Can communicate with the through-ball passage 150a that communicates with the lower full-ball payout passage 610b of the lower full-ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through-ball passage 150a when viewed from the front. A full tank receiving port 150b.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full-ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front, and the ball cover unit 540 of the main body frame 4 is launched from the launch rail 544, but lacks momentum. A foul ball receiving portion 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball) that has fallen into a foul ball drop opening 1013 formed between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the game area 5a, and the front view right A lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is an opening for balls of the plate unit 200, is formed to open forward in the vicinity of the lower corner and discharges the game ball B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c to the front. A ball discharge port 150d communicating with the ball discharge port 150d, and a communication passage 150 connecting the ball discharge port 150d (strictly, a storage passage 150e described later) and the foul ball receiving portion 150c. It has a, and. This connecting passage 150h is an upper passage wall 150i arranged below the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c with an inclination opposite to that of the bottom wall 150g, and approximately one game ball from the upper passage wall 150i. And a lower passage wall 150j arranged in parallel with a space therebetween, the starting end portion of which is opened upward to the downwardly inclined end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the end portion of which is relative to the storage passage 150e. Open downwards.

  It should be noted that a series of passages from the foul ball dropping port 1013 opened between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 to the foul ball receiving part 150c, the communication passage 150h, and the storage passage 150e to the ball ejection port 150d are returned as the foul ball returning. It is a passage, and the return passage portion 1014 is formed by these series of elements.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. The storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

  The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the lower end thereof is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. A full tank detection sensor 154 for detecting the rotation in the direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 for urging the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  In the foul cover unit 150, when the lower bowl 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is stored in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game ball B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates as described above, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B, and when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects a full tank, further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall to that effect and urge the lower plate 202 to be completely filled.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through-ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4 described later. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 109). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing abutting portion 150f, the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated and the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line disabling member 7000 which is a second tampering prevention means for suppressing illicitness by the illicit ball Q to which the operation line L is attached. Similarly, the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 are provided. The foul ball dropping port 1013 opened between the two is provided with operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S which are third fraud prevention means.

  The second operation line nullifying member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is an internal space between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and is enlarged in FIG. As shown in the drawing, the convex portions 7001 on both sides are fitted and supported in the mounting hole 151h of the unit main body 151 and the mounting hole 152h of the lid member 152, and fixedly attached (bonded) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i. Further, for safety reasons, the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 are externally covered and housed so that the hands of employees, game machine assembly workers, etc. are difficult to contact.

  The specific operation line invalidating member 7000 includes the same components as the operation line invalidating member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the bent first piece 701 in FIG. A V-shape opening in a direction opposite to the downward flow direction of the ball of the communication passage 150h by the one piece portion 7010 and the second piece portion 7020 extending from the convex portion 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece portion 702. The shearing portion 7000v is formed.

  In the foul cover unit 150 of the embodiment, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40, the center of the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000 is the lid member 152 constituting the foul cover unit 150. It is arranged so as to be substantially flush with the inner surface, and at the folded portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h, toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000. A tapered guide portion 150k that can guide the operation line L is provided. Specifically, the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width necessary for the game balls to flow down on the upper surface thereof, and is turned toward the lid member 152 side at the folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i. The first sloped portion 150ka descending toward the operation line disabling member 7000, and the width narrower toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line disabling member 7000 along the lid member 152 so as to be continuous with the first sloped portion 150ka. And a tapered guide portion 150k. The second inclined portion 150kb has a tapered shape (capable of capturing the operation line L). Then, when the operation line L, which receives a tension due to the rolling of the incorrect sphere Q or the pull from the outside, comes into sliding contact with the guide portion 150k in a winding manner, the tension applied to the operation line L causes the second inclined portion 150ka to move to the second slope portion 150ka. The operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidating member 7000 while sliding on the inclined portion 150 kb. Thereby, the operation line L can be reliably captured by the operation line invalidating member 7000. In this way, it is responsible for the smooth flow-down of the normal foul ball and the guidance of the operation line L attached to the incorrect ball Q. In order to make it easier to capture the operation line L, the corners of the first inclined portion 150ka and the second inclined portion 150kb of the guiding portion 150k may be formed in a curved shape.

  Since the second operation line invalidating member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is set using the space communicating from the lower dish ball supply port 211c to the game area 5a. The illegal ball Q attached is made to enter the game area 5a, and the operation line L extending to the side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using the illegal ball Q, or illegal It is possible to prevent an illegal act such that the ball Q is taken in and out of the first starting opening or the like.

  For example, using a special tool such as a cell plate from the lower dish supply port 211c, the illegal sphere Q is pushed into the return passage portion 1014 to flow backward and sent to the launch position of the ball launching device 540 (hereinafter referred to as "illegal act" A ”) is performed, when the incorrect ball Q goes beyond the folded portion of the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c toward the launch position of the launch rail 544, The operation line L is pulled around (loaded with tension) and wraps around in the U-turn shape along the folded portion. Then, the operation line L is guided by the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the taper of the guiding portion 150k, enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v formed by the first piece portion 7010 and the second piece portion 7020, and finally. Since the operation line L cannot be operated as a result of the disconnection, it is possible to prevent an illegal act using the illegal ball Q.

  Further, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the firing position, and it is intentionally made into a foul ball, and the lower dish ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. Even if an illegal act of grabbing the operation line L connected to the illegal sphere that has become a foul ball and launching a subsequent illegal sphere Q into the game area 5a (hereinafter referred to as "illegal act B") is performed, The operation line L existing at the folded back portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c is pulled by the subsequent firing of the incorrect ball Q (tension is applied). L is pressed against the folded-back portion, the operation line L enters the shearing portion 7000v and is cut in the same manner as described above, and as a result, the operation line L cannot be operated, and thus fraudulent acts using the illegal ball Q can be suppressed. Yes To become. Note that FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 are explanatory views on the assumption that the illegal act B is performed. Further, with respect to the above-mentioned fraudulent act B, there is a possibility that the operation line invalidating member 700 or the like as the first fraud prevention means cannot sufficiently exert the effect on the fraudulent ball Q which becomes a foul ball (for example, it becomes a foul ball). Since there is a possibility that the operating line L is not invalidated by the first fraud prevention means even if the fraudulent ball Q is fired with a certain degree of strength), this embodiment reinforces the fraud countermeasures by the first fraud prevention means. It also has the effect of Therefore, when the fraudulent act B is targeted, the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 that are the first and second fraud preventing means, and further the operation line invalidating member 7000H that is the third fraud preventing means described later. , 7000S are preferably used in combination, and the first operation line invalidating member 700 and another second operation line invalidating member 7000 or third operation line invalidating member 7000H, 7000S are provided as one unit. It is good to install it together with the pachinko machine 1. In this case, since the first operation line invalidating member 700 and the second operation line invalidating member 7000 are provided together on the door frame 3 side and in a state where they are not exposed to the outside, they are not conspicuous, so that ball clogging or the like occurs. Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the above problem, the fraud countermeasure information is unlikely to leak. Further, the crime prevention performance of the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 influences the crime prevention performance, so that it is easy to maintain the crime prevention performance if it is replaced together with the door frame 3.

  By the way, the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000, which are the above-mentioned first and second fraud prevention means, cut and invalidate the operation line L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v, but the operation line L is clamped. That is, the operating line L is sandwiched between, for example, two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to make the flexible operating line L impossible or difficult to push and pull, and thus the illegal sphere Q connected to the operating line L cannot be easily operated. You may make it invalid like this.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the operation line nullifying member 7000 is formed by two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined at the hatched portion in the enlarged view of FIG. 41, and the metal plates 7011 and 7022 are formed. The front half of the non-bonded portion is expanded into a V-shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033, and the second half of the non-bonded portion is formed as a pinching portion 7044. Such an operation line invalidating member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152, and further, from the viewpoint of safety, it is difficult for the unit body 151 to come into contact with the hands of employees or game machine assemblers. And is covered and accommodated from the outside by the lid member 152.

  According to the operation line invalidating member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 42, the operation line L is pulled by the incorrect ball Q and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. When wrapping around the folded-back portion in a U-turn shape, the guiding portion 150k of the folded-back portion is guided by the operation line invalidating member 7000, and the clamping portion in the latter half of the non-bonded portion of the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022. 7044 clamps like tweezers.

  As a result, the illegal ball Q that has flowed back from the lower dish ball supply port 211c due to the illegal act A reaches the firing position of the launch rail 544, or the illegal ball Q that is intentionally turned into a foul ball by the illegal act B is generated. Can be prevented from reaching the lower dish ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening, and even if it reaches there, the operation line L is sandwiched by the operation line invalidating member 7000. Therefore, no matter how much the flexible operation line L is pushed in from the lower dish supply port 211c, it is only loosened there, and as a result the amount of extension of the operation line L cannot be adjusted (the illegal ball Q hanging in the game area 5a Since the height cannot be adjusted), it becomes possible to prevent an illegal act using the illegal ball Q.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first half of the non-bonded portion at the tips of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded into a V shape to form the introduction guide portion 7033, and the second half of the non-bonded portion serves as the pinching portion 7044. However, instead of this, one metal plate is bent so that the plate surfaces are overlapped, and the leading end portion of one bent plate surface is expanded into a V shape to introduce the guide portion 7033 (the guide portion). ), And the sandwiching portion 7044 may be the sandwiching portion of both plate surfaces. As a result, it is possible to improve the assembling work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of the metal plate while exhibiting the same effect as the above-mentioned fraud prevention effect.

  The operation line invalidating member 7000 for holding the operation line L is provided with a double-sided tape or a non-curing adhesive agent, which is not shown, in the gap between the second inclined portions 150 kb of FIG. 42. Then, the adhesive portion may be formed, and the operation line L guided by the second inclined portion 150 kb may be adhered to the adhesive portion so as to be immobile.

  In addition, as the operation line invalidating member 7000 that clamps the operation line L, the above-described one made of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is changed to a coil spring as shown in FIG. 43, and this coil spring is The guide portion 150k may be installed and formed so that the guide direction of the second inclined portion 150kb of the guide portion 150k and its own central axis line are substantially orthogonal to each other. The operation line L guided by the second inclined portion 150 kb is fitted between the adjacent coils of the coil spring and is clamped.

  Note that the coil spring has a structure in which adjacent coils are in contact with each other when there is no load, such as a tension coil spring or a torsion coil spring, but it is necessary to install it in a compressed state like a compression coil spring. Compared to this, it is advantageous in installation work.

  The coil spring may be installed in a straight state with no load applied, but as shown in FIG. 43, the coil springs are installed so that the coils on the entry side of the operation line L are curved so as to be slightly expanded. It is preferable that the operation line L can be smoothly entered. In this way, when the operation line nullifying member 7000 is formed of a coil spring, it can be manufactured at low cost, so that the cost can be reduced.

  Further, a foreign material such as a cell plate is inserted into the operation line invalidating member 7000 through the ball opening (lower dish ball supply port 211c), and the cell plate closes the guide portion 150k to the operation line invalidating member 7000. Although further fraudulent work to be attempted is conceivable, in the embodiment described above in order to respond to this, the course changing portion of the foul ball return passage portion 1014 (in this embodiment, the portion directly above the lower dish ball supply port 211c). A slit 1015 into which the cell plate (foreign matter) enters is formed (see FIG. 39). As a result, it is possible to prevent further tampering in which a foreign object is inserted from the ball opening (lower dish ball supply port 211c) to close the guiding portion 150k. In addition, as a countermeasure against illicit work in which a foreign object such as a cell plate is inserted from the ball opening (lower dish ball supply port 211c) to close the guiding portion 150k, a foreign object such as a cell plate such as the slit 1015 is used. Not limited to the formation of the intake port for taking in, as shown by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. 39, a configuration is provided in which a protruding obstacle portion 1016 is provided that collides with a foreign material such as a cell plate and prevents the foreign matter from reaching the guiding portion 150k. As an alternative, it is possible to achieve a higher degree of fraud prevention.

  Further, the first and second operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 described so far have a static structure of invalidating after waiting for the operation line L to enter, but FIG. 49, FIG. 50, and FIG. 52 and 53, a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D that positively invalidates the operation line L due to the presence of the illegal ball Q may be used.

  49, 50, and 51 show one specific example of the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D. The operation line invalidating member 7000D is a foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). Is pivotally attached to a path changing portion (corner portion directly above the lower dish ball supply port 211c).

  That is, in FIG. 49, the operation line nullifying member 7000D includes a horizontal plate-shaped ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-shaped nullifying portion 2646 vertically projecting from the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion 2645. And a shaft hole 2647 formed at a corner where the disabling portion 2646 intersects, and an arc-shaped ball stopper 2648 centered on the shaft hole 2647 protruding from the upper edge of the disabling portion 2646 to the right, A support shaft 2649 planted in the foul cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted in the shaft hole 2647, and is rotated about 90 ° counterclockwise from the ball receiving posture of FIG. 50 (a), as shown in FIG. 50 (b). Can swing to the release position. Further, the operation line invalidating member 7000D is provided with a balance weight 2660 on the opposite side of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the invalidating portion 2646 with the shaft hole 2647 interposed therebetween, and the ball receiving portion 2645 is biased by the balance weight 2660. The external force (specifically, the load for one game ball) does not act on the ball receiving posture of FIG. 50 (a), while the load for one game ball acts on the ball receiving portion 2645. At this time, it swings in the release posture shown in FIG.

  Further, the end edge of the invalidation portion 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is an intersecting side portion 2651 that swivels around the shaft hole 2647 and crosses the foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). When the disabling member 7000D swings to the release posture shown in FIG. 50 (b), the intersecting side portion 2651 fits into the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball returning passage.

  When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 equipped with the above-described dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D, this foul ball moves through the communication path 150h of the foul ball return path as shown in FIG. 50 (a). Immediately after it flows down and the course is changed downward by the course changing unit, it is placed on the ball receiving unit 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Due to the load of the foul ball, the operation line invalidating member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. 50 (b). Then, the foul ball placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D is discharged to the storage passage 150e on the downstream side, so that the operation line invalidating member 7000D released from the foul ball is attached to the balance weight 2660. It returns to the original ball receiving posture by the force.

  In addition, rarely, a plurality of foul balls may occur at one time. Even in such a case, while the previous foul balls are processed by the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the subsequent foul balls are as shown in FIG. 50 (b). Is stopped by the arc-shaped ball stopper 2648, and the operation line invalidating member 7000D is returned and then processed. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul balls occur at the same time, they can be processed one by one without any trouble.

  Next, the above-described misconduct B (a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of the illegal balls Q is connected to the operation line L by the foul cover unit 150 including the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D, and one of them is ejected from the hitting ball supply port 142a To the foul ball by intentionally firing it weakly and taking it out from the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is an opening for a ball, and further grasping the operation line L connected to the illegal ball and succeeding the illegal operation. When the illegal ball Q due to the illegal act of launching the ball Q to the game area 5a) flows in, the illegal ball Q flows down the communication passage 150h as shown in FIG. 51 (a), and the course is changed downward by the course changing section. Immediately after that, the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving posture is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645. Then, the operation line invalidating member 7000D is rotated counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 by the load of the incorrect sphere Q to change to the release posture of FIG. 51 (b). At this time, the disabling portion 2646 of the operation line disabling member 7000D also rotates, and the intersecting side portion 2651 of the edge crosses the foul ball returning passage and fits into the receiving portion 2652 on the passage side. When the foul ball return passage is crossed, the operation line L passing through it naturally also crosses, so that the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. Stop). Then, since the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot be dropped, the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D is not released from the illegal ball Q and continues the release posture. Of course, since the operation line invalidating member 7000D is at a position that cannot be reached even if a hand is put in from the lower dish ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q that stops at this position is taken out from the outside.

  If the operation line L is made to meander between the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 to make it difficult for the operation line L to move backward, the operation line invalidating member 7000D will be able to detect the state of being trapped. It becomes difficult to pull back the incorrect ball Q to the hit ball supply port 142a side. As a result, the illegal sphere Q remaining on the operation line invalidating member 7000D can be stored and collected as an evidence sphere.

  The above-described dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D utilizes the own weight of the illegal ball Q, but even if the operation line invalidating member 7000D is operated by the electric drive means as shown in FIG. Good.

  That is, the operation line invalidating member 7000D of FIG. 52 connects the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653, which is an electric drive unit, to the portion where the balance weight 2660 is provided, and the invalidation portion 2646 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D is connected to the ball detector. 2655 is provided, the game ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645, and when it is detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises and the operation line invalidating member 7000D changes from the ball receiving posture to the releasing posture. Also, when the game ball is changed from the ball receiving portion 2645 and is detected by the ball detector 2655 (change of the signal from the presence of the game ball to the absence), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 descends and the operation line. The invalidating member 7000D is configured to return from the release posture to the ball receiving posture. .

  When a normal foul ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the generation and release of the foul ball are detected by a change in the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 receives the change. Since it operates appropriately, the foul balls are treated one by one as in the case of the operation line invalidating member 7000D that uses its own weight.

  On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, so that the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises to invalidate the operation line. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture with the illegal ball Q, as described above, the operating line L is caught by the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidation unit 2646 and the illegal ball Q does not drop. Since no emission signal is emitted from the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 stays in the raised position. Therefore, the illegal ball Q cannot be taken out from the intended ball opening, and thus fraud can be prevented.

  The above-described dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D cuts the operation line L and invalidates it by providing a cutting blade on the intersecting side portion 2651 and / or the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidation portion 2646. be able to. Further, since the operation line invalidating member 7000D of the embodiment has a function of preventing the illegal ball Q from entering from the ball opening side with the ball receiving portion 2645 blocking the return passage portion 104, an illegal ball described later will be described. It can also be used as a reverse travel prevention means. Therefore, a higher fraud prevention function is exerted.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D has, for example, an invalidating portion formed in a shutter plate structure that linearly advances and retracts to open and close the communication passage 150h, and the tip of the shutter plate. Is defined as an intersection side portion that crosses the foul ball return passage, and a sphere detector is installed in the middle of the flow path of the communication passage 150h downstream of the movable area of the intersection side portion and passes through the movable area of the intersection side portion. After this, the illegal ball Q is detected by this ball detector to activate the invalidation unit, and the operation line L is clamped or cut at the crossing side portion that crosses the communication passage 150h. Good.

  Further, the above-described dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D can also be applied to the first operation line invalidating member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140. Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operation line invalidating member 7000D. In this case, the illegal sphere Q stops in the sphere feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the sphere launching device 540, so that the illegitimate deterrent effect can be surely enhanced.

  Further, FIG. 53 shows a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D for winding up the operation line L to invalidate it.

  That is, the operation line disabling member 7000D is mounted in the communication passage 150h of the foul cover unit 150 so as to be rotatable about the rotation shaft 2656 oriented in the direction orthogonal to the passage, and the square ring disabling portion 2646 is attached. And a motor 2657 which is an electric drive means for rotating the disabling unit 2646, and a horizontal bar which crosses the communication passage 150h of the disabling unit 2646 as an intersecting side portion 2651 which is provided downstream of a movable (rotating) region of the intersecting side portion 2651. The sphere detector 2655 and the invalidation unit 2646 are rotated once every time the Fal sphere is detected by the sphere detector 2655.

  When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 including the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the foul ball enters the communication passage 150h and passes through the invalidation section 2646, and the foul ball is detected. Although the nullification unit 2646 idles once by being detected by the device 2655, the foul sphere flows down as it is and is discharged to the outside from the sphere opening.

  On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q due to the illegal act B described above flows into the foul cover unit 150 including the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the operation line L is also invalidated when the illegal ball Q passes through the invalidation section 2646. Since the illegal sphere Q is detected by the sphere detector 2655 and the invalidation unit 2646 makes one rotation because it passes through the invalidation unit 2646, the operation line L is wrapped around the invalidation unit 2646. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q stops in the communication passage 150h, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q will fall into the hands of an illegal person.

  The sphere detector 2655 that detects the incorrect sphere Q may be one that is displaced by receiving the tension of the operation line L attached to the incorrect sphere Q. In such a case, the incorrect sphere Q can be reliably detected. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate wasteful idle rotation of the operation line invalidating member 7000D that winds up the operation line L described above.

The following technical ideas are included in the description of the embodiment relating to the dynamic operation line nullifying member.
"A game area where you play games with game balls,
A ball launching device that launches a game ball,
A launch passage portion that forms a launch ball passage communicating from the launch position of the ball launch device to the game area,
A return passage portion that forms a foul ball return passage that connects a foul ball falling opening opened in the middle of the launch ball passage and a ball opening for discharging a game ball to the outside of the machine,
An illegitimate prevention means capable of preventing the operation line attached to the illicit ball from the front of the machine;
The fraud prevention means is an operation line invalidating member that invalidates by clamping or cutting or winding the operation line,
The operation line invalidating member includes an intersecting side portion that crosses the foul ball returning passage of the game ball, and activates the intersecting side portion after the illegal ball has passed the movable region of the intersecting side portion to cause the foul ball. A gaming machine, characterized in that it is formed so as to cross a return passage, and that the operation line passing through the foul ball return passage is pinched, cut or wound up at the intersection side portion to be invalidated. "

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 10, 11, 39, 47, and 48, the third fraud prevention means provided in the above-described foul ball dropping port 1013 is the end portion (termination end) of the firing rail 544. Section) and an operation line nullifying member 7000S provided at an end of the outer rail 1001 (specifically, a rail base 1001x made of resin).

  The operation line nullifying member 7000H provided at the projecting side end of the launch rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is formed into a comb-teeth shape so that the operator's hand does not directly touch the blade edge. It is covered with a safety cover portion 1017 arranged in line. The cutting blade is supported by the safety cover portion 1017.

  Therefore, as described above, using the dedicated tool such as the cell plate or the like from the lower dish supply port 211c, the illegal ball Q is pushed into the return passage portion 1014 to make it flow backward, and is sent to the launch position of the ball launching device 540. When A is performed, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the end of the launch rail 544 and rolls due to the inclination toward the launch position, the operating line L is pulled (tension is applied) to the operating line L and the operating line invalidating member is pulled. It is cut by touching the cutting blade of 7000H. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

  In addition, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the firing position, and it is intentionally made into a foul ball from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. Even if an illegal act B is performed in which the operation line L connected to the illegal ball Q is grabbed and the succeeding illegal ball Q is launched to the game area 5a, the illegal ball Q becomes a foul ball and the return passage portion 1014 is formed. Since the operation line L touches the cutting blade of the operation line invalidating member 7000H in the process of falling, it is cut at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

  On the other hand, the operation line nullifying member 7000S provided on the resin-made rail base 1001x forming the outer rail 1001 includes a large number of hard resin-made wire rods in a brush shape as shown in FIGS. 10, 39 and 47. It is projected.

  According to the operation line invalidating member 7000S, if the illegal ball Q reaches the game area 5a and hangs down while being connected to the operation line L, the end of the operation line L is a lower dish ball supply port that is a ball opening. Even if an illicit person is gripping via the 211c, when the operation line L is pulled from the outside in order to raise the illegal sphere Q in the game area 5a, the tension causes the operation line L to be the wire rods of the operation line invalidating member 7000S. Since it enters into the gap, even if the power of the hand operating the operation line L to lower the illegal ball Q is loosened thereafter, the operation line L is resistant to slipping due to the resistance received from the wire rod group of the operation line invalidating member 7000S. The movement of the loosened hand does not reach the illegal ball Q. That is, the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a cannot be lowered, and as a result, the illegal act using the illegal ball Q can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the third fraud preventing means, the operation line invalidating member 7000H on the side of the launch rail 544 exerts an effect in the initial stage of the fraudulent acts A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 will not work. Since the operation line invalidating member 7000S on the side exerts an effect, a higher fraud prevention effect can be obtained.

  Of course, either one of the operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S can be used alone, and a specific invalidation member of the operation line invalidating member 7000H and the operation line invalidating member 7000S is also implemented. The forms may be interchanged or the same invalidating member may be adopted.

  In addition to the case where the operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S are formed as separate parts as in the embodiment and attached to the launch rail 544 or the outer rail 1001, for example, a metal plate forming the launch rail 544 is appropriately processed to invalidate the operation line. Forming member 7000H is integrally formed, or a wire rod is integrally formed on a resin rail base 1001x forming the outer rail 1001, or a V-groove shape is formed at a corner of the rail base 1001x as shown in FIG. 8B. The pinching portion 7000Sv may be engraved and the operating line L may be drawn into the groove of the pinching portion 7000Sv for pinching.

  Furthermore, the operation line nullifying member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operation line nullifying member 7000 as shown in FIG. 48, for example, the two metal plates 7011 described in FIGS. 41 and 42. , 7022, and the guide portion 150k including the first inclined portion 150ka and the second inclined portion 150kb may be provided on the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001.

  As described above, regarding the embodiment in which the second operation line invalidating member 7000 that invalidates the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is provided in the return passage portion 1014, and similarly, the third operation line invalidating member 7000 is the foul. Although the embodiment in which the ball drop port 1013 is provided has been described, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line nullifying member 7000 is provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h, that is, the inlet portion of the communication passage 150h. The line invalidating member 7000 is provided at the exit portion of the communication passage 150h (see the arrow z in FIG. 39), is provided on the rear surface side of the ball discharge port 150d in FIG. The operation line L is a portion that is bent at the start end of the rail 1001 and the end of the launch rail 544 such that it is in contact with a part of the return passage 1014, and the operation line L is the weight of the incorrect ball Q or the like. Provided at any position in the return passage portion 1014, provided that it is a portion that receives a pressing force when it is attempted to stretch it straight by receiving tension due to a pulling force by an illicit person. Unishi may be. In addition, the installation position of the operation line invalidating member 7000 of the embodiment is a position that the player cannot touch even if he / she inserts his / her fingertip through the ball opening. It is preferable in consideration of a crime prevention surface that makes it difficult to illegally operate the chemical conversion member 7000 itself.

  Further, in the embodiment, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is provided so as to be shifted to one side of the communication passage 150h, but as shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the operation line invalidating member 7000 is used to fill the passage width. You may make it arrange | position a cutting blade. In FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the start end portion of the communication passage 150h are formed into a comb-shaped safety cover portion 1017 so that the cutting edge of the cutting blade is the operator. Not to touch. In this case, the cutting blade of the operation line invalidating member 7000 has a well-known broken blade structure or tip structure, and is installed in the sheath-shaped holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i and at the same time as the unit main body 151. By providing a loading port 1019 and a discharging port 1020 on each of the lid members 152, and by allowing the cutting blade to be pushed out in a paltry manner so that the old and new can be replaced, sharp sharpness can always be maintained. In addition, reference numeral 1021 in FIGS. 44 (a) and (b) is a retaining dividing line portion for the operation line L cut in the valley portion of the safety cover portion 1017, and the operating line L can cut into the retaining dividing line portion 1021. It is like this. Therefore, even if the operation line disabling member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operation line L, the operation line L can dig into the pinching dividing line portion 1021 of the bottom wall 150g or the like, so that there is no certainty in preventing fraud. improves.

  Although the foul ball is returned to the lower plate in the above-described embodiment, there is also a gaming machine having a structure in which the foul ball is returned to the upper plate (including the case where there is no lower plate). In the case of, a fraudulent act of invading the game area 5a with the fraudulent ball Q to which the operation line L is attached using the space communicating from the upper bowl supply port (ball opening) to the game area 5a (the fraudulent act A described above, There is a possibility that a fraudulent act similar to B) will be performed. In the case of such a gaming machine, it is exemplified that the second fraud prevention means is provided at a predetermined portion of the foul return passage located in the space communicating with the upper bowl supply port to the game area 5a, as in the above-described embodiment. it can.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 forming the return passage portion 1014 is provided on the door frame 3 side, but the foul cover unit 150 may be provided on the main body frame 4 side.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 that constitutes the return passage portion 1014 is provided with one second fraud prevention means, but a plurality of second fraud prevention means may be provided. For example, in the case of a passage structure in which a plurality of bent portions such as the folded portions of the above-described embodiment are formed in the return passage portion 1014, each bent portion (each of the folded portions) has the first portion as in the above-described embodiment. You may make it provide the fraud prevention means of 2. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the effect of suppressing fraudulent acts using the fraudulent ball Q.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 forming the return passage portion 1014 is provided with the metal plate as the second fraud prevention means, but a resin molded product having the same configuration is provided instead of the metal plate. Alternatively, the molding of the foul cover unit 150 itself may be made to have a special shape so as to function as the second fraud prevention means. For example, the metal plate which is the second fraud prevention means in the above-described embodiment is not provided, and instead, a taper is provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. In order to capture the operating line L at the narrowest portion (narrowest portion) of the guide portion 150k, the slit-shaped trap portion is formed in the resin molded component forming the return passage portion 1014. The operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q may be clamped by the capturing part which is the narrowest part of the guiding part 150k. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the same fraud prevention effect as that of the above-described embodiment.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q is cut or pinched by the operation line invalidating member 7000. 45, FIG. 46, and FIG. 49, an illegal sphere that prevents the illegal sphere Q from entering through the sphere opening (prevents the reverse or reverse flow of the illegal sphere Q) without affecting the normal flow of the foul sphere. By providing the reverse-travel prevention means, the illegality caused by the illegal ball Q is prevented.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, for example, a dedicated tool such as a cell plate (foreign matter) that pushes the illegal ball Q into the course changing portion of the return passage portion 1014 (the portion corresponding to immediately above the lower dish ball supply port 211c). Not only that, but it is possible to exemplify that a guiding section 1022 for guiding the illegal ball Q itself to another passage to seal the movement is provided (first illegal ball reverse movement preventing means). As a result, it is possible to suppress an illegal act that causes the illegal ball Q to flow backward, such as the illegal act A described above, without affecting the normal flow of the foul ball. In addition, at the entrance portion of the attracting portion 1022, a trapping valve capable of swinging the backflowing incorrect ball Q only in the intruding direction of the attracting portion 1022 (allowing the intruding portion 1022 to enter and allowing it to enter from the attracting portion 1022). It is also possible to provide a single-opening type valve that makes disengagement impossible (not shown), and this makes it possible to leave a trace of the use of the illegal ball Q and evidence of the illegal act.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46, a check valve 1023 that can swing only in the downward direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage section 1014 to prevent the wrong ball Q from moving backward (backflow). It is possible (the second means for preventing the backward movement of the illegal ball). With such a configuration as well, it is possible to prevent an illegal act that causes the illegal ball Q to flow backward, such as the above-mentioned illegal act A, without affecting the normal flow of the foul ball. The operation line disabling member 7000D in FIG. 49 is also a kind of check valve and exhibits the same effect as the check valve 1023.

  The static operation line invalidating member and the dynamic operation line invalidating member described above may of course have both.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line invalidating member different from the first operation line invalidating member 700 is provided in the return passage portion 1014, but such an operation line invalidating member is, for example, the foul ball dropping port 1013. May be provided between the foul ball drop opening 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. Alternatively, even in this case, the same operational effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31 and the like. The glass unit 160 is removably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game is played. The front of the region 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and attachable to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed so that the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protrusion 163b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 115). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 115).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disk-shaped base portion 163a that is mounted rotatably around an axis line extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a rod shape from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis line. And a projecting portion 163b which is formed. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attaching member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 from above. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above-mentioned procedure. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attachable to and detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotating position below the base portion 163a, the projecting portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to the position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally separated from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 has a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171 and separated from each other in the left and right directions. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward of the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body portion 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, an out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 described later. It is formed so as not to project into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protruding piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body 171 and the rear protruding piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear protruding piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) does not come into contact with the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  The crime prevention cover 170 is a state in which the front surface of the main body 171 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and a portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is provided. The removed rear protrusion 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the gap between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 54 and the like. FIG. 54 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 54 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attaching member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven by the player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle attaching member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration substrate 184 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184. And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and a rotatably attached outer periphery on the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner member. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to an initial rotation position (a rotation end in a counterclockwise direction in a front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side of which is attached to the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in the direction.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip end side that protrudes outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 in a front view and the base. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is behind the inner base 186 and is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b radially protruding from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively formed in the three grooves 181c. When the handle base 181 is inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 has four rotating shafts (shaft members 187) and four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction. Two slits 182e extending in an arcuate shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a rear end projecting from the position inside the slit 182e with respect to the center of rotation of the slit 182e, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. Locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in a clockwise direction in front view of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curved) so as to be curved inward. The second protrusion 182b is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. It projects slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in the clockwise direction in front view that bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and a side surface in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And has a shape similar to that of the first protrusion 182a.

  The third protrusion 182c has a portion of the handle 182 that most protrudes from the general outer peripheral surface thereof, and is separated from the most protruded portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It projects at about half the height. The side surfaces on both sides of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is more than the first protrusion 182a. It projects slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with the side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disc shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle range of about 120 degrees.

  The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward in a round shape and has a light-transmitting property. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 to emit light.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in a plan view and faces the outer side (open side). The handle unit 180 mounted via the above also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip end inclines toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). And fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the static electricity that acts on the handle 182 or the like by the player is detected, and the handle 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a method different from the original to play the game, and reduce the load (load) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, and the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182, and the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 is released, so that before the one-shot button 193 is operated. The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

  Further, the handle unit 180 is provided with four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Then, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hitting"), the fourth protrusion 182d is the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is almost the same as the position, the handle 182 can be maintained in the “right-handed” position in a comfortable state for the player by changing the handle 182 by using the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. 55 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the tray unit seen from the rear. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, which is below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 stores a game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball which is arranged below the upper plate 201 and is supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. The dish decoration unit 250 having the above, and the effect operation unit 300 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left-right direction, an upper plate body 212 having an upper plate 201 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit base 211, and a right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 that is mounted to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 that is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. An upper plate bowl removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and an upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. Plate unit main body 252, a lower plate ball punching unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front part of the plate unit main body 252 with left and right spaces, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The production operation unit 300 includes, as the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotationally operated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation section base 320 housed in the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation section base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation section 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation section 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation section 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  In addition, the production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 that decorates the production operation ring 330 with light emission, the decoration substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the operation operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And are equipped with.

  The dish unit 200 is entirely bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 is directed obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has the ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5-1. Plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front largely bulges forward and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate body 212), a region of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges to the front. The upper plate 201 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in a front view, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 62). ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side becomes lower, and the front end right end side of the guide passage portion 201a sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  The upper plate 201 is a state in which the bottom plate is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the plate unit base 211 is lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B toward the position. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port 211e.

  In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground metal member 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact (rolls) with the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5-2. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball hole 202a through which the game ball B can be discharged by vertically penetrating the bottom wall. The lower dish ball removal hole 202 a of the lower dish 202 is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal unit 260.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball-draining hole 202a penetrating vertically and is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined such that the bottom surface thereof is lowered toward the bottom plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when assembled in the dish unit 200.

  The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball hole 202a is closed and open the lower plate ball hole 202a. The game balls B stored in can be discharged below the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is opened, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore, from the lower dish ball supply port 211c to the front side. The discharged game ball B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Plate base unit]
The plate base unit 210 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62. 59 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there. The dish base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

  The plate base unit 210 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate having an upper plate 201 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit base 211. The main body 212, a mounting base 213 attached to the right side of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front part of the dish unit base 211, and protruding forward, and a front side of the dish unit base 211 attached to the right side of the mounting base 213. And a dish unit relay board 214.

  Further, the dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper dish ball removal unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. An upper plate ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper plate ball removal unit 230 on the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5-3a. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow rear opening). It is formed in a box shape.

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front and also has an upper dish ball supply port 211a that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates forward and backward below the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower part to the left of the center in the front view and extending rearward, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through on the right side wall of a portion that extends rearward of the ball supply port 211c, and the front and rear on the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front. And an upper dish ball feed port 211e, which extends vertically and which is located at the right end of the upper dish body 212.

  Further, the dish unit base 211 projects forward to the right of the upper dish ball feed port 211e, and the mounting projection 211f on which the mounting base is placed, and the plate protrusion 211f on the left side of the upper dish ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion port 211g that penetrates through the lower part of the plate body in the front-rear direction and through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball-removing slider 242 in the upper plate ball-removing unit 240 is inserted, and also penetrates in the front-rear direction at the lower right corner of the front view. A handle insertion opening 211h into which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion into which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates in the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front. And a mouth 211i.

  The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201 and the cylindrical rear end of the upper plate ball supply port 211a passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101 when assembled on the door frame 3. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  The lower dish ball supply port 211c, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end from the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removing guide passage 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removing unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are operated by the upper plate ball removing button 222, and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, the upper It is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball feeding guide passage 241b and the ball guide passage 241c of the unit 240 after removing the bowl and the cutout portion 211d.

  The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper dish main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges forward more largely than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 is formed such that the front end recedes rearward from the most forwardly bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed near the right end.

  The upper dish main body 212 is attached to the dish unit 200 so that a portion of the upper dish body 200, which is closed at the upper end near the right end, sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper part, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting projection 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open top. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion opening 213a that vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the left end, and a through hole 213b that vertically penetrates at the right corner of the rear end.

  The front slider 232 of the upper bowl removal unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. A wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5-3d. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish lower left decoration board 283, the dish lower right decoration board 288, and the operation section relay board 392. It is for doing. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the front side of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting projection 211f. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5-3e. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and then lend a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, display the amount of cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, or a ball lending machine. It is for deducting the amount of the game ball B rented out from the cash or the prepaid card that has been thrown in and returning it.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223, which is arranged to the right of the pull-out button 222 and has translucency, a ball lending button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 projects upward from the upper surface of the base portion 221 in a cylindrical shape, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. In addition, when a prepaid card with cash or remaining money is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented gaming ball B is deducted from the cash or the prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display section displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine. Further, the ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine fails.

[3-5-3f. Unit before removal of upper bowl and after removal of upper bowl]
The unit 230 before removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62 and the like. The upper plate pre-ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate post-ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. This is for discharging the game balls B stored in the lower tray 202.

  The upper dish ball removal unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the placing protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after removing the upper bowl is attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 at a position behind the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl.

  The upper dish removal unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211, and has a cylindrical front base 231 extending vertically, and a front base 231 inserted in the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be vertically movable. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the vicinity of the front of the upper dish feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper bowl ball removing button 222, and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242 a of the upper bowl ball removing slider 242 of the upper bowl removing unit 240. It is in contact with the upper surface.

  The upper bowl removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to close the upper bowl feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear side, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper dish ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the spring, a spring 243 biasing the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. Is equipped with.

  The rear base 241 has a ball receiving port 241a, through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving port 241a, through which the game ball B can pass, as well as projecting upward from the site where the upper dish ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached. A ball feed guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a game from a position below the ball feed guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. And a ball pull-out guide path 241c for guiding the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at a position where it opens. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The part extending to the left and right of the ball guide passage 241c projects to the right in rear view as compared with the part to which the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably mounted, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view becomes lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The part of the ball guide passage 241c extending to the left and right is closed by the rear cover 244 on the rear side. In the state in which the ball guide passage 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion that extends vertically below the ball feed guide path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end in the rear view of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball discharge guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is formed in a square shape in a front view, and projects rearward from an operation receiving portion 242a that projects forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface that is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. And an operation transmission section 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface thereof is located downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  In the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the dish unit base 211 from the rear side and projects forward, and the operation receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper bowl removing unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the. Further, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has the operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241 and the operation of the ball pulling member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. The rod 143c is in contact.

  The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end of the spring 243 is attached to the upper bowl removing slider 242, and urges the upper bowl removing slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is located at the moving end upward due to the biasing force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243.

In the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl, the upper bowl removing slider 242 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243 and the upper bowl removing slider 242 is moved. Through the front slider 232, which is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, the upper dish ball pull-out button 222 is located at the upper end of the moving position. Further, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition part 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition the two.

  Therefore, in a state where the upper dish ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the space between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b in the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned, and the ball is fed from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper bowl removing button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper bowl removing slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper bowl removing slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball-punching member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b, can be moved downward, and the ball-punching member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball-punching member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Moves backward between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a through the ball receiving opening 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b from the upper plate 201 is discharged forward from the ball exit 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Will be done. The game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the cutout portion 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball guide passage 241c, and then downward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is released, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is released via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball-removing button 222 moves up, the ball-removing member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the operation-transmitting portion 242b, and the partition 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b. It will be restored to the original state.

  In this way, by the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5-4. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. 63 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 64 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the plate decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the plate decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower portion of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and forms a lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211. The dish unit base 251 covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. The dish unit body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and the dishes which are attached to the upper front portion of the dish unit body 252 with left and right spaces, respectively. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, and the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit that are attached to the entire plate unit main body 252 below the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate unit 275, respectively. 285 and.

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower plate body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate body 251 extends in the left-right direction and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear part is closed.

  The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction projects further forward than the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball removal hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate body 251 is inclined so as to be lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal lid 265 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260.

  The lower plate body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit body 252. Further, the bottom plate body, when assembled in the plate unit 200, has a bottom surface located below the bottom plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the bottom plate ball removal hole 202a has a bottom plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Plate unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The dish unit body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. The upper surface of the dish unit body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right sides toward the center in the left-right direction in the upper portion, extends downward, and is spaced apart in the left-right direction. Is provided with a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and a plate upper left decoration unit 270, a plate lower left decoration unit 280, a plate upper right decoration unit 275, and a plate lower right decoration unit are formed on the front surface of each of them. 285 is attached. The right side of the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decoration portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d is of a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

  Further, the dish unit body 252 has a front notch 252e that is notched upward from a lower end of the front surface of a portion of the lower front decoration portion 252b that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251, and a lower plate body 251 of the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom surface cutout portion 252f that is cut out in a region below the above. The lower dish removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

  Further, the dish unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g which penetrates the front and rear at the lower right corner of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b and through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 is inserted, and above the handle insertion opening 252g, the lower front surface. It is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are centered in the left-right direction. The production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached is provided. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about ⅓ of the width of the dish unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled to the dish unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . Further, in a state where the dish decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower dish ball pulling button 263 of the lower dish ball punching unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower dish ball punching base 261 of the lower dish ball punching unit 260 is exposed. The bottom surface cutout 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5-4c. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower dish ball removing unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower dish ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and stores the game ball B in the lower dish 202 or discharges the game ball B from the lower dish 202 by opening and closing the lower dish ball removing hole 202a. It is for making things happen.

  The lower dish ball punching unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and has a flat plate-shaped lower dish ball punching base 261 having a through hole that penetrates vertically in the right front corner in plan view, and the lower dish ball punching unit. A slider 262 that is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the base 261 in the front-rear direction; a lower dish ball removal button 263 that is mounted on the front end of the slider 262; and a spring 264 that biases the slider 262 forward. A lower bowl removal lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower bowl removal lid 265 in the open state via the slider 262 are provided.

  The lower dish ball punching base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom cutout portion 252f of the dish unit body 252, and is vertically positioned at a position corresponding to the lower dish ball punching hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish removal base 261 to the left of the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin protruding upward in a cylindrical shape.

  The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 at the left end side to the left of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and the right end side is attached to the slider 262. The right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is formed with a slit extending leftward and rightward in which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  In the state where the lower dish ball punching unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball punching base 261 closes the bottom surface cutout portion 252f of the dish unit body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball punching base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit body 252. In the normal state, the lower dish ball removal unit 260 has the slider 262 located at the front moving end by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (the lower dish ball removal hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pushed rearward and moved rearward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. Becomes When the slider 262 moves rearward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 pushes the lower dish ball removing lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removing lid 265 centers the left end side and the right end side moves backward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, by moving the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located immediately above the through hole from the position of the through hole to the rear, the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball removal hole 202a.

  It should be noted that when the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower plate ball removing button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate ball removing button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, so that the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously connected. It can be discharged downward.

  In order to close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b is pressed backward, and the holding mechanism 266 releases the holding of the slider 262. It When the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 returns to the state in which it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5-4e. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the plate unit 200.

  The plate upper left decoration unit 270 has a translucent plate upper left decoration 271 that extends in the left-right direction and has a semi-cylindrical shape, and a plate upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left decoration 271. And a plate upper left decoration substrate 273 mounted on the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decoration 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging part 252a. The plate left upper decoration 271 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper left at the left end and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper left decoration 271 is formed in a milky white color.

  The plate upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the plate upper left decoration 271 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plate upper left decoration substrate 273 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends left and right along the plate upper left decoration 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by making them emit light, the plate upper left decoration 271 can be illuminated and decorated.

  In the state where the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the plate upper left decoration unit 270 does not have ribs in the longitudinal direction of the plate upper left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper left decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be made to emit light almost uniformly, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decoration unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical right and left translucent dish upper right decoration member 276, and a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decoration member 276. A plate upper right decoration substrate 278 mounted on the rear side of the plate upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate upper right decoration 276 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper right at the right end and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the semi-cylindrical is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed in milky white.

  The plate upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the plate upper right decoration body 276 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. The dish upper right decoration substrate 278 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends left and right along the dish upper right decoration body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decoration board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by making them emit light, the dish upper right decoration body 276 can be illuminated and decorated.

  The plate upper right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the plate upper right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate upper right decoration body 276, when a plurality of LEDs of the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper right decoration body 276 is illuminated. It can be made to emit light almost uniformly, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4f. Plate lower left decoration unit and plate lower right decoration unit]
The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. To be The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The dish lower left decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency, and a plate lower left ornamental body 281 and a plate lower left reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left ornamental body 281. And a plate left lower decorative substrate 283 mounted on the rear side of the plate left lower reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The plate lower left decoration 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view. Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate lower left decoration 281 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. The center axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left rear at the left end, and the center at the right end. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The lower left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 has a spherical shape. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a curvature of a semi-circular arc that becomes thinner toward the left end side. The dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a milky white color.

  The plate lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the lower plate left decorative body 281 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The dish lower left decoration substrate 283 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends left and right along the dish lower left decoration body 281. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decoration board 283 are full-color LEDs, and by making them emit light, the plate lower left decoration body 281 can be illuminated and decorated.

  The plate lower left decoration unit 280 is, when assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is the plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the plate lower left decoration unit 280, since the left end of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, it seems that the left end is submerged in the door frame 3. Since the plate lower left decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the plate lower left decoration body 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is illuminated. It can be made to emit light almost uniformly, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right, and has a translucent lower plate right ornamental body 286, and a plate lower right dish lower body attached to the rear side of the dish lower right dish decoration 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decoration board 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

  The dish lower right decoration body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape having a rear center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The plate lower right decoration 286 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. At the right end, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right rear, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The lower right end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a curvature of a semi-circular arc that becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decoration body 286 is formed in a milky white color.

  The plate lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the plate lower right decoration body 286 from the rear side, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The dish lower right decoration substrate 288 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends left and right along the dish lower right decoration body 286. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decoration board 288 are full-color LEDs, and by making them emit light, the dish lower right decoration body 286 can be illuminated and decorated.

  The plate lower right decoration unit 285 is, when assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. In the dish lower right decoration unit 285, the right end of the dish lower right decoration body 286 is formed into a spherical shape, and therefore, the right end looks as if it sunk into the door frame 3. The plate lower right decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the plate lower right decoration body 286. Therefore, when a plurality of LEDs of the plate lower right decoration board 288 are made to emit light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 is illuminated. The entire front surface of the can be light-emitted and decorated, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70 and the like. FIG. 67 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation button. 68 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates to participate in the effect. Is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is configured with an annular outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b arranged between the inner periphery and the inner periphery.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation section base 320 housed in the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation section base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation section 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation between the operation ring transmission unit 350 and the portion 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320.

  Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352. Of the decorative substrate cover 353 attached to the operation portion base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation portion 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation portion base 320, and the operation portion so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330. An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5-5a. Performance operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with an open upper portion and a rear portion.

  The performance operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 which is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 which is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and a unit front. A plate center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear in the plate center upper decoration body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light forward are mounted. The plate center upper decoration board 314, the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted from the rear in the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted to the front side. And a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the same are mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the rear side from this is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that an axis line perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on the upper end edge extending in a semicircular arc shape of the front portion is located forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a formed at the lowest position when assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward so that the shape of the unit front cover 312 in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 has a dish center upper decorative body 312a in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and a forward direction below the dish central upper decorating body 312a. The dish center lower decorative body 312b is formed so that the bulging half arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in the shape of a half arc. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by dividing a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extending in a semi-arcuate shape with the split surface toward the center side. It is formed in a bent shape. The plate center lower decoration body 312b extends in a semi-arcuate shape with a large curvature with respect to the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the plate center upper decoration body 312a. Is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects further forward than the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. In the assembled state of the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, respectively, and the dish central lower decorative body is The left and right ends of 312b are respectively continuous with the right end of the lower left dish unit 280 and the left end of the lower right dish unit 285. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in a milky white color.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear side into the dish center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312. The plate center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate having a semi-arcuate shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light on the upper surface forward (outside). Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the plate center upper decorative body 312a can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  The plate center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted from the rear into the plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312. The lower plate center reflector 315 blocks light from the LEDs mounted on the lower plate center decoration substrate 316 from leaking rearward (inward). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate having a semi-arcuate shape along the dish lower central decoration body 312b, and has a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the upper surface with light toward the front (outside). Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs on the plate lower central decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the plate central lower decorative member 312b can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312, which extends in a semi-circular shape, When the LEDs of the central upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate central lower decorative substrate 316 are made to emit light, it is possible to make the whole of them substantially uniformly light-emitting decorated, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The effect operation section cover unit 310, when assembled to the dish unit 200, has a front end that protrudes farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. In addition, in the rendering operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decoration 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate lower center decoration 312b is the plate lower left decoration 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5-5b. Operation base]
The operation section base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The operation section base 320 is inserted into the effect operation section cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

  The operation unit base 320 has a main body 321 whose outer shape is formed into a box shape having a substantially cubic shape and which is open at the upper side, and an outer periphery which extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer shape. Flange portion 322, a plurality of (in this case, four) leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper mounting that is formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and is attached to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 for penetrating the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opening upward and for rotatably supporting the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The main body 321 of the operation section base 320 is formed in a size capable of accommodating the effect operation button unit 360 inside. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and the portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

  The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body 321 has a through hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321. In the main body 321, the rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter such that the outer circumference thereof substantially matches the inner circumference of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the decoration substrate cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the production operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  In the gear bearing portion 325, the operation ring transmission gear can be mounted rotatably around an axis extending in the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 projects upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is the flange portion. It is exposed to the outside below 322.

  In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly lower than the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in a state in which the production operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5-5c. Stage operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72 and the like. 71A is a perspective view of the production operation ring of the production operation unit as seen from above and FIG. 71B is a perspective view of the production operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the upper front, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation portion 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The production operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring attachment base 331 and extend around the axis extending vertically, and the upward movement of the rotation base 332 that is attached to the ring attachment base 331. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates the ring.

  Also, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 forming a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the ring outer upper cover 335. The ring outer lower cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operation part 302 and the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, and form a part of the rotation operation part 302. And a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a light-transmitting annular shape.

  The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and an inner diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring attachment base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface in the circumferential direction. And a boss portion 331b for protrudingly mounting the bush 333 rotatably upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions, and a space in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a through hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of portions. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to project downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the performance operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state where the ring gear 332a is assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The outer ring upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface portion 335a in which a circular arc forming an outer portion and an upper portion in a circle extends annularly, and a plurality of them are arranged in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of outer upper cover attaching portions 335c that extend downward from the inner peripheral edge of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extend toward the center side and that are arranged in the circumferential direction. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of ¼ of the circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming a lower portion and an outer portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and an outer lower surface portion 336a protruding from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a to the upper side and the center side in the circumferential direction. A plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b, which are arranged on the lower side. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The inner ring cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc forming an inner portion and an upper portion in a circle extends annularly, and a tube extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel with the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b, and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner surface of the cylindrical surface portion 337b has the same size as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are continuous with the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a in a state of being assembled to the effect operation ring 330. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion within a range of ½ or more of a circle, and the whole is in a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5-5d. Rotational drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75 and the like. FIG. 73 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 73 (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as disassembled and seen from the front right side, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled rotary drive unit as seen from the front left side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating and driving the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and for detecting a rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302. The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

  The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft projects leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. The gear cover 345, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably attached in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 are covered from the left side. 346 and.

  The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotational position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

  The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that is integrally formed with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) than the transmission gear 344, and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the distance between them in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integer multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Accordingly, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like this. Accordingly, it is possible to detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 is located inside the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotary drive unit 340 drives the operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily rotate the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 can reciprocally rotate the rotary operation part 302 to vibrate by causing the operation ring drive motor 342 to cause the drive gear 343 to repeat forward / reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. it can.

  Further, in the rotary drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, so that the operation ring is driven in the same rotation direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted, and by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, the player's rotation operation can be performed. Can be loaded. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5-5e. Transmission gear for operating ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 integrally rotates with the bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the transmission detection of the rotary drive unit 340. And a drive-side gear portion 350b in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring side gear portion 350a and the drive side gear portion 350b are formed so that the pitch circles have the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 from above and the gear attachment member 351 being attached to the operation portion base 320. To be

  In the operation ring transmission gear 350, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the production operation ring 330 in a state where the operation side transmission gear 350 is assembled to the production operation unit 300, and the drive side gear portion 350b is provided. It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotational operation of the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotary drive unit 340 side, and also rotationally drive the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340. The effect operation ring 330 can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 and rotated.

[3-5-5f. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a shape in which an annulus is divided into front and rear, and a front decoration substrate 352a and a rear semicircle are formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate having a semicircular arc shape on the front side. The rear decorative substrate 352b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip having an arc shape. On each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b, a plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer circumference. The plurality of LEDs on the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The production operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring attachment base 331 of the production operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the production operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a transparent decorative substrate cover 353 on the upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed into a front and rear divided form, like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The production operation ring decoration board 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface to pass through the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331, and outside the ring forming the rotation operation section 302. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be light-emitted from the inside. Therefore, the player can see a light-emitting decoration such as an LED provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5-5 g. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and is capable of outputting vibration of various frequencies in addition to sound such as voice and music. Is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound (sound) such as voice, sound effect, and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation section base 320. At this time, the player will feel as if the effect operation unit 300 trembled. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can provide a player with more various effects.

  The vibration speaker 354 is intended to give sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and to give sound information so that vibration can be obtained by resonance. Here, when resonating, since it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the game machine, the material and hardness of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, and the attachment method, it is necessary to input sound information of only a specific frequency. In such a case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variations in characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb the variations in these characteristics, the frequency of the input sound information is not a single frequency but is input as a frequency having a width. Specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz and 38 Hz to 42 Hz are changed (swept) 8 times per 1 second in each 1 cycle. This is intermittently input by sweeping for 1 second, and then inputting again after 1 second.

  In the assembly operation of the gaming machine, regarding the inspection (operation confirmation) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment, the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game is operated. It is supposed to be done based on. Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when the game machine is turned on (or when the inspector turns on the game machine while operating the RAM clear switch), the main control board 1310 transmits (outputs) a command for clearing and initializing the RAM to the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later. Upon receiving this command, the peripheral control board performs a vibration speaker operation confirmation process for inspecting the vibration speaker (operation confirmation). By this vibration speaker operation confirmation processing, the inspector can confirm not only the sound (sound) such as voice and music from the vibration speaker 354, but also the vibration of the effect operation unit 300 by the vibration speaker 354. .

[3-5-5h. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78 and the like. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit of the production operation unit that is disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit that is disassembled and viewed from the lower front. FIG. 78 (a) is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and (b) is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation section base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation section 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation part 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation part 303a. ing.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery and is arranged in a target with a button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and a central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide shafts 362 that are connected at their upper ends to each other and have an outer periphery formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is mounted between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 by a pair of guide shafts 362 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the outer circumference is formed into a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disc-shaped lifting base 364 and the pair of guide shafts 362 respectively A pair of lift springs 365 urges the provided lift base 364 is passed upwardly, and a.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends in a column shape upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by being rotated by the driven gear 369 and having the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, the lower end of the elevating cam drive gear member 370, and the central shaft 66 is inserted rotatably and is mounted rotatably so as to cover the raising / lowering cam member 371 for raising and lowering the raising / lowering base 364, the raising / lowering drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 from above. And a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is attached above the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. The central button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 arranged between the central button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and biasing the central button body 373 upward, and the central button body 373 are substantially the same. A central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper base 363 so as to cover the upper portion of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button operation unit 303a is configured by the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375.

  In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to an outer surface of the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. An outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and the outer circumference of the central button body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 which covers the outer circumference of the central button body 373. A translucent cylindrical outer peripheral decoration lens 379, which is arranged on the outer peripheral side above the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and has a three-dimensional decoration, and ascending / descending so as to cover the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decoration lens 379. A transparent outer button that is attached to the base 364 and has a central button cover 375 facing upward in the center. Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is mounted on the button unit base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and a pressing cam drive gear member 370 mounted on the button unit base 361. An elevation detection sensor 382 for detecting the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320. The base main body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 mounted on the upper surface thereof, and a lower surface of the pressing detection sensor 381 and the lifting detection sensor 382. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center to the front and the rear. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of a metal rod. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is about half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and their lower ends abut on the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 and their upper ends abut on the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374.

  The elevating base 364 is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrating through the center at a size through which the elevating cam member 371 can pass. A standing wall portion 364c protruding upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting in the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall portion 364c are provided. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided so that it can be vertically moved up and down by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The lift base 364 is restricted from moving upward by contacting the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c with the upper base 363, and a space in which the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 can move is formed between the upper base 363 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that projects upward from the gear portion 370a, and is connected to the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. And a vertical movement detection piece 370c that is protruded downwardly from the vertical direction and is cut out at two locations facing each other and that is detected by the vertical movement detection sensor 382. The lift cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shape and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end portion in parallel with the axis, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from an end portion of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 78). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371a are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

  Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided at its lower end with a connected portion 371f that is connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370.

  The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d in the cam portion 371a rotates the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. Is formed. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371a can guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 to elevate the elevating base 364.

  The central button main body 373 has a cylindrical tubular portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts penetrating the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d that penetrates in the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom portion 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

  The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the tubular portion 373a and the bottom portion 373b. The center button body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects above the upper base 363. The center opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends shortly downward, and its lower end abuts the upper surface of the elevating base 364, whereby the downward movement of the center button body 373 is restricted. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 abuts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button body 373.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that the lower ends thereof penetrate the elevating base 364 and extend downward, and the screws into which the washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, so that the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central opening 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker biasing force than the elevating spring 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disc-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have a light-transmitting property. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. In the center button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373.

  A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the central button decoration substrate 376 are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can cause the central button cover 375 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the peripheral button decoration substrate 377 are full-color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can make the outer peripheral decoration lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, and has an annular substrate portion 378a that is attached to the elevating base 364, and extends from the inner periphery of the substrate portion 378a upwards in a cylindrical shape to form a central button body 373. And a cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is transparent.

  In the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decoration lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a in the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. In the outer peripheral button cover 380, the lower end of the tubular portion 380a is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380b is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in a state where the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365. The lifting cam member 371 is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position in which the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is located at the moving end toward the upper side by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Has become.

  Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly above the upper surface of the performance operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 extends from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 79, etc.).

  In this state (state of FIG. 78 (a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward to move downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is pressed. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is substantially level with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 81 (c)).

  Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  In this lowered position, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down drive gear 368 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the up-and-down cam drive is performed via the driven gear 369 meshing with the up-and-down drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in a plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 78 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The one cam 371b rolls to the left of the engaging portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d that relatively rolls to the left along the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

  In the state of the raised position, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of the one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lift drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the state of the raised position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 abuts the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. Further, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (the central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the time of the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When the production operation unit 300 is assembled and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of being projected more than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 81 (b) and the like). reference).

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. The central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364 by moving downward against the force. In the state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is apart from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected.

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, The center button body 373 contacts the elevating base 364, and then the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 abuts the button unit base 361. Become. By contacting the elevating base 364 with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in a lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

  As described above, when the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and pressing of the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward by a force greater than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the elevated position, the elevating base 364 moves the elevating base 364 through the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of the 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is projected upward by the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button body is The pressing detection piece 373e of 373 does not project downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation portion 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. Then, in FIG. 78 (b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 stops moving downward and the guide pin 364d moves. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c that is recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 by the button lifting drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5-5i. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 attached in the board box 391.

  The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled in the production operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a plate center upper decoration board 314, a plate center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer circumference button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, and the up-down detection sensor 382 are relayed to the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. There is.

[3-5-5j. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81 and the like. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 81 (a) is a front view of the plate unit in a normal state, FIG. 81 (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 81 (c) is a central pressing of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 9 is a front view of the dish unit when the operation portion is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation section 303 is a cylindrical central pressing operation section 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating section 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation section arranged between the central pressing operation section 303 a and the rotating operation section 302. And 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state in which the front side of an imaginary plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is inclined so as to be lower. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation part 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operating part 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302. More specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly projects above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 79 etc.).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in a clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operating portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward / reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle, the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 is rotated clockwise in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and is rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction, is smaller than the spacing between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction at equal intervals. , The interval is not an integral multiple. Accordingly, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

  In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation part 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. When the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 drives the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. At the same time, the operation ring drive motor 342 rotationally drives the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of half or more of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in a donut shape. Then, as shown in the figure, the rotation operating portion 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operating portion 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by a player's hand. .

  As a result, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, it is possible to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in a manner that is easy for the player to do and operate the rotation operation unit 302. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operating section 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation section 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. Since the lower surface side of the rotating operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of a car.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged in a row below the effect operation ring 330. Accordingly, by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated. Further, in the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs that are lined up are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating can be illuminated and decorated. As a result, the player can be illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

  In the normal operation state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface that is higher than that of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a lowered position in which it slightly protrudes upward. In this state, the rotation operation part 302 can be rotated and the central pressing operation part 303a of the pressing operation part 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressing detection is performed. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and press detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

  In a normal state, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the up-and-down base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously projects upward due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 to be in the raised position (see FIG. 81 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above and above the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project upward more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward with the pressing operation portion 303 in the raised position, first, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are in substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are the rotational operation portion 302. The height is approximately the same as the upper surface (see FIG. 81 (c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure.

  Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward with the pressing operation portion 303 in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operating portion 302 (see FIG. 81 (a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 according to the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, attention can be paid to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

  It should be noted that the rotation operating unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, some players can easily perform the rotating operation by using the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the pressing operation unit 303 interferes with the rotation operation. The operability of the rotary operation unit 302 can be changed due to the change, and a variety of operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. 82A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and a door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decoration board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decoration board 402, The door frame left side decoration body 404 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened to the front. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is formed in a strip-like shape extending vertically along the door frame left side decorative body 404, and is composed of a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b. Has been done. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decoration board 402 can make the door frame left side decoration body 404 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a penetrating therethrough at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decoration 404 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end thereof is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decoration 271 of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end thereof is the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decoration 453. Is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left side of the.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and makes it appear that a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. 85A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the upper right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200 and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right side of the door frame 3 to a position substantially the same as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction. And a plurality of side window interior decorations 410b capable of emitting light, which are arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see in the game area of the pachinko machine placed on the right side in a game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player who is playing with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult to see, and a personal space of the player can be formed so as to protect the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b which are attached to the front surface, extend in a cylindrical shape forward, and are vertically arranged, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b and are attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411. The internal reflectors 414 are respectively inserted into the interior decorations 410b of the side windows.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 which is disposed in front of the front end of the side window decoration member 412 and extends vertically. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and has a through hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and forms a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416 and the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is a flat plate in the up-down direction and the front-back direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. Frame having a through-hole 417a extending in a horizontal shape and penetrating in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a The side panel and 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is mounted on the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decoration board 418 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (here, three) of side window interior decoration parts 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-like cylinder whose front end side is slightly smaller in outer diameter than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed into a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decoration member 412, the front end of the side window decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window decoration member 412 is attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 at a position above the center in the up-down direction and above the center. The side window decoration member 412 is formed in a translucent milky white color.

  The decoration part decoration board 413 in the side window is formed in an elongated strip plate shape extending vertically along the decoration member 412 in the side window, and in the front surface of the door frame right side base 411, the decoration member 412 in the side window. It is attached to the rear part of the connection base 412a. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the decorative portion decoration board 413 in the side window, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the up, down, left, and right directions around the axis of the decorative portion 410b in the side window at a position behind each of the decoration portions 410b in the side window. Has been done.

  The inner reflector 414 is formed in an X shape in a front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window inner decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, that is, upper, lower, left and right.

  The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then rearward from the upper end toward the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a penetrating in the front-rear direction and exposing the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 to the front.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending elliptical shape, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed so as not to transmit light.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and forward and backward, a rear side thereof extends vertically in a straight line, and a front side thereof extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed with a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction in a vertically extending elliptical shape, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is opaque.

  The door frame right side decoration board 418 is formed in a vertically elongated strip plate shape along the door frame right side decoration body 419, and includes a right side upper decoration board 418a and a right side lower decoration board 418b. Has been done. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418 are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 can cause the door frame right side decoration body 419 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end thereof is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration body 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end thereof is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right side of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front edge (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy manner so that a 1/4 portion thereof projects from the top to the front, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction inside the side window 410a, and makes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 emit light. Thus, the decorative portion 410b in the side window can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window interior decoration portion 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, since the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that causes the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light is turned off, the side window It is possible to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the space between the three side window decorations 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not have to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily played. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for a game on the pachinko machine 1 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, it is possible to block the line of sight of the player located in the vicinity by other portions including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make the whole of the game area 5a invisible to the player, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if being seen by another player, so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. .

  Further, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a dazzle, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decorations 410b have a cylindrical shape, light is radiated in a band shape and a radial shape. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as the neighbor to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to look inside the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent discomfort from being unable to concentrate on the game and to feel uncomfortable due to the induction of mistakes, and to make the game more enjoyable by dedicating the player to the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90 and the like. 88A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, FIG. 88B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. FIG. 6 is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in a closed state. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 which is attached to the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, and the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the front upper part. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and the door frame top base 451. , And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453, and a door frame top central decoration board 455 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door. A door frame top left decoration board 456, which is attached to the left of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door A door frame top right decoration board 457, which is attached behind the frame top decoration body 453, to the right of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have it.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top right decoration board 457. And a top right reflector 460 mounted on the front surface of the top top cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 mounted near the left and right front ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively mounted on the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top. Door frame top relay mounted near the upper right end of the base 451 A plate 467, and a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending leftward and rightward with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left-right direction, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. And a front protrusion 451b protruding forward. The body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is located upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

  The top top cover 452 is formed to have a front view shape that is substantially the same as the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed in such a shape as to cover the outer sides of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect the front end upper portions of the left and right front protrusions 451b. At the front end of the top top cover 452, the center in the left-right direction protrudes most to the front, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut out from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame top decoration 453 has a shape in which the semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a curvature that decreases from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. Has been formed. As a result, the door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The door frame top decoration 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower ends of the main bodies 451a of the door frame top bases 451 and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. So that it extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction projects downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape. It has a pair of center speaker openings 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating vertically on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top central decoration substrate 455 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decoration board 455 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top central decoration substrate 455 can cause the central portion of the door frame top decoration 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can cause the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decoration board 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can cause the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 each extend in the left-right direction, and are provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes penetrating forward and backward are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protruding portions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs the high range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, sounds output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are radiated forward and downward.

  The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decoration board 455, a door frame top left decoration board 456, a door frame top right decoration board 457, a top center speaker 462, and a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub relay substrate 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the door frame right side decoration body 419, respectively, to form an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice or music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91 and the like. FIG. 91 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As illustrated, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate upper center decoration 312a of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  A plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate upper center decoration 312a, a door frame left side decoration 404, a door frame right side decoration 419, and a door frame top decoration surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, the player can see a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate center upper decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, which surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, and Behind the door frame top decoration body 453, a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, a door frame top central decoration Since the board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, the LEDs of these decoration boards are appropriately made to emit light, so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is illuminated and decorated. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to make it.

  In the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, a circular donut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper tray 201 in the front-rear direction, and coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotation operating portion 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. Two doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) large-diameter upper decoration body 312a and lower-plate middle decoration body 312b are attached vertically and spaced apart from each other The door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side unit 41 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged in the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decorations 312a and the plate center lower decorations 312b. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be conspicuous.

  Further, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate lower left decoration 281, the plate lower right decoration 286 and the plate lower center decoration 312b, which are arranged below the plate center upper decoration 312a, are The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a unit lower cover 311 having a hemispherical shape is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, in the effect operation unit 300, it becomes larger from the lower end to the upper part, so that it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation part 302 that is arranged on the upper side and is operable by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a doughnut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player is performed. It is possible to make the entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 easily visible, and to make the rotation operating unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easy to understand, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the diameter of the rotation operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-back direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation part 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are protruded farther forward than the upper plate 201, and the plate center top Since the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer circumference of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation manipulation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made to stand out significantly. At the same time, the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a pachinko machine 1 that is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and to appeal to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the present pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 98. FIG. 92 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 93 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 94 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

  The body frame 4 has a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. Main frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end of the main frame and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached, Main body lower hinge assembly in which the base unit 500 is attached to the lower end on the left side in a front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. And a solid 520.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 made of metal, and is attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B therein, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 mounted along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the unit 550 for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is attached to the body frame base 501 and that can be opened and closed, and a body frame base unit. And Tsu (500) viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 that is formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

  The payout base unit 550 is a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in the shape of a box extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and having a single guide passage extending leftward in a groove shape that is opened upward, and a tank rail 553 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. Between one rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. The ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at the position It includes a Tamatome member 557 are, a.

  The payout unit 560 is a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guide passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball guided by one guide passage of the ball guide unit 570. A payout device 580 for paying out B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper tank ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper tank ball path. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through the unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hooks 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that urges the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward are provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 99 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to a lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, which guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to a lower front portion of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 detachably. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a base main body 501a formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion port 501b that penetrates the front and rear in the range of the height and the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b is formed and the game board 5 is placed. It is provided with a placing portion 501c, and a game board regulating portion 501d which protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and which regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board placement portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540, and a launcher mounting portion. The cylinder insertion opening 501f, which penetrates the front and rear on the right side of the front part of the portion 501e when the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and the front and rear, which penetrates the front and rear on the lower left side of the game board mounting part 501c in the front view, the substrate unit. The circular speaker opening 501g that faces the body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620, and the body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and the normal of the cable mounting recess 501h. And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j rotatably attached to the rear main body 501a is formed near the upper and lower end portions of the rear end of the base body 501a at the left end in front view, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge mounting portion 501k and the lower hinge mounting portion 501l are provided.

  On the body frame base 501, a game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b can be attached and detached.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the site where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-shaped guide main body 502a extending leftward and rightward, protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends rightward from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b extending out, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and penetrating forward and backward at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and left and right. A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

  The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than a length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Has been formed. The attachment shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically in the vicinity of the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate (hinge rotation) such that the left end side projects forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 includes a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. It is connected to the relay board 105.

  Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 100 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 in the left-right direction. ) Is rotatably attached about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In the state of being in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a of 502, the left-right direction of the plurality of through holes 502d formed at the upper and lower end sides of the guide body 502a is It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted through the pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 100 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (desirably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 100 (b)).

  The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases as the door frame 3 is opened, but stops increasing when the opening angle α exceeds a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). To change. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at the opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. Can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 is not provided. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the.

  Further, since the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened, when the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back by 180 degrees changes to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 acts due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the crease, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Furthermore, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is located closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end of the connection cable guide member 502 to move toward the door frame hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axial center) side of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and is centered on the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, rather than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle that intersects with the tangent line to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the front end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be surely closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is also the door frame 3 The above-mentioned door frame hinge assembly 120 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical protrusion upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 511. A main body frame upper hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the up-down direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion in a front view, and has an upper hinge hole 511a for a door frame for pivotally supporting the upper door frame hinge assembly 120. I have it.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. A door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Body frame under hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an interval upward from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3 extending upward from a position rearward of the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion. , Are provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. To be The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. Can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in a plan view whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded mold material.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and downward on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for driving into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength according to the turning angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 540 is mounted on the launching device mounting portion 501e of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 and a flat plate-shaped launching base 541, and is attached to the rear surface of the right side of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front. From the vicinity of the tip of the launching solenoid 542, the launching solenoid 542 including a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the launching base 541, the batting mallet 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and the tip of the batting mallet 543. A launch rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll is provided.

  In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in the state where the handle 182 is operated, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength according to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is hit into the game area 5a.

  Note that, due to the hitting strength of the game ball B and the like, when the hit game ball B does not reach the inside of the game area 5a, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) From the space between them, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 102 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 is molded of transparent synthetic resin, and has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a front-back portion having a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front. A left side plate portion 551b having a substantially same width and extending downwardly, and a right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in front view which is substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a and extending downwardly. , A back plate upper part 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a substantially constant rightward direction from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. The left back plate portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end in width, the inner side plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left back plate portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and the left side plate portion 551b. From the front of the bottom side to the right Includes a bottom plate portion 551g which extends substantially to the same position as 51e right side of the connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open to the front and the inside of the L shape. It should be noted that an eaves portion 551da that projects rearward is formed in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d at a portion spaced apart from the lower side by a predetermined length.

  As for the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same width as the width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 in the left-right direction, and the left side plate portion 551b is located above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

  Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow recess-shaped portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the discharge portion 551 is provided at that portion. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached, which projects rightward at the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front.

  The dispensing base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and is a box tank extending in the left and right, which is opened upward and has a ball tank 552, and a portion extending to the left and right of the dispensing base 551. A tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending to the left in the shape of a groove opened upward is provided.

  In addition, the payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 while being spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction and leftward in front view. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

  The ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, is molded in an opaque black color, and is formed in the left-right direction to be about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551. In addition, the front-back direction is formed to have a length shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-back direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate 551a. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

  The tank rail 553 is molded of non-conductive transparent synthetic resin, and is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is diagonal from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rearward, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one from the depth that is several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and to extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is low, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward to form a single guide passage. Has been done. An opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with an upper end opening of a single guide passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height on the left end side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower at various angles. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially matches the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged substantially on the same plane. It has become so. The cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a in which the tank rails 553 are arranged in the front-rear direction is a plurality of downward bends from the front side to the back side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed like a staircase. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of a polyamide (nylon) resin, are molded in opaque white, and are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. .. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque white color. One rail cover 554 side end is rotatably attached about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 110). By rectifying the flow of the game sphere B on the upper side of the game sphere B which is circulating in two stages by the rectifying piece 556a and rectifying the flow so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side, the inside of the tank rail 553 Even if the height becomes low, it does not block the ball.

  The ball stopper member 557 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque red color. The ball stopper member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction near the left end when viewed from the front. By sliding to, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 can be closed so that the game ball B does not flow from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape in the front-back direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is downward as it goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a staircase shape with multiple bends. A part of the plurality of bent portions formed in a stepped shape is formed as a board housing portion 551aa for mounting the external terminal board 558 and the frame ground board 559. The upper side of the external terminal board 558 is covered with a terminal cover 551k made of transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal board 558 has a mounting surface and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in the present embodiment, the external terminals XCN1 arranged in a line from the left side to the right side when the payout base unit 550 is viewed from the rear). ~ XCN10 is provided with 10 external terminals.)) Is exposed and the board is housed so that its mounting surface is vertical toward the rear of the payout base 551 when the payout base 551 is viewed from the front. It is attached to the portion 551aa. On the other hand, the frame ground substrate 559 is horizontal with the mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are provided) mounted downward facing. Thus, the payout base 551 is arranged in front of the external terminal plate 558 as viewed from the front, is attached to the board housing portion 551aa, and is covered with the terminal cover 551k. For this reason, the frame ground board 559 is in a state of being housed in the space formed by the board housing portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded of transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodating portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k can be visually recognized from the outside of the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

  The height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 is 13.4 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm). On the other hand, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (the mounting height becomes 9.8 mm when the housings corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are inserted). When the frame ground board 559 is housed and mounted inside the board housing portion 551aa and the external terminal board 558 is mounted on the rear surface of the board housing portion 551aa, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the rear side, the frame ground board 559 is provided. Is hidden due to the presence of the external terminal board 558 and is difficult to see, but only the ground terminals ECN2 and ECN4 of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame ground board 559 are in a state of protruding from the lower side of the external terminal board 558, and the pachinko machine. 1 can be seen from the back surface (see, for example, FIG. 93). Although the height of the earth terminal ECN3 is 13.4 mm as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, it is hidden due to the presence of the ball rectifying member 556 and is difficult to be visually recognized. The height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm as described above, and the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 cannot be projected from the lower side of the external terminal board 558. It is difficult to see. A detailed description of the frame ground substrate 559 will be given later.

  The external terminal board 558 is for making electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame earth substrate 559 is for temporarily collecting electromagnetic noise generated at various places and grounding it to the island facility of the game hall.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104 and the like. FIG. 103 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 103 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 104 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570, which guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 for paying out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a line by one guiding passage of the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 includes one payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from one guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 can flow, and one ball removal branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. It has a passage 580b, and in a normal state, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b to the upper tank ball path unit 600 side.

  The upper tank ball path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104 and the like. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 from the rear side, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

  The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 which has a guiding path 570a extending in a meandering shape in which the game ball B can flow, and which is open to the front, and closes the front side of the guiding unit base 571. The flat-shaped guide passage front lid 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a, and the movement of the movable piece member 573 are detected to detect the game ball B in the guide passage 570a. And a ball cutting detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of the (see FIG. 110).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front lid 572 are formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide the guide path. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering shape while repeatedly folding back and forth between the widths of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the flow direction in which the game ball B flows. It can be guided in a line.

  The movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570 such that the movable piece member 573 can advance and retract into the guiding passage 570a. More specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an upper portion of the movable piece member 573 around an axis extending in the front and rear direction at a right outer side portion of the guide passage 570a, and a part of a lower end thereof projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. Is formed. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a by the game ball B coming into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a and not protruding. Becomes

  The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 projects into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

  In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is the discharging passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guiding passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108 and the like. FIG. 105 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, taken along the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 106 (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear center of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 106 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). Is. FIG. 107 is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining the rotation position of the dispensing blade. FIG. 108 is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining ball clogging and ball drop prevention. In addition, in order to explain the rotation position of the payout blade, FIG. 107 shows a part of the payout gear member and various gears that cannot be visually recognized from the back surface of the payout device, and is the subject of the description. A small circle mark is attached to the bottom portion of the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589. Here, first, the configuration of the dispensing device 580 will be described, and subsequently, the rotational position of the dispensing blade, ball clogging prevention, and ball drop prevention will be described.

[4-7-2a. Structure of payout device]
The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear side. The payout device 580 is a box-shaped open to the rear and has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device main body 581 having a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and payout. A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and is opened rearward. ing. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded in opaque black. The dispensing device rear lid 582 is made of polycarbonate resin and is molded transparently. Therefore, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a can be visually recognized from the back side of the payout device 580 through the transparent payout device rear lid 582.

  Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and a rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 (the number of teeth Z0: 9) that is attached, and a spur gear that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583. Second transmission gear 586 (the number of teeth Z1: 20), and a spur gear-shaped second gear that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583. The transmission gear 587 (the number of teeth Z2: 20), the spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a meshing with the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a (the number of teeth Z3: 24) extend outward. A payout gear member 588 having a number of detection pieces 588b rotatably mounted between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front cover 583, and a payout device between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. Detects a dispensing blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the gear member 588 and project into the dispensing passage 580a, and a detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 attached to the rear side of the dispensing device body 581. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 for rotating. The payout motor 584 is controlled by the payout control board 633 and is step-driven. When the pay-out motor 584 is step-driven, the pay-out motor 584 rotates the rotary shaft stepwise at a predetermined angle (18 degrees in the present embodiment) accordingly. That is, the payout motor 584 rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step rotation. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin and are molded in opaque black. The payout blade 589 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin, and is molded in an opaque white color.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581, and the payout device rear side. The ball-removing movable piece 592, which is attached to the ball-removing path 580b so as to be openable and closable at a portion branched from the dispensing path 580a by the lid 582, and the ball-removing movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-removing path 580b is closed. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 are provided with a ball removing lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in opaque white. The ball pulling lever 593 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in opaque red.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically in a plan view. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position toward the left from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a obliquely extends downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly obliquely downward to the right, It bends at about 1/3 of the width on the left and right and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after being bent to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B with the outer circumference of the payout blade 589. Is formed in a circular arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in rear view with respect to the center of the payout blade 589.

  In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end. As the payout detection sensor 591, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used.

  The ball passage passage 580b branches at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view, and in the rear view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end. At this branching portion, a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580a has a predetermined distance dimension, and a ball clogging prevention portion 581r is provided in a rib-like shape toward the ball ejection passage 580b. The upper surface of 581r and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580a are formed in the same plane to form a right-downward inclined surface in rear view. A detailed description of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r will be described later.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball-moving movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball-out passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each other so as to form a narrower gap and to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball passage passage 580b in rear view. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball-removing passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend rearward at a position at a height of about ⅓ from the rear side. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly form the side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-moving movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the rear view right side of a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the payout device front cover 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b having an arcuate shape extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout vane 589 is provided with three vane pieces 589a having an arc shape concentrically extending outward in a flat plate shape from the rotation axis thereof at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the payout passage in a portion extending toward the rotation axis from above in the payout passage 580a and then extending to the right in rear view. In addition, it projects into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 is provided with, between the three blade pieces 589a, a sphere accommodating portion 589b that is recessed toward the center side with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B, and is recessed with an arc on the outer peripheral portion of the columnar shape. By forming the elliptical ball accommodating portions 589b at equal intervals, three blade pieces 589a serving as peaks and three spherical accommodating portions 589b serving as valleys are alternately formed. Only one game ball B can be stored in the ball storage portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. As a result, the game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by a payout device rear cover 582 and a payout device front cover 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in rear view when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

  The ball-removable movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-removable movable piece 592 is bent in a V shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The hollow movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball-removing passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b through the gap between them.

  The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the up and down direction in the rear view left near the upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592. A part of the ball pull-out lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the projecting portion. When the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the lower end, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 593 can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear can be restricted. The ball removing passage 580b can be closed by the ball removing movable piece 592. Further, when the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 106). In this way, the ball can be removed by opening the ball removing passage 580b using the ball removing lever 593.

  When the ball removal is performed by raising the ball removal lever 593 to make the ball removal movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B which is in a state like a bead connection on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592. However, it will flow down to the ball removal passage 580b side beyond the ball removal movable piece 592. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a in a straight line, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that restricts the flow of the game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B is more than the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down sooner.

  In this way, in the state in which the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, and thus the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. Although the game ball B will come into contact with the lower end side of the ball vigorously, the ball-removing movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the ball-removing passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the abutting force moves the ball-removing movable piece 592 to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the removal passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball removal movable piece 592 by the game ball B. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  From this, since it is possible to make it difficult for the ball-removing movable piece 592 to be damaged, it is possible to discharge more game balls B to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-removing passage 580b more quickly, and thus the pachinko machine. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer to each other than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball-removing movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-removing passage 580b, the ball-removing movable piece 592 connects the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the space, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball-removing movable piece 592, the distance from the game ball B is smaller than that of the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

  Then, by blocking the outward movement of the game ball B between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball-removing movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball-ball moving movable piece 592, the ball-ball movable piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and the main body side guide The game ball B does not jump out from the space between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b, and the game ball B can be surely distributed to the downstream side of the ball-removing passage 580b.

[4-7-2b. Rotational position of payout blade]
As described above, the dispensing device 580 has a spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 (the number of teeth Z0: 9) attached to the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 (which meshes with the drive gear 585). Number of teeth Z1: 20), spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 (number of teeth Z2: 20), spur gear-shaped delivery gear 588a that meshes with the second transmission gear 587 (number of teeth). Z3: 24) and a payout gear member 588 having a plurality of detection pieces 588b, a payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588, and the like. When the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotationally driven, the rotation is dispensed via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588. It is transmitted to rotate the blade 589.

  Here, the rotation speed of the payout gear member 588 is the rotation speed of the payout motor 584 reduced by the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. . The speed reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588 by calculation based on mechanics. In the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor that is excited by 2-2 phase excitation having a rotary shaft that rotates 18 degrees in one step rotation (the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 20 steps and 360 degrees ( = 18 degrees x 20 steps)), and the payout blade 589 rotating integrally with the payout gear member 588 rotates 6.75 degrees (= 18 degrees x reduction ratio n) when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 rotates one step. It will rotate. As a result, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 54 steps, the payout blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 54 steps), and one rotation (360 degrees rotation) causes 4.5. It will rotate extra times.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated 54 steps, the payout blade 589 rotates by 364.5 degrees, so that the payout blade 589 makes one rotation (360 degrees rotation). It is necessary to rotate the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 in steps of 53.333 ... The number of steps, which is the number of times, does not become an integer.

  That is, in the present embodiment, three sphere accommodating portions 589b are formed on the payout blade 589 at equal intervals, and the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by only 18 degrees as a predetermined angle in response to step driving. Through the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 rotates by 6.75 degrees (that is, the rotational axis of the payout motor 584 is 1). When the step rotation (rotation by 18 degrees), the payout blade 589 is rotated by 6.75 degree), so that the payout blade 589 can send out one game ball B every 120 degrees rotation, and the payout. In order to rotate the blade 589 by 120 degrees, it is necessary to rotate the payout motor 584 by 17.777 ... step rotation (= 120 degrees / 6.75 degrees). In view of this, in the present embodiment, the 18-step rotation, which is an integer obtained by rounding up the decimal point, is set as the number of times of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the sending of one game ball by the payout blade 589, and thereby the payout blade By rotating 589 over 120 degrees (actually, 121.5 degrees rotation (= 18 step rotations × 6.75 degrees)), the rotational position of the payout blade 589 up to a position for receiving the next game ball B. It can be rotated.

  The payout blade 589 can pay out three game balls B each time it makes one rotation (rotation by 360 degrees), but there is a case where only one game ball B is paid out, for example, cigarette tar or dust. Since the blade rotation detection sensor 590 may erroneously detect the rotational position of the payout blade 589 due to such reasons, every time one gaming ball B is paid out, processing for setting the origin of the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is performed. Is preferred. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of times of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is 18 step rotations, which is an integer rounded up to the right of the decimal point. The payout blade 589 is rotated over 120 degrees (actually, it is rotated at 121.5 degrees (= 18 step rotations × 6.75 degrees)) and pays out every time one game ball B is paid out. The accuracy of the rotational position of the payout vane 589 is improved by performing the process of setting the origin of the rotational position of the vane 589.

  In addition, as described above, the number of times of step driving to the payout motor 584 commensurate with the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer as described above, and thus each game ball is paid out. Even if the error is accumulated in, the rotation angle of the payout blade 589 is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589, so that the game ball is one ball. Each time you pay out, the accumulated error can be reset. As a result, even if an error occurs every time one game ball is paid out due to the influence of cigarette tar or dust, the accumulated error can be reliably reset every time one game ball is paid out. You can do it. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for an error to occur in the rotational position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends the game ball.

  In addition, as described above, the number of times of step driving to the payout motor 584 commensurate with the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer as described above, and thus each game ball is paid out. The positioning position is different every time. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, so that the adhesion positions of the tar and dust can be dispersed. Also, if the reduction ratio of the rotation transmitting member is set to cause such a positioning error, the error accumulates, but even if the error accumulates every time one game ball is paid out, the rotation angle of the payout blade 589 is When a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 of FIG. 105 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589 detect the accumulated error, the accumulated error is reset to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is guaranteed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, by changing the rotation position of the ball feeding rotating unit that receives and sends the game ball, the position where the tar and dust adhere is dispersed by changing the position of the ball every time the game ball is paid out. On the other hand, it is possible to have a strong dispensing device 580. The payout device 580 has a single payout passage 580a as described above. Therefore, when compared with a payout device having payout blades in two payout passages, when the payout speeds of the game balls are the same, the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having one payout passage 580a in the present embodiment. Needs to spin twice as fast. Then, the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having the one payout passage 580a in the present embodiment causes the game ball and the payout blade 589 to collide with each other, as compared with the payout device having the payout blades at the two payout passages. Since the number of times is doubled, there is a high probability that tobacco tar and dust will adhere to the payout blade 589.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated 54 steps, as described above, the payout blade 589 exceeds one rotation. If the control for determining and managing as a set is performed, an angular difference of 4.5 degrees is generated with respect to one rotation of the payout blade 589 every 54 steps of the rotation axis of the payout motor 584. For example, 80 sets are set. In the case of, the angular difference is finally piled up to 360 degrees (= 4.5 degrees × 80 sets), and the number of balls for paying out the game ball B is increased by 3 balls.

  As described above, the payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. Specifically, three 120-degree regions having a 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed are arranged along the circumferential direction. . As described above, the detection piece 588b is detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 rotates the payout blade 589, which rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 so that the above-described angle difference does not occur. As an example, by setting a 120-degree area having a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed as one management range, the game ball B is one ball. It can be managed as a payout operation.

  Specifically, first, in the region of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588, the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the 60-degree area in which the detection piece 588b is formed. Since this is the state, the light-shielding range corresponds to 9 steps of rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 (corresponding to 60.75 ° (= 6.75 ° × 9 steps) rotation of the dispensing blade 589 rotating integrally with the dispensing gear member 588). In the region of 60 degrees in which the detection piece 588b is not formed, the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is in a state in which the detection piece 588b does not block the light axis. Therefore, the rotation axis of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps. (Corresponding to 60.75 ° (= 6.75 ° × 9 steps) rotation of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the 120-degree area in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588 is set as the light-shielding range at the 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed, and the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps. It is managed by 18-step rotation which is a combination of 9-step rotation of the rotating shaft of the pay-out motor 584 with the light receiving range in a region of 60 degrees where the piece 588b is not formed, and for the pay-out of one ball of the game ball B. This is performed by rotating the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 18 steps.

  When the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates by 9 steps, the payout blade 589, which rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, rotates by 60.75 ° (= 6.75 ° × 9 steps), which is a light shielding range of 60 °. Since the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 can rotate slightly larger than the light receiving range of 60 degrees, a 60 degree region (light shielding range) where the detection piece 588b is formed, It is possible to reliably determine the 60-degree region (light receiving range) where the detection piece 588b is not formed.

  Here, a method of setting the origin of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. As shown in FIG. 107A, the payout control board 633 has a state in which the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 transitions the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 from the blocked state to the non-blocked state (“first edge”). "Detection state") is set as the rotational position of the payout blade 589 as point A. At this point A, the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 is restricted by the blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589.

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589, which is obtained by rotating the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the point A, as the origin, as shown in FIG. 107 (b). At this origin, only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589. In this state, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line.

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589, which is obtained by rotating the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 4 steps from the origin, as point B. At this point B, the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 is in a state in which the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state (referred to as "second edge detection state"). In the region where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 rotates from the point A to the origin and the point B, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), as shown in FIG. Of the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the member 588, it is a 60-degree region in which the detection piece 588b is not formed).

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589, which is obtained by rotating the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 from the point B by 9 steps, as the above-mentioned point A. At this time, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 at the origin is moved to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580a. In the region where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 rotates from the point B to the point A, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), as shown in FIG. Of the 120-degree area in the circumferential direction of FIG.

  Here, the control of the dispensing device 580 by the dispensing control board 633 will be briefly described. The payout control board 633 executes a power-on process on the payout control side when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after power is restored (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). The payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the steady process when the initial setting process and the interrupt start setting are executed in the power-on process on the payout control side. The payout control board 633 generates an interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms) after the interrupt start setting, and executes the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly performs various processes such as a payout motor control process, a history creation process, and an origin setting process in the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process.

  The payout control board 633 excites the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation with a pulse width of 4 ms by repeatedly executing the payout motor control process. The payout control board 633 confirms the presence / absence of the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 every 2 ms by repeatedly executing the history creation processing. The payout control board 633 detects the blade rotation detection sensor 590 at every 4 ms for switching the excitation of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation, that is, based on the detection signals from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 confirmed this time and the previous time. As a result of checking whether the detection piece 588b is in the state of blocking or non-blocking the optical axis, the result is confirmed from the least significant bit to the most significant bit of history information having an 8-bit width. After bit-shifting toward the bits one by one, when both the confirmation results of this time and the previous time indicate that the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit. On the other hand, when both the confirmation results of this time and the previous time indicate that the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, or this time. When the confirmation result of the blade rotation detection sensor differs from that of the blade rotation detection sensor (for example, when one of the confirmation results of the present time and the previous time is in a state where the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 and the other is the blade rotation detection sensor). When the detection piece 588b is in a state of not blocking the optical axis of 590), the value 1 is set to the least significant bit.

  As described above, in the history creation process, the payout control board 633 updates and creates history information having an 8-bit width every 4 ms for switching the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation. The payout control board 633 executes an origin setting process for setting the rotational position of the payout blade 589 as the origin, based on the history information updated and created every 4 ms. When the payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the payout motor control process to rotate the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A, as described above, Since the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is the origin, the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is located in the region of 60 degrees where the above-described detection piece 588b is not formed, and the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is detected. 588b is in a non-blocking state.

  Then, in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored and held in the history information having an 8-bit width, the detection piece 588b immediately before the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A is the blade rotation detection sensor 590. The state is the state (first edge detection state) in which the optical axis of (1) is transited from the blocking state to the non-blocking state, and therefore 00000001B (“B” indicates bit information. The same applies to the following). . Then, when the rotation position of the payout blade 589 advances from the point A to the origin, 00111111B is set in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored and held in the history information having an 8-bit width. In the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 firstly masks the history information with the first determination value of 1110000B, thereby extracting the data from the past eight times to five times as the calculation result from the history information. Later (here, the calculation result becomes 00110000B by the first mask processing). By further performing the second mask processing on the extracted data, the second determination value of 00010000B is obtained five times before the history information. The data is taken out as the calculation result (here, the calculation result is 00010000 due to the second mask processing. When the value is 0, it is determined that the current rotational position of the payout blade 589 is not at the origin, and the current rotational position of the payout blade 589 is not set as the origin. On the other hand, when the value is not 0, the payout is performed. It is determined that the current rotation position of the blade 589 is at the origin, and the current rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set as the origin.

  Note that, in the origin setting process, when the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set as the origin, the payout control board 633 rotates the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is located at the origin. Then, the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is set to point B, and the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps from the state where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at point B (that is, the light shielding range is exceeded. (This becomes the light receiving range again.) At a total of 13 step rotations in which the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is set to point A again, this processing is ended as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, when the payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, until the time until the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by a total of 13 steps elapses. An origin detection prohibition time is provided for prohibiting the origin setting for the payout blade 589.

  The payout control board 633 switches the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation to excitation every 4 ms by executing a payout motor control process. As shown in FIG. 107, the payout control board 633 rotates the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A and sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589 as the origin. Is 20 ms (= 4 ms × 5 step rotation), and the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is rotated by 5 steps from the state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is located at the origin. The time taken to be the point is 16 ms (= 4 ms × 4 step rotations), and the rotation axis of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated 9 steps from the state where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the point B (that is, the shaded range is The time when the rotating position of the payout blade 589 is again set to the point A is 36 ms (= 4 ms × 9 step rotation). As described above, the payout of one ball of the game ball B is performed by 18-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. Therefore, the payout time of one ball of the game ball B is paid out. The rotation time of the rotation shaft of the motor 584 is 18 steps, which results in 72 ms (= 4 ms × 18 steps rotation).

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a payout device for paying out a number of game balls according to a rotation amount of a payout rotating body that receives and sends the game balls by driving a payout motor (for example, Open 2004-041261 (paragraph [0052], and FIG. 4)). In the gaming machine of this document, the rotation time of one step of the payout motor is set to 18 mS, and the payout motor is rotated by 30 degrees by the output of the data driving data for four steps and set to pay out one game ball. ing. In a pachinko machine installed in a pachinko parlor, it is inevitable that cigarette tar, dust, and the like adhering to the game ball adhere to the inside of the dispensing device. Further, since the dispensing device is not disassembled and cleaned, there is a demand for a dispensing device that is strong against cigarette tar and dust. By the way, in the gaming machine of this document, the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees and pay out one game ball by driving the payout motor for four steps. Therefore, an accurate operation can be expected. It can be seen that the contact position between the ball and the payout rotating body is the same every time. For this reason, there is a problem that the position where the tar and dust of the cigarette adheres is also fixed and is easily accumulated.

[4-7-2c. Prevention of ball clogging and ball dropout]
Next, ball clogging prevention and ball drop prevention will be described with reference to FIG. Here, first, the prevention of ball clogging at the time of ball removal will be described, and then the ball removal prevention due to the non-energized state of the dispensing motor 584 will be described.

  As described above, the ball pulling lever 593 can be arranged such that the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b by being positioned at the rising end, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened. You can do it. When performing ball removal, the ball removal lever 593 is raised to make the ball removal movable piece 592 rotatable. At this time, in the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), a part of the passage inner wall forming the payout passage 580a from the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589. Is a state in which a total of four game balls B are stopped up to a rib-shaped ball clogging prevention portion 581r projecting toward the ball removal passage 580b with a predetermined distance dimension. As the predetermined distance dimension, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r is on the right side and downstream of the left end side of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r (that is, the payout blade 589 is present). The length is located on the downstream side of the payout passage 580a. Accordingly, a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the payout passage 580a has a predetermined distance from the ball storage portion 589b of the payout vane 589, and the rib-like ball clogging prevention portion is projected toward the ball removal passage 580b. When a plurality of game balls B are stopped in the payout passage 580a up to 581r, a part of the last game ball B that is stopped is in a state of protruding toward the ball removal passage 580b in the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. That is, as the predetermined distance dimension, when the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is parked on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r, it is formed so as to form the side wall of the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B flowing down along the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a mentioned above collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. Even so, the length is such that it can flow down to the side of the ball removal passage 580b. In this way, the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r in a state of protruding toward the ball removal passage 580b (in other words, ball clogging prevention). The length of a part of the game ball B staying on the upper surface of the portion 581r protrudes toward the ball-removing passage 580b), and the width of the ball-removing passage 580b is restricted to a width that allows one game ball B to flow down. Is able to.

  Further, as described above, the ball clogging prevention portion 581r has the upper surface thereof and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the payout passage 580a formed in the same plane to form a right-down inclined surface in rear view.

  In other words, when the ball is removed while the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stays on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a. However, even if it collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r, the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r is a right downward inclined surface in rear view. , The center (center of gravity) of the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r is located on the right side and downstream of the left end side of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r. Since it is formed in, it is possible to prevent the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r from splashing due to a collision and flowing down toward the ball removal passage 580b. Be able to Going on. Thereby, in the vicinity of the left end of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a from being clogged.

  As a result, the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r is removed along the ball removal path (main body side guide wall 581a and rear lid side guide wall 582a). The flow path of the game ball B on the side) is regulated to a width that allows one game ball B to flow down as the width of the ball drop passage 580b, as indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 108 (a). As a result, ball clogging can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent ball clogging during ball removal. In the present embodiment, the width of the ball passage 580b is set so as to be from the minimum width: 12 mm to the maximum width: 14 mm, although it varies depending on the rotation position of the payout blade 589. It is set to 13 mm when the position is stopped at the origin. Incidentally, ball clogging is likely to occur in a place where the width of each passage is narrower than twice the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball and slightly narrower than twice the diameter (21 mm) of the game ball.

  Next, a description will be given of prevention of ball dropout when the payout motor 584 is not energized. In the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is accommodated in the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589. The game ball B is connected to the game ball B, and the subsequent game ball B is in contact with the game ball B and is stopped in the payout passage 580a. In this state, as described above, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line. Further, as described above, the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper side by about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and slightly to the right from there. After being bent obliquely downward, it is bent at about 1/3 of the left and right widths and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589.

  Therefore, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B that comes into contact with the game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589 is the center of the game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589 ( The position is slightly shifted to the left of the position of the center of gravity, and in the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, the game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589 follows the game ball B. The rightward force (that is, the force that rotates clockwise) acts on the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 by the ball pressure due to the own weight of the game ball B.

  In such a state, when the payout motor 584 is in the non-energized state, the payout motor 584 naturally rotates in the clockwise direction with respect to the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589, and is housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589. The game ball B flows down (is sent out) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and a ball drop occurs.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the payout motor 584 is in the non-energized state, even if the payout motor 584 naturally rotates in the clockwise direction with respect to the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589, the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is set to the payout blade 589. The shape of the payout passage 580a on the right side of the payout vane 589 is formed in the rear view so that it can be stopped in six steps from the origin.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 108B and 108C, when the dispensing motor 584 is in the non-energized state, the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 6 steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 and is stopped. At the game ball B abutting on the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589, a point S1 at which the game ball B abuts the side wall of the payout passage 580a and the outer circumference of the arcuate blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589. Of the surface, the ball accommodating portion 589b in which the game ball B is accommodated (that is, the ball accommodating portion 589b in which the game ball B is accommodated, and the ball accommodating portion 589b in which the following game ball B is not accommodated are accommodated. Of the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a that connects the portion 589b and the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a, the point S2, which comes into contact with the ball accommodating portion 589b side in which the game ball B is accommodated from the center of the outer peripheral surface), respectively leans. It is formed the shape of sea urchin dispensing passage 580a. As a result, a spherical pressure that presses the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589 can be generated, and the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 can rotate 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589 and stop. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from coming off due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584.

  When the payout control board 633 starts controlling the payout motor 584 in a state where the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589 and stopped, the payout control board 633 rotates 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589. Since it is advancing, it is in a state of advancing by 2 steps in the light-shielding range (9 steps) beyond the point B advanced by 4 steps from the origin shown in FIG. 107 (d). However, when the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates by 13 steps (the remaining 7 steps rotate + 5 steps from the point A because it advances by rotating 2 steps out of 9 steps shown in FIG. 107 (d)), the payout blade 589 The rotation position of is the origin, and the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 flows down (is sent out) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a and is paid out. It is adapted to be reliably detected by the detection sensor 591. Therefore, even when the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is stopped from the origin of the payout blade 589 (by rotating by 6 steps) and stopped, the game ball B does not have an excessive number of balls to be paid out.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the payout control board 633 is used for pressing the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200, and issuing a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Accordingly, the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is controlled to pay out the instructed number of the game balls B to the player side (the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202), so that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or a power failure occurs. At the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after (instantaneous power failure caused by an instantaneous power failure), first, the payout motor 584 is controlled so that the operation of returning the rotational position of the payout blade 589 to the origin is not performed. As described above, in the state in which the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is displaced from the origin of the payout blade 589 (by rotating by 6 steps and stopped) and stopped, the game ball B has an excessive number of balls to be paid out. This is to prevent this.

[4-7-3. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104 and the like. The upper full-ball path unit 600 is attached from below to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 below the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper tank ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower tank ball path unit 610. The upper full-ball path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 is a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 which is attached to the dispensing base 551 and whose rear side is open, and a upper open tank base 601 which is attached to the rear side and whose front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and that can push the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 projects rightward from the right side in front view, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting a back cover.

  Further, the upper tank bulb path unit 600 has an upper opening near the left end in front view on the upper surface and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends about 3/4 of the overall width to the right in front view and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of the overall height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c that extends downward from the left side in a front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and opens downward on the lower surface, adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c and an upper portion. An upper tank full discharge passage 600d that extends downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and is located near the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 110).

  On the lower surface of the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper tank full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are arranged side by side and open downward from the left side in a front view. In the upper full-ball path unit 600 assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened immediately below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball removing unit The upstream end of the passage 600e is open immediately below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B discharged (dispensed) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is discharged downward from either of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removing passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104 and the like. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower portion of the upper full tank ball path unit 600. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper tank ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side becomes lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower tank full ball path unit 610 includes a lower normal dispensing passage 610a, a lower tank dispensing passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close a downstream end opening of the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b, and a dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are attached. And a biasing closing spring 614.

  In the lower tank full ball path unit 610, a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower tank full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left as viewed from the front, on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball drop passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. (Opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape whose center view is the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 as the front view, and the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction as it approaches. It is inclined so as to project forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to contact the door opening / closing contact part 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  In the state where the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are respectively installed in the upper fullfiller passage 610c. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d is the lower full tank payout passage 610b. And the game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball-removing passage 600e flows through the lower ball-removing passage 610c.

  Further, the lower full tank ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full-ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 that is opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In the lower full ball path unit 610, in a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating projection 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting on the portion 150f, it is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing abutting part 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613. Rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the urging force of the closing spring 614, so that the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the dispensing passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower tank ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

  In the ball tank 552 which is opened upward, a predetermined number is detected from the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of a ball cut by the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570. The game ball B of is supplied. The game balls B supplied / stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay in the upstream side of the payout blade 589. Becomes

  Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it is understood that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, the game ball B housed in the ball storage portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a. It is released downstream from 589. Then, the game ball B discharged from the payout vane 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper tank ball unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

  The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball receiving path unit 600 passes through the upper ball storage passage 600b and is arranged immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in FIG.

  When a lot of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, and thus the payout device is provided. The game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out further, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full-filled ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the inside of the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is reached. While the game ball B starts to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received by After that, the game ball B received in the full tank receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper bowl 201 is filled with the game balls B and further game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  In addition, when the lower bowl 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower balls are further dispensed. The game balls B are retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in the non-detected state.

  When the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the ascending end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball-removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball-removing movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

  At this time, at the part of the ball-removing movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down abuts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball-removing movable piece 592, so the ball-removing movable piece 592. Is hard to break.

  Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 has an upper ball removing passage 600e of the upper tank full ball passage unit 600 and a lower ball removing passage 610c of the lower tank full ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall). (Island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 111A is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 111B is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the bottom rear side. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each major configuration and seen from the back. FIG. 115 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear side. The base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, the payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear side.

  The speaker unit 620a is directed forward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621, which is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base 501 below the game board mounting portion 501c. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened to the front. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that is formed by a plurality of slits that extend in the front-rear direction and extend vertically in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side in the view, and the space front recess 621b which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, and extends obliquely downward and rearward. And an open connection portion 621c.

  The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs low frequencies.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and a portion that is the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 projects the most to the rear. Are formed so as to have a small protrusion. As a result, a space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 in front view can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in a front view of the speaker cover 621. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the amount becomes small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connecting cylinder part 43 a so that the seal member 48 is sandwiched between the connection portions 621 c of the speaker cover 621 and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622. And the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, on the rear side of the body frame speaker 622, the enclosure 624 having a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound output to the front through the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connecting portion 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection tube portion 43a, in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622, the lower outer frame assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front curtain plate member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, so that the sound is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is transmitted to the dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the speaker 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and it is possible to output a large sound with heavy bass even when the main body frame speaker 622 has a small diameter.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass. As a result, a sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200 and a sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are provided. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

  Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b, and the speaker box 623. Further, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. When assembled in the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. A rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B emitted from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower tank ball passage unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball guide part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving part that receives a game ball B that is discharged downward from the game board 5 that is open upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball guide part 627. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guide 627 and the discharge ball receiver 628.

  The upstream end of the ball drop guiding portion 627 is open to the left in the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and the downstream end is open to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling-out guiding portion 627 is opposed so that the opening at the upstream end matches the downstream end opening of the lower ball dropping passage 610c of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The game ball B discharged from the ball removing passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long right and left. The bottom end of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball removal guiding portion 627 in front view, and is inclined so as to decrease toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by the ball removal guide section 627 and the discharge ball receiving section 628. Since the discharge is performed downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a lower bass sound richer than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and. There is a transformer (not shown) in the island facility of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage of AC 100 V (AC 100 V) is stepped down to the power supply voltage for gaming machine of AC 24 V (AC 24 V). AC24V that is stepped down in the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply board 630 via a power cord (not shown). The power supply board 630 creates various power supplies (various direct current voltages such as direct current + 35V, direct current + 12V, direct current + 5V, etc.) from the 24V AC supplied from the island facility in the game hall and supplies them to various substrates.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632. 115). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board or the like of the game board 5. Then, the designated number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202).

  The payout control board box 632 includes a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The payout control board 633 can be housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are transparently molded with a resin of polycarbonate, the state of the front surface side or the back surface side of the payout control board 633 (whether or not unauthorized modification is performed, or an unauthorized IC is mounted) It can be confirmed from the outside of the payout control board box 632. Further, the payout control board box 632 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the beta body respectively. When the payout control board box 632 is closed using one sealing mechanism, In order to open the control board box 632, it is necessary to break the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the payout control board box 632. Therefore, the unauthorized opening / closing of the payout control board box 632 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening / closing, and the deterrent against the illegal act on the payout control board box 632 is enhanced.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 of the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rearmost of the body frame speaker 622 and is most protruded rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (on the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 98. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The right side of the back cover 640 in front view is attached to the rear end of the rearward extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically and rotatably around an axis extending vertically, and the left side thereof is the payout base 551. Are attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600. When the left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper tank ball path unit 600, it is formed on the upper side of the back cover 640.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that a right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and an abutting portion 640a that is lowered forward by one step is formed on an upper side of the back cover 640. When assembled in the frame 4, the rear surface is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551 (the rear surface of the eaves portion 551da formed on the back plate upper portion 551d described above). There is. Further, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640a is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551 and is in contact with the contact portion 640a. It is covered with an eaves portion 551da formed so as to project from the upper part 551d of the back plate.

  The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the up-down direction except for the contact portion 640a. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of locking with the outer frame 2, and a front frame projecting from the lower front end of the unit base 651 to the door frame depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the outer hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  Further, the locking unit 650 is more effective than the lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 is provided which protrudes forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

  In the locking unit 650 assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 to rotate the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 at the front end. The rotation of the key, which is engaged with the transmission member 133 and is inserted into the key hole 132, is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality of (two) outer hooks 652 are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

  When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, when a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are transmitted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. In a state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward, so that the outer frame 2 is disengaged from the main body frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 or the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 cause the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the lower hook member 25 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 to 124. FIG. 117 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 117 (b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 118 is an enlarged view showing an upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view seen from the rear. FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail and the like are assembled to a ball tank, and FIG. 119 (b) is a perspective view seen from the lower front side. FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 119 (a) disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing a region where game balls overflowing from the ball tank flow in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the bypass passage in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 124 is an enlarged view showing a tank rail and its vicinity in an enlarged manner in a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from behind on the hinge side.

  As described above, the body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is detachable from the outer frame 2 and hinged by the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shape attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tag spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the clair 553; a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; A ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 for paying out the game ball B to the player side. , Are provided.

  The ball tank 552 is formed in a quadrangle that extends in the left-right direction in a plan view, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that its left side is lower in a front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, and is formed into a container shape with the upper side open. Has been done. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut out from above the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end portion side of the left side wall 552d in the front wall 552b toward the end portion on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side) by about 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. Is formed over the entire length.

  The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side thereof extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream side to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left in front view. Further, the main guiding portion 553a extends from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel with an axis extending leftward from the right end in the plan view, and then to the left. It is formed in a crank shape that extends obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extends from there to the left end in parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. .

  In the tank guide rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a that extends from the left end to the right in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the site where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end the game ball B is formed. Is formed at a height at which only one can flow (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  Further, the tank rail 553 has a predetermined length in the left-right direction between the bottom surface of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a and the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a in a front view in a portion where the upper side is closed (in the present embodiment, approximately Three rectangular notches 553aa each having a length of 30 mm are formed at a predetermined interval (about 10 mm in the present embodiment). Due to the rectangular cutout 553aa, the thickness of the rear wall (in this embodiment, about 2.5 mm) is added to the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a from the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a toward the front, about 7 mm, A rectangular hole having a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed, and the thickness of the bottom plate of the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a (in the present embodiment, upwards from the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a) is formed in the rear wall. , About 2.5 mm), and a rectangular hole having a height of about 7 mm and a lateral length of about 30 mm is formed, and these rectangular holes are formed in communication with each other.

  The game balls B flowing from the ball tank 552 into the tank rails 553 are separated from the game balls B by the abrasion such as the game balls B colliding with each other, rubbing against each other, and falling. Therefore, when the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B is attached to the main guide portion 553a, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is blocked, and the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. It becomes difficult to supply the game balls to the game balls B by the payout device 580.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding part 553a by naturally falling from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the cutout part 553aa, The metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adhering to the main guide portion 553a due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide portion 553a falls to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa. By doing so, the metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a, and a cotton swab is inserted into the cutout portion 553aa by a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall to cause the abrasion of the game ball B attached to the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a by performing the work of removing the metal powder.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to the site where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged in a row in the width direction orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that narrows in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side and changes so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. By the bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes to the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. From this, the tank rail 553 can arrange the plurality of gaming balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction becomes a line as it goes toward the downstream side and the lower side.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b is slightly separated at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b in the tank rail 553. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed such that the curved curvature is larger on the downstream side than on the upstream side. Therefore, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the abutting bulging portion 553b. Since it changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spherical burrs in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing in the bulging portion 553b. Since it becomes difficult to disperse the reaction force, the game ball B inside is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B becomes difficult to escape, and ball clogging (ball clogging) easily occurs. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b is different depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the flow inside By dispersing the pushing directions of the plurality of game balls B to be played, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball clogging) can be made difficult to occur.

  Further, the tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clogging (ball clogging) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, so that the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game is high. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, the gear, the belt, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4. It is possible to obtain the same operational effect as the operational effect.

  The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. Extending toward the left (to the left), in order to return the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m that extends and the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m extend rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to above the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. The ball tank 552 is inclined so that the side (left side) farther away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is lower, and the surface overflows from the ball tank 552. A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on the outer sides in the left-right direction of the bypass passage 552g, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, and It is provided at a position lower than the overflow portion 551j on the side opposite to the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the discharge portion 551j in between. The outer terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connecting terminals 558a capable of connecting electric wiring from the rear side and the upper side of the plurality of electric wire connecting terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. And a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

  The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is a flat plate from the lower position to the rear of the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically from 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. The overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap having a distance about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B with the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

  The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The outer ends of the left step 501n and the right step 501o are higher than the left step 501n and the right step 501o at the outer sides of the left and right sides of the left step 501n and extend in the front-rear direction in a strip shape. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals smaller than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane such that the rear right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane such that the rear left corner is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between and is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction in a front view, and the overflow surface portion 501m is formed. The left end of the right-hand side of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left-right direction of the bypass passage 552g, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right-side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. In addition, below, the container-shaped area | region enclosed by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is only called the ball tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and has a front end that is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and is inclined so that the rear end becomes low. And a weir portion that extends upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 on the left end side (side of the dam portion 552i) of the rear end side in a front view. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  The bypass passage 552g has its rear end along the front end side of a portion obliquely extending in the left-right direction in the tank rail 553 extending in the crank shape in the left-right direction when assembled in the main body frame 4. It is extended. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided to the rear by the bypass passage 552g changes from the slanted rear end so that the flow direction is perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is formed at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction (perpendicular direction) substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. Ball clogging within 553 can be made less likely to occur.

  The detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end of the detour passage moves rearward as it goes to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. Therefore, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When discharged, the game ball B can be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow, by the rear end that extends obliquely. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball debris in the tank rail 553 by discharging it to a wide area.

  In addition, the portion that guides the game ball B by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. In this portion, the game ball B that lurks under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from inside the ball tank 552. For this reason, in the portion of the tank rail 553 that is behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of gaming balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) is never exceeded. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the gaming balls B can be stacked on the upper side on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, and thus the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received on the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending from the position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d to the right inside the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j from the left end of the front wall 552b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b in front view. Approximately 1/9 of the total length, it extends obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position of approximately 1/2 of the total length of the left side wall 552d in the front-rear direction, and then extends in the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d, It is formed in parallel with the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

  In the ball tank 552, in plan view, a right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape, and a straight line connecting the end on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side of the right end side. The enclosed area has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate therethrough in the vertical direction. In addition, the ball tank 552 has a flat plate-shaped flange that extends laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the dam portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the heights of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l are the upper edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the main body frame base 501). Are formed higher than the upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o.

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and a portion that extends obliquely on the left side and a portion that extends straight in the left-right direction are positioned behind the ball tank 552 (projection). )is doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharging portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The discharge portion 551j in the ball tank 552 is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the height of the ball tank 552 lowers stepwise from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the height same as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. A position that extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553, and then becomes higher leftward along the tank rail 553 than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to the rear after it extends to a nearby position).

  The external terminal board 558 is attached to the rear surface in a state where a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The electric wire connecting terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened and the tip of the electric wiring can be gripped by operating the lever. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. . The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

  Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, as for the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower and the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552a becomes lower.

  Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, over the overflow portion 552f having the lowest height of the outer peripheral upper edge. Can be flown to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface 501m, and at the same time it can be flowed from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface 501m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 122). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a further increase in the game ball B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball crush) due to the engagement of the game balls B with each other.

  Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 123, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is blocked in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem in which the game ball B spilled on the outside of the body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and the body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side which is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from pressing each other strongly in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

  In addition, since the height of the remaining upper edge of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m and flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is the left side on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to make a ball. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Since it is also higher, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552g is changed from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear side. It is possible to make the flow in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and it is possible to make the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the bypass passage 552g in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other and biting due to the directions of the pressures applied to the game balls B becoming uneven, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B. Can be prevented.

  Further, since the bottom portion of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that they are lined up in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are lined up, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the region where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, since a wide bulging portion 553b capable of arranging a plurality of game balls B is provided, the game discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably exhibited.

  In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the site where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since the game balls B are changed so as to match with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be arranged in the bulging portion 553b such that they are aligned in a line in the width direction as they head toward the downstream side. In addition, the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end, so the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) The plurality of gaming balls B stacked in the height direction at a plurality of stages are circulated to the downstream side through a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, so that the number of steps in the height direction is reduced to form one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rails 553 can guide the plurality of gaming balls B to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state where they are aligned in a line.

  Further, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  Further, an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface part 501m, it is possible to make it difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, the contact of the game ball B does not cause a problem such as short circuit or disconnection of electric wiring.

  Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. It is possible to make it difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces on the or the overflow surface portion 501m, and it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to fall from the rear side even if it rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

  Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 122) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. Thereby, the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j can be prevented from being pressed in the downstream direction with respect to the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. It can be prevented.

  In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m, and gets on the left step 501n and the right step 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 122, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g by their inclination, and a problem occurs when the game ball B spills out of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

  Further, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, since the game ball B is configured to pass below the guide surface portion 552j, the game balls stacked on the upper side in the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, in the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

  Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the site where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

  The ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin, whereas the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box of the peripheral control unit 1500, which will be described later, are made of a non-conductive resin. In this embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, they have the same polarity. Therefore, the metal powder of the game ball B attached to the tank rail 553 has the same polarity as the peripheral control board box. It has been repulsed and cannot be drawn to the peripheral control board box.

[4-12. Configuration of measures against metal powder]
Next, an electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portions 553aa formed in plural in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) Will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is an enlarged view of a part of the cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in FIG. 117 (a), and is a schematic view of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure. Note that, in FIG. 125, the outer shape of the game board 5 is shown by a solid line, and only the portions of the game board 5 necessary for explanation are shown as a sectional view.

  When the metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from the cutouts 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged below the tank rail 553, This may cause an electrical trouble and cause a malfunction or malfunction in the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with peripheral control ICs, ICs such as ROM and SDRAM described later, and the peripheral data ROM board described below is provided with ICs such as peripheral data ROM. As the pin spacing of these ICs becomes smaller, the pin spacing of various connectors and special connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 becomes narrower, and the spacing of various connectors narrows as the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 increases. Since the distance between the connector and the special connector is narrow, it is necessary to take measures against electric troubles caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 125, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are located on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). As compared with the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface, the rearward displacement (in the present embodiment, about one half the diameter of the game ball B). Are displaced by the distance dimension).

  The cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is, as described above, from the front side to the back side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed in a staircase shape in which a plurality of bends are made downward as it goes. An upper back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are substantially flush with each other. It is supposed to be arranged. Further, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 makes a surface contact with the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d of the dispensing base 551. In addition to the above, the abutting portion is covered by the convex portion 551da formed on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d so as to project rearward.

  As a result, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa is received by the top plate portion 551a and adheres, or is received by the convex portion 551da and adheres. Is able to. Further, the abutting portion where the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551 are in surface contact with each other and project rearward at the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. Since it is covered by the convex portion 551da that is formed, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa comes in contact with the metal panel of the game ball 5 from the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It has become.

  In this way, the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and the back plate upper portion 551d are the metal of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. Prevents powder from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It is functioning as an eaves that can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached effect display device 1600) is displaced (in the present embodiment, displaced by a distance dimension of about ½ of the diameter of the game ball B). Due to the disposition (that is, the peripheral control unit 1500 is not arranged directly below the cutout 553aa), an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 is caused. It is effective in preventing metal powder that can prevent

  Further, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface (cover flat plate described later) of the cover body 1501, while the upper side, left side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later), Since it is not provided on each of the cover side walls provided on the lower side and the right side, temporarily, the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). Even so, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the inside of the cover body 1501.

  Further, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 has a square fan-shaped recess for mounting the air-cooling fan FAN, which will be described later, on the center side thereof, and a plurality of concentric circles are formed on the bottom surface of the fan-mounting recess. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes, which will be described later, are formed along each. Further, the cover body 1501 has seven connector holes along the lower side thereof, seven connector holes provided at a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 and a position corresponding to the volume control switch, and seven connector holes, and Volume adjusting holes are formed, and two connector holes are formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output board, which will be described later. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed from the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole formed on the cover body 1501. A volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume control hole. Further, in a state where a liquid crystal output substrate, which will be described later, is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output substrate and two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501 form a gap, Two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output substrate are exposed through these two connector holes.

  When the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blade, thereby performing peripheral control. Air from the outside of the unit 1500 is passed through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. , The gaps described above (the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501 and the volume adjustment switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the cover). The volume adjusting hole formed in the body 1501 During and through the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal driving board, and two connector hole formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes formed in the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess of the cover body 1501 (total area) is the area of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and the above-mentioned area. Gap (Gap formed in the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501), Volume control switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and in the cover body 1501 The volume adjustment hole, the gap formed in, and the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output substrate, and the area in the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501) It is getting smaller. Therefore, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blade portion. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. It is possible to suppress the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 to be small at the time of taking in via the. As a result, it is possible to prevent heavy metal powder of the game ball B from entering the inner space of the cover body 1501 via the ventilation holes 1501az under the influence of the air flow.

  Incidentally, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN of the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, this rotation causes the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500 to be sucked toward the inner space of the cover body 1501 via the blade portion. Since the flow velocity of the air due to the rotation of the wing portion of the game ball becomes high, the heavy powder of the metal powder of the game ball B is likely to be sucked toward the inner space of the cover body 1501 under the influence of the flow of the air, and thus it has been sucked. Due to an electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder, a malfunction (fault) may occur in various electronic components provided on various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 mounted inside the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Become.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), by forming a protruding portion along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, the heavy powder called the metal powder of the game ball B is air-cooled. It can be configured to have a function as an eaves to prevent being sucked into the fan FAN, and by forming a protrusion along the vicinity of the upper side of the FAN mounting recess formed in the cover body 1501, a game ball It can be configured to have a function as an eaves to prevent heavy powder called B metal powder from being sucked into the air-cooling fan FAN, and has a thin distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN. (That is, the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN is compared with the distance dimension in the depth direction of the FAN mounting recess). Select the one having a short distance dimension), and when the air-cooling fan FAN is housed in the FAN mounting recess formed in the cover body 1501, a heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B is cooled by the inner wall of the FAN mounting recess. It can be configured to have a function as an eaves to prevent being sucked into the FAN. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be given later.

  Next, another configuration of the present invention, in which a metal powder countermeasure that can avoid an electric trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B (hereinafter, referred to as "metal powder countermeasure according to second to fifth embodiments" The configuration of “.”) Will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129. FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment. FIG. 127 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment. FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 129 shows the configuration of the countermeasure for metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the countermeasure for metal powder according to the fifth embodiment. 126 to 129, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (hereinafter, referred to as “configuration of measures against metal powder according to the first embodiment”) are designated by the same reference numerals. In addition, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the portions of the game board 5 necessary for explanation are shown as a cross-sectional view.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a in which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is, as described above, from the front side to the back side of the top plate portion 551a ( The back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553 as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d. The rear surface and the rear surface are arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is in front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper part 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed, although it is formed in a step shape in which a plurality of parts are bent downward as going from the side to the back side (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all, the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and the upper side is directed upward from the bottom portion of the main guiding portion 553a. Is formed with a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about one half of the diameter of the game ball B). That is, the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged above the bottom portion of the main guiding portion 553a. While the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a and the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the tank rail 553. The rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 are arranged on substantially the same plane. A rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 arranged substantially on the same plane as the tank rail 553 is formed by branching from a portion to which the effect display device 1600 is attached and extending rearward.

  Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 has the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper part 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper part 551d and is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper part 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010. Is in a state of abutting contact with the mounting recess 3010da formed in the above, and this abutting portion is covered by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the tank rail While the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper part 551d are arranged on substantially the same plane, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a and In the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back box in the back unit 3000 are arranged. The difference is that the rear surface 3010d of 3010 is disposed on substantially the same surface. Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 has the back plate upper part 551d of the dispensing base 551. While in contact with the rear surface, the contact portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 has the mounting recess formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010. It is in a state of abutting contact with 3010da, and the abutting portion is covered by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da. It is different at the point.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same operational effect as that of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is received by the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. It can be attached. Further, the abutting portion where the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the mounting recess 3010da formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 are in surface contact are defined by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da. Since it is covered, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa comes into contact with the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (back unit 3000). The rear control unit 1500 attached to the rear surface of the rear case 3010 of the peripheral display unit 1600 cannot be dropped toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  In this way, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 have fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. Toward the peripheral control unit 1500 in which the metal powder of the game ball B is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) It functions as an eaves that can prevent it from falling. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a in which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is, as described above, from the front side to the back side of the top plate portion 551a ( The back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553 as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d. The rear surface and the rear surface are arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a in which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is the front portion of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper part 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed, although it is formed in a step shape in which a plurality of parts are bent downward as going from the side to the back side (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is near the rear surface of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to project to a position below the notch portion 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a.

  Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 has the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper part 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper part 551d and is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper part 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is located below the tank rail 553. Is in contact with the end surface of the curved top plate portion 551a that is in contact with the upper surface of the curved top plate portion 551a and the upper surface of the contact portion 640a that are disposed below the tank rail 553. And are located on the same plane.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the tank rail The rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged on substantially the same plane, while in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a. The bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 are substantially on the same plane. They are different in that they are placed in. Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 has the back plate upper part 551d of the dispensing base 551. While in contact with the rear surface, the contact portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 has a curved front surface that is disposed below the tank rail 553. The end face of the top plate portion 551a is in contact with the end face of the top plate portion 551a, and the upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 and the contact portion 6 are in contact with each other. And the upper surface of 0a are different in that they are arranged on the same plane.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same operational effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a is a curved top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553. The upper surface of the contact portion 640a of the back cover 640 can be received and attached. Further, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 are in contact with each other, and the contact portion is in contact with each other. As a result, since the gap is not formed, the game panel of the game board 5 starts from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa is in contact. It cannot drop toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It is like this.

  In this way, the curved top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 has the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. The metal powder may drop toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eaves that can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a in which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is, as described above, from the front side to the back side of the top plate portion 551a ( The back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553 as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d. The rear surface and the rear surface are arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a in which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper part 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed, although it is formed in a step shape in which a plurality of parts are bent downward as going from the side to the back side (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to be projected by a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, a distance dimension of about one third of the diameter of the game ball B).

  Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 has the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper part 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper part 551d and is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper part 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is below the tank rail 553. Is in contact with a convex portion 551ab formed on the rear surface of the curved top plate portion 551a formed to project downward, and the contact portion is in contact with the tank rail 553. Is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a, which is arranged below.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the tank rail While the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged on substantially the same plane, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a. The bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged so as to slightly project rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553. It is different. Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 has the back plate upper part 551d of the dispensing base 551. While in contact with the rear surface, the contact portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 has a bent portion arranged below the tank rail 553. The convex portion 551ab formed by projecting downward on the rear surface of the formed top plate portion 551a is in contact with the convex portion 551ab, and the contact portion is Disposed below the tank rails 553, are different in that covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate 551a.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same operational effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is a bent top plate portion that is arranged below the tank rail 553. At 551a, it can be received and attached. Furthermore, a front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and a convex portion 551ab formed below the tank rail 553 and formed on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a so as to project downward. Since the abutting portion where the surface contact is made is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553, it falls outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa. Attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) from the contacted portion of the metal powder of the played game ball B. The peripheral control unit 1500 cannot be dropped toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  In this way, the curved top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 has dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. Of metal powder of the game board 5 falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In addition to functioning as an eaves that can prevent the above, it also functions as a tray for the metal powder of the game ball B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  In addition, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the curved top plate portion 551a that functions as an eave arranged below the tank rail 553 is provided as a separate member (a different structural component) from the top plate portion 551a. It can also be configured to be attached to.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a in which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is, as described above, from the front side to the back side of the top plate portion 551a ( The back plate upper part 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate part 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate part 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553 as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged. And are arranged substantially on the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper part 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed, although it is formed in a step shape in which a plurality of parts are bent downward as going from the side to the back side (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all, the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a faces downward. Is formed with a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about one half of the diameter of the game ball B). That is, the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged so as to project downward as compared with the bottom portion of the main guiding portion 553a.

  Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 has the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper part 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper part 551d and is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper part 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, the contact portion formed by bending the upper side of the back cover 640 forward in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is largely bent. The front surface of 640a is disposed in parallel with the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a, and is in surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a arranged so as to project downward as compared with the bottom portion of the main guiding portion 553a. They are in contact with each other.

  Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 has the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper part 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper part 551d and is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper part 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 has a gutter-shaped main guide. The top plate portion 551a, which is arranged parallel to the front wall of the portion 553a and projects downward as compared to the bottom portion of the main guiding portion 553a, is in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a and is in contact with the rear surface. The contacted portion is arranged to be largely displaced forward from the notch portion 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the tank rail The rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged on substantially the same plane, whereas in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a. The contact formed by bending the top side of the back cover 640 forward in the state where the bent top plate portion 551a is not disposed below the tank rail 553 and the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4. The difference is that the portion 640a is arranged. Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 has the back plate upper part 551d of the dispensing base 551. While in contact with the rear surface, the contact portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a. It is in contact with the rear surface of the top plate 551a, which is arranged in parallel and projects downward as compared with the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a, and is in contact with this surface. Min, is different in that it is arranged largely shifted forward from notches 553aa which is plurally formed to the main guiding part 553a.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same operational effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a is the upper side of the back cover 640 arranged below the tank rail 553. The side can be received and attached on the upper surface of the abutting portion 640a formed by being largely bent forward. Further, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a are arranged in parallel with each other, and are arranged so as to project downward as compared with the bottom portion of the main guiding portion 553a. The abutting portion in which the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a is in surface contact is arranged in a position largely displaced forward of the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a, and is in contact with the gap, so that the clearance is provided. Is not formed. Therefore, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa comes in contact with the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box of the back unit 3000). The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of 3010 cannot drop toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  As described above, the abutting portion 640a formed by bending the upper side of the back cover 640 toward the front is greatly bent to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. To the peripheral control unit 1500 in which the metal powder of the dropped game ball B is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) It functions as an eave that can prevent the ball from falling down, and also functions as a saucer for the metal powder of the game ball B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  By the way, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine including a tank rail that guides a game ball from a ball tank to the downstream side (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-215440 (FIG. 2)). This tank rail was provided with a hole for discharging foreign matter generated by the game ball. However, if foreign matter that falls from the holes provided in the tank rail adheres to the control board that is located below the tank rail, it may cause an electrical trouble, which may cause a malfunction or malfunction of the control board. It was. In recent control boards, the number of objects to be controlled increases and the pin spacing of the connector becomes narrower. As the number of connectors increases, the spacing between the connectors becomes narrower and the pin spacing of the IC becomes smaller. Therefore, it is necessary to take measures against electrical troubles caused by foreign substances falling from the tank rail.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG. 130 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 131 is a front view showing the inside of a game area in which game balls are distributed on the game board. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate portion which give a predetermined privilege (for example, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by receiving or passing the game balls B. A 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first special winning opening 2005, and a second special winning opening 2006 are provided (see FIG. 131). Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning in the game area 5a. This is for playing a game in which the operation of driving the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed so that the mouth 2006 or the like is received or passed.

  The game board 5 partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a front component member 1000 whose outer shape is a substantially square shape in front view, and a rear end of the game area 5a which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstruction nails N that come into contact with the game balls B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 131). Further, the game board 5 is mounted on the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and the game is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 115 and 153, etc.) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit (not shown) arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100. A front unit 2000 mounted on the front surface and a back unit 3000 mounted on the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and also holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder (not shown) is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

  The effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. The metal back cover is fixed to the frame-shaped metal frame for electrical connection, and is also electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the drive circuit housed in the frame-shaped metal frame. It is like this.

  The effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 or the like housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. It becomes the ground (GND). In the effect display device 1600, the area of the liquid crystal panel surrounded by the frame-shaped metal frame is a display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the periphery of the liquid crystal panel is surrounded by the frame-shaped metal frame. A double-sided adhesive tape is attached to the front surface of the frame-shaped metal frame, and a single transparent plate (in the present embodiment, a plate thickness of 1 mm is provided so as to cover the front surface of the frame-shaped metal frame and its inner region. Is attached (bonded).

  It should be noted that a mounting portion for mounting the peripheral control unit 1500 to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 is formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and one of the metal shield plates of the peripheral control unit 1500 is formed. A through hole for exposing the portion is formed. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600, a detailed description thereof will be described later, but a part of the metal shield plate of the peripheral control unit 1500 is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. The metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 is brought into contact with the metallic display back via the formed through-hole via a conductive elastic member. As a result, the metallic shield plate of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected.

  The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so as to accept the game balls B that have been driven into the playing area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the playing areas. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B, A second starting opening 2004 that allows the game ball B to be received in accordance with the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the fact that the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the one start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004. A first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 which is possible to accept the game ball B at either depending on results, and a.

  Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a first start opening 2002 and a start opening unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001. , A side unit 2200 attached to the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 along the inner rail 1002 in the front view and having two general winning openings 2001, and a vertical center at the right end in the front view in the game area 5a. A gate unit 2300 that is attached to the lower side and has a gate portion 2003, and one general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 that are attached in the approximate center of the front in the game area 5a. It is provided with a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a first special winning opening 2005 and a second special winning opening 2006.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel holder) and has a box-like shape with an open front. And a lower movable effect unit 3100, an upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and an upper front movable effect unit 3300, which are mounted in the rear box 3010.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front constituent member 1000 has an outer rail 1001 extending in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a center view in a front view, and extending in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stop part 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact is provided.

  Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the inner rail 1002 and the front rail and the front view timepiece. A backflow preventing member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

  Further, the front constituent member 1000 is provided with an out port 1008 penetrating forward and backward at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in a front view in the frame. The game ball B guided to the rear by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend substantially vertically from the lower ends of the outer portion, the outer portion of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1009 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the gap between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

  The front component 1000 also includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner of the front view. The notch portion 1010 matches the notch portion of a panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion penetrate the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 100. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel plate 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the front component member 1000 and on the rear surface of which the back unit 3000 is mounted.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and has a necessary minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has an out recessed portion 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a and at a position corresponding to the out opening 1008 of the front component member 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder detachably holds the panel plate 1110, is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is provided with a through hole having an inner side penetrating in the front-rear direction with a size substantially equal to the game area 5a. ing.

  Further, the panel holder includes a notch portion that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch is formed so as to match the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 penetrates the notch 1010 and the lower notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the tank ball path unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 115. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This substrate holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, and has the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the substrate holder 1200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharging portion 1201 is located directly above the discharging ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008, and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and the bottom surface. The discharge portion 1201 formed in the above can be discharged to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 115. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 contains a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 153) that controls the game contents and the payout of the game balls B, and the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And are equipped with.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 can be housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are transparently molded by a resin of polycarbonate, the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been performed, or an unauthorized IC is mounted) It can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the beta body respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to break the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, the unauthorized opening / closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening / closing, and the deterrent against the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2301, a second starting opening sensor 2511, a first big winning opening sensor 2512, a second big winning opening sensor 2513, a starting opening solenoid 2514, and a first attacker solenoid 2515. , The second attacker solenoid 2516, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state where it is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  The function display unit 1400, a detailed illustration of which is omitted in the figure, includes a state indicator made up of three LEDs for displaying the game state, and two for displaying the ordinary lottery result selected by the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a normal symbol display composed of LEDs and a normal reservation display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003.

  Further, the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result lottery by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002 The second special lottery result selected by the first special reserve number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves for accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 It is provided with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to receiving the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. ing.

  Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" or the like, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening / closing pattern of at least one of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 ( A round indicator including five LEDs for displaying the number of rounds) is provided.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on / off, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit in the game board 5 will be described. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the progress of the effect provided to the player based on a command from the main control board 1310.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit is connected to the main control board 1310, the performance operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, and other boards (peripheral data ROM board, liquid crystal output board described later) and the like. There is. The configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 substantially in the center. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

[5-8. Table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end opens the opening of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a, and a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open at a different position in the area 5a so as to receive the game ball B, and a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B. The second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002, which allow the game ball B to be received by opening and closing the movable piece according to the result of the normal lottery that is selected by the game ball B passing through the gate section 2003, or The first special winning opening 20 that allows the game ball B to be received in at least one of the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. And 5 and the second special winning opening 2006, and a. The first big winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed to receive the game ball B, and the second big winning opening 2006 opening and closing member can be opened and closed to receive the game ball B.

  A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The general winning opening 2001 on the right side is arranged immediately below the gate portion 2003. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the lower left side of the gate portion 2003 and slightly lower than the general winning port 2001 on the right side. The first special winning opening 2005 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004 and slightly below the first starting opening 2002. The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged at a position slightly lower to the left of the first special winning opening 2005.

  The table unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1008 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting port unit 2100 having one general winning port 2001 and a first starting port 2002, and a starting port. The side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the unit 2100 in the front view and has two general winning openings 2001, and the right end in the front view in the game area 5a with respect to the center in the up-down direction. A gate unit 2300 attached to the lower side and having a gate portion 2003, and one general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 attached to the game area 5a in the approximate center in the front view slightly upward. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a first prize opening 2005 and a second prize opening 2006, and the inside of the center accessory 2500 is closed. Includes a transparent front direction unit 2600 is attached to so that the.

  The gate unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is arranged at the right end in the front view in the game area 5a, and is arranged lower than the center in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The gate unit 2300 includes a gate portion 2003 in which the game balls B are always allowed to pass in the vertical direction one by one, and a gate sensor 2301 for detecting the game balls B that have passed through the gate portion 2003.

  In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001, and then to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is discharged. The game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. To be done.

  Further, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2511, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2512 or the second big winning hole sensor 2513, and then to the rear side of the game panel 1100. It is sent and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8-1. Center goods]
The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132. FIG. 132 is a front view of the center accessory and the front effect unit in the front unit of the game board. The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 5a as viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the lower movable effect unit 3100 and the upper front movable effect unit provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. 3300 and the like can be seen from the front. The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side projecting forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B hit in the game area 5a is in the frame. You can't break into.

  The center accessory 2500 includes one general winning opening 2001 arranged in the lower right corner of the outer periphery of the frame when viewed from the front, a second starting opening 2004 arranged slightly to the left of the general winning opening 2001, and It has a first big winning opening 2005 arranged below the second starting opening 2004 and a second big winning opening 2006 arranged slightly below the first big winning opening 2005 to the left of the first big winning opening 2005. Further, the center accessory 2500 can release the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 and the warp entrance 2501 that is open to the game ball B in the game area 5a on the outer peripheral surface on the left side in front view. It is provided with a warp outlet 2502 opened in the frame and a stage 2503 capable of releasing the game ball B emitted from the warp outlet 2502 into the game area 5a after rolling the game ball B in the left-right direction.

  The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed, and corresponds to a position directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110), it is formed such that the position at the substantial center in the left-right direction is the lowest. This stage 2503 is inclined so that the lowest part at the center in the left-right direction becomes lower toward the front, and the game ball B can be discharged from this part into the game area 5a. In the center accessory 2500, the height of the lowest part of the stage 2503 is substantially the same as the height of the second starting port 2004.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the heightwise portion (top) of the center of the stage 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. Thereby, when the game ball B is discharged from the center of the stage 2503, it is received in the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability.

  In addition, the center accessory 2500, the second starting opening sensor 2511 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004, and the first large ball that detects the game ball B received in the first big winning opening 2005. It is provided with a winning hole sensor 2512 and a second winning hole sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the second winning hole 2006 (see FIG. 153). Further, the center accessory 2500 has a starting opening solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second starting opening 2004 with a movable piece in accordance with the result of the ordinary drawing that is drawn by the passage of the game ball B of the gate 2003, and the first starting opening 2002 or A first attacker solenoid 2515 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005 with an opening / closing member in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. The second attacker that opens and closes the second special winning opening 2006 by the opening / closing member according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the one start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004. And a solenoid 2516.

  When the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the right side of the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction and the upper portion of the right surface in the front view are the outer periphery (outer rail 1001 and right rail 1005) of the game area 5a. In between, a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed. In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 are arranged in the lower right corner when viewed from the front. The portion of the lower right corner when viewed from the front extends to the lower right corner in the game area 5a, and forms a space between the portion of the lower right corner and the upper portion of the right side surface. The gate unit 2300 is arranged in the space.

  Therefore, when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a so as to flow on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), the game ball B can be passed through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. At the same time, it is possible to accept the game ball B to the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 that are open (open) with a high probability.

[5-8-2. Table production unit]
The table rendering unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 136 and the like. FIG. 133 is a side cross-sectional view of the front effect unit along with the center accessory cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LEDs in the front effect unit and the reflective recesses of the front light guide plate. FIG. 135 is a front view showing a light emitting mode of the front light guide plate. FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front light guide plate of the front performance unit is made to emit light.

  The front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is a transparent flat plate-shaped front light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500, a reflector 2620 that is attached to the upper side of the front light guide plate 2610, and is attached to the upper surface of the reflector 2620. A front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 on which a plurality of LEDs 2630 that irradiate light toward the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610 are mounted, and a center accessory that covers the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 and the reflector 2620 from the front. And a front cover 2650 attached to the 2500.

  The front light guide plate 2610 of the front effect unit 2600 is formed from a transparent light guide plate main body 2611 and a back surface of the light guide plate main body 2611, and any one of a plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 on the upper surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. And a plurality of fine reflection concave portions 2613 that reflect the incident light forward. The plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610 are composed of four first light incident portions 2612a, a second light incident portion 2612b, a third light incident portion 2612c, and a fourth light incident portion 2612d. It is configured. The first specific light entering part 2612a, the second specific light entering part 2612b, the third specific light entering part 2612c, and the fourth specific light entering part 2612d divide the upper surface of the light guide plate body 2611 into eight equal parts in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction). Then, it is arranged in two turns in order from the left to the right (the order in which the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d returns to the beginning and becomes the first specific light incident portion 2612a).

  The reflection concave portion 2613 has a flat surface that extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 and is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate body 2611. . The reflection recess 2613 is recessed in a pent roof-shaped triangle. The reflection concave portion 2613 can reflect the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate body 2611. Further, the reflection concave portion 2613 can reflect the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 in the direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate body 2611.

  As a result, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 134, when light is incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, it is reflected by the reflection recess 2613 toward the front front surface of the light guide plate body 2611 (direction perpendicular to the paper surface). However, the reflective recess 2613 appears to be illuminated by the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 134, when light is incident from the non-corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, the light is reflected by the reflection concave portion 2613 in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate body 2611, To the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, the reflection recess 2613 does not seem to emit light.

  In the present embodiment, the reflection concave portion 2613 has a shape in which the concave portion is formed in a triangular shape and extends in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612. However, it is not limited to the above and may be any as long as it extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612.

  The plurality of reflection concave portions 2613 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612, and the plurality of first reflection concave portions 2613a and the second specific light incident portion 2612b corresponding to the first specific light incident portion 2612a. Corresponding to the plurality of second reflection concave portions 2613b, the third specific light incident portion 2612c corresponding to the plurality of third reflection concave portions 2613c, and the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d corresponding to the plurality of fourth reflection concave portions 2612d. And a concave portion 2613d.

  Further, the front light guide plate 2610 has a plurality of patterns 2614 capable of emitting and displaying in different modes from each other by reflecting light forward by a specific group of the reflective recesses 2613 among the plurality of reflective recesses 2613. There is. The plurality of patterns 2614 include a first pattern 2614a composed only of the plurality of first reflection recesses 2613a, a second pattern 2614b composed only of the plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b, and a third composed of only the plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c. It is composed of a pattern 2614c and a fourth pattern 2614d composed of only a plurality of fourth reflection recesses 2613d.

  As shown in FIGS. 132 and 135, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are concentrically arranged in order from the outer side to the center (after the fourth pattern 2614d). Are arranged so as to return to the beginning and become the first pattern 2614a).

  The reflector 2620 has a fixed recess 2621 into which the upper end of the front light guide plate 2610 is inserted. The front surface light guide plate 2610 can be sandwiched between the front surface light guide plate 2610 by inserting the front light guide plate 2610 into the fixed recessed portion 2621, and the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned without rattling. it can. On the bottom surface (upper surface) of the fixed recessed portion 2621, a through hole 2622 penetrating vertically is formed in a portion corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 2630 mounted on the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640.

  The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 has a strip plate shape extending right and left, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted on a portion of the lower surface thereof which is directly above the fixed recessed portion 2621 of the reflector 2620. The plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted (attached) to the portions of the reflector 2620 corresponding to the plurality of through holes 2622, respectively. The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is attached to the upper surface of the reflector 2620 so that the plurality of LEDs 2630 face downward through the through holes 2622.

  The plurality of LEDs 2630 are attached so as to correspond to the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2630 includes a first LED group 2630a corresponding to the first specific light incident section 2612a, a second LED group 2630b corresponding to the second specific light incident section 2612b, and a third specific light incident section 2612c. And a fourth LED group 2630d corresponding to the fourth specific light entering part 2612d. The first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d divide the plurality of LEDs 2630 arranged in the left-right direction into eight equal parts in the left-right direction, and from left to right. Are arranged in two turns in order (the order in which the fourth LED group 2630d returns to the beginning and becomes the first LED group 2630a). In the present embodiment, each of the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d has six LEDs 2630.

  Next, the light emission effect by the front effect unit 2600 of this embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2630a of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate body 2611 from the first specific light incident part 2612a, and is reflected to the front by the first reflection recess 2613a, and the remaining first light is reflected. Since the second reflection concave portion 2613b, the third reflection concave portion 2613c, and the fourth reflection concave portion 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the first reflection concave portion 2613a appears to be visible to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1, The first pattern 2614a composed of the plurality of first reflection concave portions 2613a can emit light (see FIG. 135 (a)).

  When the second LED group 2630b of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light is incident from the second specific light incident part 2612b into the light guide plate body 2611, and is reflected to the front by the second reflective recess 2613b, and the remaining first light is reflected. Since the one reflection concave portion 2613a, the third reflection concave portion 2613c, and the fourth reflection concave portion 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the second reflection concave portion 2613b appears to be shining to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1, The second pattern 2614b composed of the plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b can emit light (see FIG. 135 (b)).

  When the third LED group 2630c of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate body 2611 from the third specific light incident portion 2612c, and is reflected to the front by the third reflection recess 2613c, and the remaining light is emitted. Since the one reflection concave portion 2613a, the second reflection concave portion 2613b, and the fourth reflection concave portion 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the third reflection concave portion 2613c appears to be visible to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1, The third pattern 2614c composed of the plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c can emit light (see FIG. 135 (c)).

  When the fourth LED group 2630d of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate body 2611 from the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d, and is reflected to the front by the fourth reflection recess 2613d, and the remaining light is emitted. Since the one reflection concave portion 2613a, the second reflection concave portion 2613b, and the third reflection concave portion 2613c are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth reflection concave portion 2613d appears to be visible to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1, The fourth pattern 2614d composed of the plurality of fourth reflection recesses 2613d can emit light (see FIG. 135 (d)).

  As described above, since the plurality of patterns 2614 arranged concentrically can each be made to emit light, the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be replaced by a first LED group 2630a, a second LED group 2630b, a third LED group 2630c, and a fourth LED group 2630c. When the LED groups 2630d are made to emit light in this order, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d can be made to emit light in this order, and there is a movement that spreads outward from the center. It is possible to perform a luminous effect such as animation.

  On the other hand, when the plurality of LEDs 2630 are made to emit light in the order of the fourth LED group 2630d, the third LED group 2630c, the second LED group 2630b, and the first LED group 2630a, the fourth pattern 2614d, the third pattern 2614c, and the second The pattern 2614b and the first pattern 2614a can be made to emit light in this order, and a light-emitting effect such as animation can be performed in which the user concentrates from the outside toward the center.

  As described above, according to the front effect unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns 2614 can be made to emit light by one front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, in order to display an animation or the like, each pattern 2614 can be displayed. It is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates, and the thickness in the front-back direction can be made as thin as possible. Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close as possible to the player side, and a large space is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610. It can be easily secured. Therefore, a wide space can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610, so that the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. are provided on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. Can be arranged, which makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance in the game area 5a and having a high appealing power to the player, and in addition to the effect by the luminous display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable effect. By performing the movable effect by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like, it is possible to provide the player with various effects, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 136, the front light guide plate 2610 causes a plurality of semi-transparent patterns 2614 to appear in front of the effect unit, the ornament, and the effect display device 1600 due to the point light emission of the plurality of reflective recesses 2613. Since it is possible to show a light-emitting decoration that moves like animation, it is possible to make a strong impact on the player who is familiar with the light-emitting effect using the conventional light guide plate, and to amaze and entertain the player, It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since only the player who is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emission display of the design 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 well, the player can see the design 2614 from other players far from the front. The light-emitting display becomes difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the front light guide plate 2610 is being performed, and to prevent other players from paying attention. In addition to being able to play, it is possible to play the game without hesitation to other players, and it is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached so as to be sandwiched by the fixed recesses 2621 of the reflector 2620, the plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 are reliably positioned with respect to the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610. can do. Thereby, each LED 2630 (the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, the fourth LED group 2630d) is arranged at a position corresponding to each specific light incident portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light from each LED 2630 can be reflected to the front front by the corresponding reflection recess 2613, and the corresponding pattern 2614 can be surely emitted.

  Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front-view game area 5a, even if the design 2614 is lit by the LED 2630, it emits light. The displayed pattern 2614 does not hinder the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized by the player in a good state, which makes it difficult to see the game. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust and to enjoy the game in a good state.

  Further, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed recessed portion 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the conventional case where two members are attached. It is possible to eliminate rattling between the LED and the front light guide plate 2610, and to reliably position the plurality of LEDs 2630 at desired positions with respect to the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light incident portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LED 2630 can be reliably emitted to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 is displayed. It is possible to reliably perform light emission display.

  Further, by disposing the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 only on the upper side of the light guide plate body 2611, the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) is disposed only on the upper side of the light guide plate body 2611. The front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) does not surround the outer circumference of the light guide plate main body 2611, and the front cover (frame body) is provided over the entire circumference of the light guide plate main body 2611. Since it is possible to avoid partitioning the effect image and the decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged in, the player can easily see the effect image and the like, and the effect image can be displayed to the player. It is possible to entertain in a good state and suppress a decrease in interest, and there is no frame-shaped partition in the game area 5a when viewed from the front. In a feeling of opening may be a pachinko machine 1, it can be assumed to be appealing is strongly attracted the attention of a player to improve the appearance of the game area 5a.

  Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620) can be obtained by aligning the periphery of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. Or a plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made invisible to the player side, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be aware of the presence of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, when the pattern 2614 is caused to emit light, the front light guide plate is displayed. It is possible to surprise and give a strong impact to a player who thought that 2610 does not exist, and to entertain the luminous display of a plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, since the front cover 2650 prevents the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflector 2620 from being seen from the player side, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the inside of the game area 5a from being deteriorated due to the reflector 2620 being visible. , The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 are hidden from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630, and thus the LEDs 2630 can be made less visible. By causing the pattern 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 to display light emission, the player can be greatly surprised by the light emission display not predicted by the player, and the light emission display of the pattern 2614 can be enjoyed and the player Can be made to think that something is good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610, a light emission display of a plurality of different patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and an effect image by the effect display device 1600. Since it is possible to show the combined effect to the player, it is possible to perform various effects by appropriately combining them, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired, and also the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. With the effect produced by, the player can be entertained, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to add a sense of depth and stereoscopic effect to the pattern 2614 that is being displayed by displaying the effect image associated with the plurality of patterns 2614 that are displayed by emitting light on the front light guide plate 2610. The effect (display effect) capable of strongly attracting the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

  In the above-described embodiment, the reflection concave portion 2613 has a triangular cross section and extends constantly, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cross section has a semicircular arc shape and extends constantly. May have a polygonal shape and extend uniformly, or may have a curved cross section and extend uniformly.

  The LED 2630 may have a single color or a full color. Further, the plurality of patterns 2614 may be four or more, and the number of the specific light incident portions, the reflective recesses, and the LED groups can be appropriately selected according to the number of the patterns 2614.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 147. FIG. 137 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the lower front center decorative body is made to emit light in the lower movable production unit, and FIG. 138 is a lower front central decoration body in which the lower central lifting base is raised in the lower movable production unit. FIG. 139 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the lower rear central decoration is illuminated, and FIG. 139 shows the lower central elevating base, the lower left side elevating base, and the lower right side elevating base in the lower movable effect unit to raise the lower front. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which a central ornament, a lower rear central ornament, a lower left side ornament, and a lower right side ornament are illuminated. FIG. 140 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the game board is in the state of FIG. 139 and the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. In addition, FIG. 141 shows the four rotating ornaments, the left side rotating ornaments, the left subside rotating ornaments, the right side rotating ornaments, and the right subside rotating ornaments in the lower movable effect unit, and the ornament portions of the respective surfaces are expanded. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decoration of FIG. FIG. 142 is an explanatory diagram that schematically shows the types (sizes) of the arrows that are light-emitted and displayed in the lower movable effect unit.

  Further, FIG. 143 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit are lowered. FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the drive mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 145 is an explanatory view showing the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit. FIG. 146 is a front view of the game board shown with the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit lowered. FIG. 147 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the upper front movable decoration of the upper front movable effect unit.

  The rear unit 3000 has an effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit attached to the rear surface of the panel holder of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting opening sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. A magnetic sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 153).

  The back unit 3000 is a box-shaped unit which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder and whose front is open. The back unit 3010 has a square opening on the rear wall, and the effect display device 1600 faces forward. The lower movable effect unit 3100 attached to the lower part, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 attached to the upper part in the back box 3010, and the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 attached to the upper part in the back box 3010. And the upper front movable effect unit 3300 which is installed.

[5-9-1. Lower movable production unit]
The lower movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 142 and the like. The lower movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the lower part in the back box 3010, and a part thereof is located in front of the lower part of the effect display device 1600. The lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a lower front central decoration unit 3110 mounted below the effect display device 1600 near the front end of the back box 3010, and a lower central effect arranged behind the lower front central decoration unit 3110. A unit 3120, and a lower left side effect unit 3150 and a lower right side effect unit 3170, which are respectively arranged on the left and right sides of the lower central effect unit 3120, are provided.

  The lower front central decoration unit 3110 includes a lower front central decoration body 3111 having a trapezoidal shape (inverted isosceles triangle shape with flattened vertices) that is narrowed downward and having a light-transmitting property. The lower front central decoration unit 3110 is located behind the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 when assembled to the game board 5. The lower front central decorative body 3111 can be light-embellished by the lower central decorative substrate of the lower central effect unit 3120.

  The lower central effect unit 3120 is attached to the lower central elevating base 3121, which is attached to the rear case 3010 so as to be able to ascend and descend behind the lower front central decorative unit 3110, and the front surface of the lower central elevating base 3121, and is translucent. And a lower central decorative board 3122 having a lower rear central decorative body 3122 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the rear side of the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and capable of emitting light toward the front (illustrated Is omitted) and a central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper part of the lower central lifting base 3121.

  Further, although not shown, the lower central effect unit 3120 includes a unit base attached to the back box 3010, and a pair of elevating guides attached to the unit base for vertically guiding the lower central elevating base. A rod-shaped arm member attached to the unit base so as to be rotatable around an axis whose base end extends in the front-rear direction; And a lower central lifting drive motor for rotating the.

  Although not shown, the lower central elevating base 3121 has a slit that extends to the left and right, and a sliding pin attached to the tip of the arm member is slidably inserted into this slit. The lower center elevating base 3121 is driven by the lower center elevating drive motor between a lower position where the whole is behind the lower front central decorative body 3111 and an upper position where the whole is higher than the lower front central decorative body 3111. It is mounted so that it can be raised and lowered.

  The lower rear central decorative body 3122 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle and has a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a that are vertically arranged. The lower rear central decorative body 3122 can be light-embellished by the light emission of the LED of the lower central decorative substrate. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the lower central decoration board so that each light emitting region 3122a of the lower rear central decoration body 3122 can be independently illuminated and decorated, and the lower central elevating base 3121 is raised. At some times, it is mounted so that light can be emitted toward the lower front central decoration body 3111 which is the lower side and the front side.

  Although not shown in detail, the central movable unit 3125 has a plurality of mounting bases which are mounted on the upper end of the lower central lifting base 3121 at intervals in the left-right direction, and each of which extends upward in a flat plate shape. A plurality of central rotary drive motors are mounted on a plurality of mounting bases with their rotary shafts facing left and right, and the central rotary drive motors are mounted on the rotary shafts of the central rotary drive motors. And a plurality of cube-shaped rotating ornaments 3126 that cover the. The plurality of rotary ornaments 3126 are rotatable by a central rotation drive motor about an axis extending in the left-right direction, and are arranged coaxially in the left-right direction. Further, each of the rotating decorations 3126 has different decoration portions 3127 formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 141). Each of the plurality of rotary ornaments 3126 can be independently rotated by each central rotary drive motor.

  Further, although not shown, the central movable unit 3125 is attached to the upper surface of the lower central lifting base 3121 below each of the rotary decorations 3126, and is provided with a plurality of units capable of irradiating each rotary decoration 3126 with light. A lower central upper surface decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted is provided. By appropriately causing the LEDs of the lower central upper surface decorative substrate to emit light, each rotating decorative body 3126 can be made to emit light.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 of the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like lower piece portion, and a flat plate-like side extending upward from the left end of the lower piece portion. The front side of the unit base of the lower central performance unit 3120 has a side portion and an upper side portion of a flat shape extending from the upper end of the side portion to the upper side of the lower piece portion to the right and shorter than the lower piece portion. When viewed from the left, the left unit base is mounted in the back box 3010, and a cylindrical guide whose lower and upper ends are respectively attached to the lower piece and the upper piece near the right side of the side of the left unit base. A rod-shaped male screw that is attached rotatably around an axis that extends vertically by the lower piece and upper piece of the left unit base so as to extend parallel to the shaft and the guide shaft, and has a male thread formed on the outer circumference. Members, Lower left side elevation base 3151 which has a nut screwed to a screw member and is slidably attached to a guide shaft, and lower left side elevation drive which is attached to a left unit base and rotates a male screw member. The motor, the lower left side decorative body 3152 that is attached to the front surface of the lower left side lift base 3151 and has a light-transmitting property, and the right side surface side of the lower left side decorative body 3152 that is illuminated to the left And a lower left side decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the light are mounted.

  The lower left side decorative body 3152 has a plurality of light emitting areas 3152a arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate, each light emitting area The light emitting decorations can be independently applied to the 3152a.

  Although not shown in detail, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the upper part of the lower left side elevating base 3151 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and has a slit extending in the front-rear direction. The lower left slide drive motor is attached to the rear side of the lower left side lift base 3151 so that the rotary shaft extends upward below the slider, and the base end side is attached to the rotary shaft of the lower left slide drive motor. And a cam member having a cylindrical sliding pin slidably inserted in the slit of the slider on the front end side extending in the horizontal direction from the cage base end side.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the lower left side effect unit 3150 has a mounting base mounted on a slider and extending upward in the form of a flat plate, and a rotation shaft directed to the left and right in the mounting base. It is provided with a left side rotary drive motor that is attached, and a cube-shaped left side rotary ornament 3153 that is attached to the rotary shaft of the left side rotary drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the left side rotary drive motor. The left side rotating ornamental body 3153 has different decorative portions 3154 formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 141). Further, the left side rotary ornament 3153 is rotatable by a left side rotary drive motor about an axis extending in the left and right directions.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached below the left side rotating decorative body 3153 on the upper surface of the slider, and light can be emitted toward the left side rotating decorative body 3153. A lower left side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is provided. By appropriately emitting the LED on the lower left side upper surface decorative substrate, the left side rotating decoration body 3153 can be made to emit light.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece part of the left unit base and extends to the upper side in a flat plate shape. A left subside rotation drive motor mounted with the rotation axis facing left and right, and a cubic left subside rotation that is mounted on the rotation shaft of the left subside rotation drive motor and covers the outer circumference of the left subside rotation drive motor. And a decorative body 3155. The left sub-side rotating decoration body 3155 has different decoration portions 3156 formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 141). Further, the left sub-side rotary decoration body 3155 can be rotated around an axis extending left and right by a left sub-side rotary drive motor.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached below the left sub side rotation decoration body 3155 on the upper surface of the upper piece part of the left unit base, and faces the left sub side rotation decoration body 3155. And a lower left sub-side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted. The left sub-side rotary decoration body 3155 can be made to emit light by appropriately emitting light from the LED on the lower left sub-side upper surface decoration substrate.

  The lower left side effect unit 3150 is assembled to the game board 5, and the left sub side rotation decoration body 3155 attached to the left unit base has a height at which the left side rotation decoration body 3153 can enter below. It is arranged at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 when the lower central elevating base 3121 of the central effect unit 3120 is positioned (raised) to the ascending end. In addition, the lower left side effect unit 3150, when the left sub side rotary ornament 3155 is assembled to the game board 5, is located between the leftmost rotary ornament 3126 of the lower central effect unit 3120 and the left side rotary ornament 3153. There is a space left between them to enter.

  The lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the male screw member by the lower left side elevating / lowering drive motor to move the left side rotating decorative body 3153 together with the slider through the lower left side elevating / lowering base 3151 and the lower central effector unit 3120. The lower center elevating base 3121 can be moved up and down between a descending position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the descending position and an ascending position having the same height as the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155. In addition, the lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the cam member by the lower left slide drive motor to move the left side rotating decorative body 3153 via the slider to the appearance position adjacent to and adjacent to the lower central effect unit 3120. It is possible to slide in the left-right direction between a retracted position in which about half is located below the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 away from the lower central effect unit 3120.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 of the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like lower piece part, and a flat plate-like side extending upward from the right end of the lower piece part. The front side of the unit base of the lower central performance unit 3120 has a side portion and an upper side portion that extends from the upper end of the side portion to the upper side of the lower piece portion and extends to the left shorter than the lower piece portion. The right unit base mounted in the back box 3010 in the right side of the view, and a cylindrical guide whose lower end and upper end are respectively mounted on the lower piece part and the upper piece part near the left side of the side portion of the right unit base. A rod-shaped male screw that is attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically by the lower piece and upper piece of the right unit base so as to extend parallel to the shaft and the guide shaft, and has a male thread formed on the outer periphery. Members, Lower right side lifting base 3171 which has a nut screwed to the screw member and is slidably mounted on the guide shaft, and lower right side lifting drive which is mounted on the right unit base and rotates the male screw member. A motor, a lower right side decorative body 3172 that is attached to the front surface of the lower right side lifting base 3171 and has a light-transmitting property, and a right side surface of the lower right side decorative body 3172 that is illuminated to the right. And a lower right side decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the light are mounted.

  The lower right side decorative body 3172 has a plurality of light emitting areas 3172a arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right side decorative substrate, each light emitting area 3172a is formed. Each of the 3172a can be independently illuminated.

  Although not shown in detail, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the upper part of the lower right side elevating base 3171 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and has a slit extending in the front-rear direction. The lower right slide drive motor is attached to the rear side of the lower right side lift base 3171 so that the rotary shaft extends upward below the slider, and the base end side is attached to the rotary shaft of the lower right slide drive motor. And a cam member having a cylindrical sliding pin slidably inserted in the slit of the slider on the front end side extending in the horizontal direction from the cage base end side.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to a slider and extends in a flat plate shape upward, and a rotation shaft is directed to the attachment base in the left-right direction. A right side rotary drive motor is attached, and a cubic right side rotary ornament 3173 is attached to the rotary shaft of the right side rotary drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the right side rotary drive motor. The right side rotary ornament 3173 has different decorative portions 3174 formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 141). Further, the right side rotary decoration 3173 is rotatable by a right side rotary drive motor about an axis extending in the left and right directions.

  Although not shown in detail, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the upper surface of the slider below the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and light can be emitted toward the right side rotating decorative body 3173. A lower right side upper surface decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is provided. The right side rotating decorative body 3173 can be made to emit light by appropriately causing the LEDs of the lower right side upper surface decorative substrate to emit light.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece portion of the right unit base, and has a sub attachment base extending upward in a flat plate shape and a sub attachment base. A right subside rotation drive motor mounted with the rotation axis facing left and right, and a cubic right subside rotation that is mounted on the rotation shaft of the right subside rotation drive motor and covers the outer circumference of the right subside rotation drive motor. And a decorative body 3175. The right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175 has different decoration portions 3176 formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 141). Further, the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 is rotatable by a right sub-side rotation drive motor about an axis extending to the left and right.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached below the right sub side rotation decoration body 3175 on the upper surface of the upper piece portion of the right unit base, and faces the right sub side rotation decoration body 3175. And a lower right sub-side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted. The right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175 can be made to emit light by appropriately causing the LEDs of the lower right sub-side upper surface decoration substrate to emit light.

  The lower right side effect unit 3170 is a state in which the right sub side rotation decoration body 3175 attached to the right unit base is in a state where the right side rotation decoration body 3173 can enter the lower side in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. The lower center lifting base 3121 of the central effect unit 3120 is arranged at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 when the lower center lifting base 3121 is positioned (raised) to the rising end. In addition, the lower right side effect unit 3170, when the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 is assembled to the game board 5, between the rightmost rotary ornament 3126 of the lower central effect unit 3120, the right side rotary ornament 3173. There is a space left between them to enter.

  The lower right side effect unit 3170 rotates the male screw member by the lower right side lift drive motor to move the right side rotating decorative body 3173 together with the slider via the lower right side lift base 3171 and the lower central effect unit 3120. The lower center elevating base 3121 can be moved up and down between a descending position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the descending position and an ascending position having the same height as the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. In addition, the lower right side effect unit 3170 rotates the cam member by the lower right slide drive motor to move the right side rotating decorative body 3173 via the slider to the adjacent appearance position close to the lower central effect unit 3120. It can be slid in the left-right direction between a retracted position in which about half is located below the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 away from the lower central effect unit 3120.

  In the lower movable effect unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 141, the decoration parts 3127 of the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the decoration parts 3154 of the left side rotation decoration bodies 3153, the decoration parts 3156 of the left sub side rotation decoration bodies 3155, and the right parts. Different decorations are formed on the decorative portion 3174 of the side rotating decorative body 3173 and the decorative portion 3176 of the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175, respectively. The four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decorations 3153, the left subside rotating decorations 3155, the right side rotating decorations 3173, and the right subside rotating decorations 3175 are each formed in a dice-shaped cube and extend to the left and right. Different decorations are formed on the first to fourth surfaces around the rotation axis.

  In the state where the first surfaces of the four rotation decorations 3126, the left side rotation decorations 3153, the left subside rotation decorations 3155, the right side rotation decorations 3173, and the right subside rotation decorations 3175 are directed to the front, from the left. It has become "Land", "One Eye", "One Eye", "Two Eyes", "Three Eyes", "Four Eyes", "One Eye", and "One Eye". In addition, in a state where the second surface of each is directed to the front, "star", "super", "chi", "cha", "n", "su", "!", And "star" are displayed from the left. Further, when the third surface is faced to the front, "!", "Shin", "Ge", "Ki", "A", "Ts", "Shin", "!" Are displayed from the left. Further, in the state where the fourth surface is facing the front, "celebration", "!", "O", "me", "de", "to", "u", and "!!" are displayed from the left.

  In this way, the four rotary ornaments 3126, the left side rotary ornament 3153, the left subside rotary ornament 3155, the right side rotary ornament 3173, and the right subside rotary ornament 3175 have the same numbered faces facing the front. Thus, a predetermined message can be shown to the player, and an expected value that is a "big hit" can be displayed depending on the content of the message.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 142, the lower movable effect unit 3100 causes the lower front central decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right side decorative body 3172 to appropriately emit light, "Arrows" having different sizes can be displayed by light emission. Specifically, if only the lower front central ornamental body 3111 is made to emit light, a triangular “small arrow” in which the apex of the isosceles triangle faces downward can be displayed (FIGS. 137 and 142 (a)). reference). Further, when the lower front central ornamental body 3111 and the raised lower rear central ornamental body 3122 are caused to emit light, a downward-pointing "middle arrow" having a bar extending upward more than the "small arrow" is caused to emit light. (See FIG. 138 and FIG. 142 (b)). Further, in the state of the “middle arrow”, the lower left side decoration body 3152 and the lower right side decoration body 3172 are raised, and the lower front center decoration body 3111, the lower rear center decoration body 3122, the lower left side decoration body 3152, the lower right side. When all of the side decorations 3172 are made to emit light, the "large arrow" in which the upper end of the downward arrow, which is larger than the "middle arrow", spreads to the left and right, can be emitted and displayed (FIGS. 139 and 142 (c)). See).

  In this way, it is possible to display three small arrows of different sizes, “small arrow”, “middle arrow”, and “large arrow”. It is possible to cause a light emission display that the expected value of “” is high.

  Next, an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 130 and the like, in the lower movable effect unit 3100, in the lower central effect unit 3120, the lower central elevating base 3121 is located behind the lower front central decorative unit 3110 in the lower central effect unit 3120. The four rotating decorations 3126 attached to the upper ends of the lower central lifting bases 3121 are positioned so as to contact the upper ends of the lower front central decorations 3111 in a front view.

  Further, in a normal state, in the lower left side effect unit 3150, the lower left side lift base 3151 is located slightly above the upper end of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 and in a lowered position that is almost invisible from the front, and The left side rotating decorative body 3153 is separated from the lower central rendering unit 3120 to the left via the slider, and about half is located at the retracted position below the left sub side rotating decorative body 3155, and the left sub side rotating decorative body 3155 is a game. It is located near the left end of the region 5a, which is lower than the vertical center.

  Further, in a normal state, in the lower right side effect unit 3170, the lower right side lifting base 3171 is located slightly above the upper end of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 and in a descending position almost invisible from the front, The right side rotating decorative body 3173 is separated from the lower central effect unit 3120 to the right through the slider, and about half is located at the retracted position below the right subside rotating decorative body 3175, and the right subside rotating decorative body 3175 is a game. It is located near the right end of the region 5a, which is lower than the center in the vertical direction.

  In this normal state, as one of the effects provided to the player, for example, a first special lottery result or a second special lottery obtained by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. According to the lottery result, after rotating the four rotary decorations 3126, the rotation of each rotary decoration 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portion 3127 facing forward in each rotation decoration 3126 that has stopped rotation To make the player visually recognize. Accordingly, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the rotation of the four rotary decorations 3126 is stopped in a desired combination, and the movable effect by the four rotary decorations 3126 can be enjoyed.

  When the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 that have stopped rotating satisfies a predetermined condition, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 attached to the lower central lifting base 3121 by the lower central decorative board 3122. To cause the lower front central decorative body 3111 of the lower front central decorative unit 3110 located in the front to emit light.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 137, since the downward arrow is emitted by the lower front center decorative body 3111, the emission of the downward arrow keeps the player's line of sight below the game area 5a. Can be guided to the effect operation unit 301 arranged in the position, can prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit 301, and can easily participate in the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. It is possible to make the player entertain the player participation type production, and to suppress the deterioration of interest.

  Or, from the normal state, depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the lower central lifting base 3121 is set. Raise from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the four rotating decorations 3126 move to the center of the front view game area 5a so as to block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and thus the game. Not only can the player be surprised, but also the player can think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be increased. After that, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of each rotating decorative body 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing forward in each rotationally stopped rotating decorative body 3126 is given to the player. Make it visible. As a result, when the four rotary decorations 3126 stop rotating in a desired combination with respect to the player, a "big hit" (an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous (may be described as a "big hit game state"). The lottery result) may occur, and depending on whether or not the rotation of the four rotary ornaments 3126 is stopped in the desired combination, the player is harassed and pounding, and the expectation for the lottery result is increased. Can be raised. Then, when the combination of the respective decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 that have stopped rotating satisfies a predetermined condition, a plurality of lower central decorative boards attached to the rising lower central lift base 3121 can be used. The LEDs are caused to emit light, and the lower rear central decorative body 3122 arranged in the front and the lower front central decorative body 3111 arranged in the lower front are light-emitted. As a result, as shown in FIG. 138, a large downward arrow is displayed by the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111. The player's line of sight can be guided to the effect operation unit 301 arranged below the game area 5a to prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit 301, and the effect operation unit 301 can be displayed by the light emission display of the large arrow. It is possible to make the player think that it will be a "big hit" by operating it, and to make the player operate the effect operation unit 301 to entertain the player participation type effect.

  Furthermore, from the normal state, the lower central lift base 3121 is selected according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that has been drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Is raised from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the four rotating decorations 3126 move to the center of the front view game area 5a so as to block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and thus the game. Not only can the player be surprised, but also the player can think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be increased. Subsequently, the left and right left side rotating decorations 3153 and the right side rotating decorations 3173 are respectively slid to the appearance positions on the center side, and then the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 are respectively moved. Raise to the raised position (see Figure 139). As a result, the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155, the left side rotary ornament 3153, the four rotary ornaments 3126, the right side rotary ornament 3173, and the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 are aligned in the left-right direction. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the expectation for the game can be raised by making the player think that the lottery result is a "big hit". After that, after rotating the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, the left side rotation decoration body 3153, the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175, the rotation is stopped and left. Ornamental portion 3156 of sub-side rotation ornamental body 3155, ornamental portion 3154 of left side rotational ornamental body 3153, decoration portion 3127 of each of four rotational ornamental bodies 3126, ornamental portion 3174 of right-side rotational ornamental body 3173, and right sub-side rotational ornamental body The player visually recognizes the combination of the decorative portion 3176 of the body 3175. At this time, since the plurality of decorative portions 3127 includes the decorative portion 3127 having the numeral decoration, the countdown can be performed by stopping the rotation so that the numeral decoration portion 3127 faces forward. It is possible to make the player feel that the lottery result must be a "big hit" by the countdown effect, and to make the game more interesting. Then, when the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, the left-side rotation decoration body 3153, the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 stop rotating and the countdown ends, The lower front central decoration 3111, the lower rear central decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right side decoration 3172 are illuminated and decorated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 139, a larger downward arrow (giant arrow) is luminescently displayed, so that the player can operate the effect operation unit 301 arranged at the tip of the huge arrow. Thus, it is possible to convince that the lottery result is a "big hit", and the player can surely operate the effect operation unit 301. When this huge arrow is lit and displayed, a message explaining the effect operation unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 is raised and the effect operation unit 301 is rotated. The operation unit 302 is rotated at high speed (see FIG. 140). As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates at a high speed, so that the player's interest can be enhanced, so that the pressing operation unit 303 can be surely pressed, and the player's enjoyment is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  As an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, in FIG. 140, the effect display device 1600 displays the characters "The rotation of the lower button is hot!" The faster the rotation speed of the section 302, the higher the expected value for a "big hit" is to be notified to the player. That is, the expected value is represented by the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302, and an effect image that informs the expected value to the player is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 140, as the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIG. 142, the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a lower front center decorative body 3111, a lower rear center decorative body 3122, and a lower left side decoration. You may make it display the production | generation image which shows the operation method of the production | operation production part 301 by which the player's operation is prompted by the "arrow" light-emitted and displayed by the body 3152, the lower right side decoration 3172, etc. Specifically, the effect images such as "press the button!", "Turn the dial!", "Turn the dial left!", "Turn the dial right!", Etc. are displayed. Thereby, the operation of the effect operation unit 301 can be performed accurately, and the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 301 can be surely enjoyed.

  Then, the player may operate the effect operation unit 301 to display a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, and to display an expected value of "big hit" by the effect image. An expected value is obtained by using four rotary ornaments 3126, left side rotary ornaments 3153, left subside rotary ornaments 3155, right side rotary ornaments 3173, and right subside rotary ornaments 3175 each formed in a dice shape. It may be displayed.

  As an expected value display using the four rotating ornaments 3126, the left side rotating ornament 3153, the left subside rotating ornament 3155, the right side rotating ornament 3173, and the right subside rotating ornament 3175, which are respectively formed in a dice shape. Is a combination of the decorative parts 3127, the decorative parts 3154, the decorative parts 3156, the decorative parts 3174, and the decorative parts 3176, which are turned to the front by rotating and stopping, and perform an effect of displaying an expected value which is a "big hit". . Specifically, when using only the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 of the lower central effect unit 3120 in the center, there are, for example, the following three patterns. In the pattern a1, the expected value is displayed in a state where the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing the front when the four rotary decorations 3126 stop rotating is a disjoint combination in which the player cannot read the meaning. No pattern. In the pattern a2, the rotation decoration bodies 3126 stop rotating with the second surface facing forward, and the combination of the decoration portions 3127 is “H”, “H”, “H”, “S”, and the expected value is high to some extent. The pattern displaying that. The pattern a3 has an extremely high expected value in a state in which the rotating decorative bodies 3126 stop rotating with the third surface facing the front and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 is “ge” “ki” “a” “tsu”. The pattern displaying that. In this way, the expected value can be displayed by the pattern displayed by stopping the rotation of the four rotary decorations 3126, and the expected value becomes higher in the order of pattern a1, pattern a2, and pattern a3.

  Further, as effects using the lower movable effect unit 3100, all of the four rotation decorations 3126, the left side rotation decorations 3153, the left subside rotation decorations 3155, the right side rotation decorations 3173, and the right subside rotation decorations 3175 ( Using eight (8) dice-shaped rotating bodies, a combination of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156, the decorative portion 3174, and the decorative portion 3176, the effect of displaying the expected value to be a "big hit" You may do it. Specifically, there are the following six patterns. In the pattern b1, the combination of the decoration portion 3127, the decoration portion 3154, the decoration portion 3156, the decoration portion 3174, and the decoration portion 3176 whose rotation has stopped is different (the expected value is not displayed). In the pattern b2, the left sub-side rotating decoration body 3155 is “Shin” or “star”, the left side rotating decoration body 3153 is “!” Or “Shin”, and the four central rotating decoration bodies 3126 are “H”, “C”, and “C”. “S”, the right side rotary ornament 3173 is “!” Or “Shin”, and the right sub side rotary ornament 3175 is “Shin” or “star” (chance display). In the pattern b3, the left sub-side swivel ornament 3155 is “Shin” or “star”, the left side swivel ornament 3153 is “!” Or “Shin”, and the four center swivel ornaments 3126 are “G”, “Ki”, and “Ki”. "A" "tsu", right side rotary decoration 3173 is "!" Or "凰", and right sub side rotary decoration 3175 is "command" or "star" (Gekiatsu display). In the pattern b4, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 is a “scale” or “star”, the left side rotation decoration body 3153 is “super”, and the four center rotation decoration bodies 3126 are “chi”, “ya”, “n”, and “su”. , The right side rotating ornament 3173 is “!”, And the right sub side rotating ornament 3175 is “combination” or “star” (super chance display). In the pattern b5, the left sub-side swivel ornament 3155 is a “star” or “star”, the left-side swivel ornament 3153 is “super”, and the four center swivel ornaments 3126 are “ge”, “ki”, “a”, and “tsu”. , The right side rotary ornament 3173 is “!”, And the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 is a combination of “凰” or “star” (super gekiatsu display). In the pattern b6, the left sub-side rotating ornament 3155 is “celebration”, the left-side rotating ornament 3153 is “!”, The four center rotating ornaments 3126 are “O”, “Me”, “De”, “To”, and the right side. The combination of the rotating ornament 3173 is "u" and the right sub-side rotating ornament 3175 is "!!" ("big hit" is confirmed). In this way, it is displayed by stopping rotation of the eight rotating bodies of the four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decorations 3153, the left subside rotating decorations 3155, the right side rotating decorations 3173, and the right subside rotating decorations 3175. The expected value can be displayed by the pattern, and the expected value becomes higher in the order of pattern b1, pattern b2, pattern b3, pattern b4, pattern b5, and pattern b6.

  In the above-described effect, if the player does not operate the effect operation unit 301 within a certain time after the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is prompted, the effect of displaying the above-described expected value is not performed, and “ The light emission display of "arrow" is also turned off. On the other hand, if the player operates the effect operation unit 301 within a certain time after the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is prompted, the effect that the expected value described above is displayed using the remaining effect time is continued. When the effect time ends, the above-described effect ends, the light emission display of the "arrow" is turned off, and the effect ends.

  Thus, according to the lower movable effect unit 3100, when the game state changes due to the game being played in the game area 5a in the normal state (the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004). Depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of B), the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged side by side on the upper side of the lower front central decorative body 3111 rotate, or the lower central The four rotating ornaments 3126 arranged side by side by the elevating base 3121 rise together with the lower rear central ornamental body 3122, the four rotating ornaments 3126 elevated by the lower central elevating base 3121 rotate, and the lower left portion The lower left slide drive motor of the side effect unit 3150 and the lower right slide drive motor of the lower right side effect unit 3170 (slide Structure, the pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3173 slides in the left-right direction, the left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3173 rotate, and the sliding mechanism and the lower left side The left side rotary ornament 3153 and the right side rotary ornament 3173 are raised by the elevation base 3151 and the lower right side elevation base 3171. The four rotary ornaments 3126, the left subside rotary ornament 3155, and the right subside rotary ornament 3175. Since it is possible to show the player a movable effect such as arranging in the left-right direction and rotating the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175, the player can be moved to the central movable unit 3125 (four Rotating ornament 3126), left side rotating ornament 3153 and right side turning Decorative body 3173, and it is possible to focus on the left Sabusaido rotary decoration member 3155 and the right Sabusaido rotating decorative body 3175 and the like, it is possible to entertain the movable effects by them.

  Also, when the lower central elevating base 3121 is located at the lower end, the lower rear central ornamental body 3122 emits light and the lower front central ornamental body 3111 emits light to display a downward arrow or to elevate the lower central elevator. By raising the base 3121 and causing the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111 to emit light by the plurality of LEDs on the lower central decoration substrate, a large downward arrow is displayed to emit light, and a pair of lower left side elevations By elevating the base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 to cause the respective lower left side decoration 3152 and the lower right side decoration 3172 to emit light, a larger downward arrow can be emitted and displayed. Depending on the performance, the player can be entertained, and the light-emitting downwards Arrow makes it possible to guide the viewpoint of the player's downward staging operation unit 301, it is possible to prompt the operation of the staging operation unit 301 to the player. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, or the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, thereby participating in the player participation type effect. And can be entertained.

  Therefore, since various movable effects, light emission effects, and player participation type effects as described above can be performed, it is possible to provide the player with various patterns of effects by appropriately combining them. , It is possible to make the player less likely to get bored and to make it difficult for the player to predict the effect pattern, so that it is possible to surprise the player by performing an unexpected effect. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the lower front central ornamental body 3111, the lower rear central ornamental body 3122, the lower left side ornamental body 3152, the lower right side ornamental body 3172, etc. are caused to emit a downward arrow so that the player can see the downward arrow. When the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is urged, an effect image which urges the operation of the effect operation unit 301 on the effect display device 1600, an effect image which explains the operation of the effect operation unit 301, and an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous By displaying an effect image or the like showing the relationship between the occurrence of and the effect operation unit 301, it is possible to strongly encourage the player to participate in the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. It is possible to easily operate the effect operation unit 301, entertain the player participation type effect, and suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-9-2. Rear upper movable production unit]
The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145 and the like. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the upper part in the back box 3010 above the effect display device 1600. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 includes an upper rear left unit 3210 attached to the upper left corner in the back box 3010 and an upper rear right unit 3230 attached to the upper right corner in the back box 3010.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper rear left unit 3210 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is slidable in a diagonal direction from the upper left to the lower right of the left base 3211 mounted in the back box 3010 and the left base 3211. A left slider 3212 attached, a linear rack gear 3213 attached to the left slider 3212, an upper rear left drive motor 3214 attached to the left base 3211 with its rotation axis facing forward and backward, and an upper rear A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the left drive motor 3214 and having a rotation shaft of the upper rear left drive motor 3214 connected to the input side, and a spur gear drive gear 3215 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250. , A spur gear that meshes with the drive gear 3215 and is rotatably mounted on the left base 3211 The first transmission gear 3216, the second transmission gear 3217 that meshes with the first transmission gear 3216 and is rotatably attached to the left base 3211, and the second transmission gear 3217 that meshes with the spur gear. A third transmission gear 3218 rotatably attached to the left base 3211, and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 3219 rotatably attached to the left base 3211 that meshes with the third transmission gear 3218 and the rack gear 3213, respectively. And are equipped with.

  The upper rear left unit 3210 is attached to the lower end of the left slider 3212 and extends in the left-right direction. An upper rear left decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear left decoration 3220 can be light-emitting decorated by causing a plurality of LEDs of the upper rear left decoration substrate to emit light.

  The upper rear left unit 3210 can raise and lower the upper rear left decoration 3220 via the rack gear 3213 by driving the upper rear left drive motor 3214.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the right base 3231 mounted in the back box 3010 and the right base 3231 slidably in an oblique direction from upper right to lower left. A right slider 3232, a linear rack gear 3233 attached to the right slider 3232, an upper rear right drive motor 3234 attached to the right base 3231 with its rotation axis facing forward and backward, and an upper rear right. A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the drive motor 3234 and having a rotation shaft of the upper rear right drive motor 3234 connected to the input side, and a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3235 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250, A spur gear that meshes with the drive gear 3235 and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231. Of the first transmission gear 3236, the second transmission gear 3237 meshed with the first transmission gear 3236 and rotatably attached to the right base 3231, and the second transmission gear 3237. A third transmission gear 3238 rotatably attached to the right base 3231 and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 3239 meshing with the third transmission gear 3238 and the rack gear 3233 and rotatably attached to the right base 3231. And are equipped with.

  Further, the upper rear right unit 3230 is attached to the lower end of the right slider 3232, and has a plate-shaped upper rear right ornamental body 3240 that extends to the left and right, and the front side is attached to the rear side of the upper rear right ornamental body 3240. And an upper rear right decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be light-emitting decorated by causing a plurality of LEDs of the upper rear right decorative substrate to emit light.

  The upper rear right unit 3230 can drive the upper rear right drive motor 3234 to move the upper rear right decorative body 3240 up and down via the rack gear 3233.

  The clutch mechanism 3250 has a cylindrical housing case 3251 and a plurality of protrusions 3252a radially extending to the vicinity of the inner surface of the housing case 3251 in the housing case 3251, and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper portion. An input member 3252 to which the rotary shaft of the rear right drive motor 3234 is attached, and a plurality of transmission grooves 3253a in which the protrusion 3252a of the input member 3252 is inserted in the housing case 3251 with a circumferential gap, A plurality of cam surfaces 3253b formed so as to be closer to the inner surface of the housing case 3251 as it gets closer to the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the driving gear 3215 or the driving gear 3235 protruding from the housing case 3251. An output member 325 having an output shaft 3253c to which is attached A plurality of rollers 3254 inserted between the plurality of cam surfaces 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251; a tightening spring 3255 that tightens the housing case 3251 from the outside; The housing has a housing recess 3256a that houses the tightening spring 3255, and the housing housing 3256 attached to the left base 3211 or the right base 3231 and the housing recess 3256a of the body housing 3256 are closed to output the output member 3253. A lid member 3257 through which the shaft 3253c penetrates, and a bearing 3258 attached to the lid member 3257 and through which the output shaft 3253c is inserted (see FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (c)).

  When the input member 3252 is rotated by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the clutch mechanism 3250 causes the plurality of protrusions 3252a of the input member 3252 to move to the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253. The output member 3253 comes into contact with the output member 3253, and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 attached to the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 rotates. That is, the clutch mechanism 3250 can directly transmit the rotation from the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 to the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side.

  Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, when the output member 3253 is rotated from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side via the output shaft 3253c, the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 moves toward the protrusion 3252a of the input member 3252. Therefore, the gap between the cam surface 3253b and the inner surface of the housing case 3251 becomes narrow, and the roller 3254 is caught between them. As a result, the rotation of the output member 3253 is blocked, the rotation of the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 is locked, and the rotation from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side is transmitted through the input member 3252 to the upper rear. It is not transmitted to the left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Therefore, even if a force acts to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 downward due to gravity, the clutch mechanism 3250 causes the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 to move through the output member 3253. Since the rotation is locked, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move downward arbitrarily, and the upper rear left driving motor 3214 or the upper rear right driving motor 3234 is loaded. Instead, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be kept stopped at arbitrary positions.

  In the clutch mechanism 3250 of the present embodiment, the housing case 3251 is tightened from the outer peripheral side by the tightening spring 3255 made of a coil spring, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. Therefore, when the rotational load (torque) applied from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side to the output member 3253 via the output shaft 3253c becomes larger than a predetermined value, the tightening force (biasing force) of the tightening spring 3255 is increased. ), The housing case 3251 rotates, the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 contacts the protrusion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is rotated from the output side with a strong force, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 that tightens the housing case 3251 and the housing case 3251, and the torque is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side to be released, the roller 3254 cannot be unlocked due to strong engagement, and the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251 are damaged. Can be prevented.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 145 (d), the clutch mechanism 3250 inserts the two rollers 3254 between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and also the two rollers 3254. The lock springs 3260 may be urged toward the protrusions 3252a close to the lock springs 3260. As a result, when a force to rotate the output member 3253 acts from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately moved to the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251. It can be engaged with the inner surface, and the rotation (rotation angle) of the output member 3253 from when the rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts until the lock is applied. It can be reduced as much as possible.

  Next, an effect using the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In a normal state, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is located above the effect display device 1600 and behind the upper front movable effect unit 3300 as shown in FIG. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 is invisible from the player side. In this normal state, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are in a non-driving state, respectively, but as described above, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are The rotation of the drive gear 3215 and the drive gear 3235 is locked via the output member 3253 by the clutch mechanism 3250 which is interposed between the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240. The rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move downward without permission.

  Accordingly, in order to prevent the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 from moving downward, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are continuously driven or moved downward. It is not necessary to provide an electric lock mechanism for preventing the above, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. In addition, the presence of the clutch mechanism 3250 can prevent the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper right right decoration 3240 from arbitrarily moving, so that the game board 5 is being transported or attached to the island facility in the game hall. Even if vibrations or accelerations are applied at the time of, etc., the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 remain in the state of the origin at the time of shipment, and it is not necessary to perform unnecessary origin adjustment. It is possible to reduce the labor required for installing the game board 5, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  In this normal state, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper left drive motor 3214 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottered by receiving the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 move diagonally downward toward the center via the clutch mechanism 3250, respectively, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 is moved. And the left end of the upper rear right decoration 3240 come into contact with each other to form one large decoration (see FIG. 143). As a result, a large decorative body that extends to the left and right appears on the upper front portion of the effect display device 1600, which can surprise the player and keep the player entertained, and suppress a decrease in interest.

  As described above, according to the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, the upper rear left drive motor 3214, the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212, and the right slider 3232 (the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right). Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the decorative body 3240) and the decorative body 3240), vibrations from the effect operation unit 301 and other movable decorative bodies operable by the player, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, and the upper portion. Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate due to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 attempting to descend due to gravity or the like acting on the rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, an output is generated. The cam surface 3253b of the member 3253 moves the roller 3254 to the inner surface of the housing case 3251. The roller 3254 is pressed into a state in which the roller 3254 is caught between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the output member 3253 side (upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and upper rear right decorative body 3240 side) is moved upward. The transmission of the rotation to the rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side is blocked, and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. Therefore, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 descend freely. Of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, and an unexpected movement (fall) can be prevented. The back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 make unintended movements, which gives the player a feeling of distrust. The can be avoided, it is possible to suppress the reduction of interest to delight movement of the upper left rear decorative body 3220 and the upper right rear decorative body 3240 to the player.

  Further, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side try to descend, the clutch mechanism 3250 can restrict the rotation of the output member 3253 and lock the output member 3253. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at a position of an arbitrary height through the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be varied. It is possible to show the player a variety of effect patterns that stop moving up and down at a position, and it is difficult for the player to get tired of the movable effects of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and a decrease in interest is suppressed. Can be made.

  Further, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at arbitrary positions in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left The drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being overloaded, and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being prematurely damaged due to overload, and the upper portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to damage to the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 145 (d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are respectively locked by the lock springs 3260. In the case of urging the protrusions 3252a side close to each other, when a force for rotating the output member 3253 acts from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately pressed. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251, and the lock is activated after rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side. The rotation of the output member 3253 up to this time can be reduced as much as possible. Accordingly, when the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 move the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 downward, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 descend smoothly without jerking. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the movements of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and entertains the movable effect by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  Further, by moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 downward to bring the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 into contact with each other, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and Since the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be combined to form a large decorative body, the large decorative body can be merged to have a strong impact on the player, which can be enjoyed by the player. In addition to being able to play, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit game”) in which the player has an advantage will occur due to the appearance of a large ornament, and expectation for the game. It is possible to enhance the feeling and suppress a decrease in interest. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other and united, the upper rear right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 on the other side is moved by abutting each other. However, since each of them has the clutch mechanism 3250, the force to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (try to rotate from the output side). Force), the roller 3254 is caught between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251 to lock the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving due to contact with each other. It is also possible to prevent the decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from returning, and to surely entertain the player with the movable effect in which the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 come into contact with each other and unite. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, since the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255 and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256, the output member is output from the output side. By rotating 3253, the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253, and the roller 3254 is caught between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Thus, when a force to rotate the housing case 3251 acts via the plurality of rollers 3254, the force (torque) to rotate the housing case 3251 is the frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. Is larger than the space between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255. Rigashoji, the accommodating case 3251 is able to rotate. Then, as the housing case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates via the plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end portion of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 abuts on the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252, The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is rotated from the output side with a strong force, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 that is tightening the housing case 3251 and the housing case 3251, and the torque is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side to be released, the roller 3254 is strongly bitten and cannot be unlocked, and the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251 are damaged. The pachinko machine 1 can be realized that can prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems and can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

[5-9-3. Front movable production unit]
The upper front movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 146 and FIG. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front side of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the upper part in the back box 3010 above the effect display device 1600 in a front view. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is a horizontally long unit base 3301 attached to the upper portion of the back box 3010, an upper front drive motor 3302 attached to the unit base 3301, and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be vertically movable. And an upper front movable decorative body 3350 that is moved up and down by the drive of the upper front drive motor 3302.

  The upper front movable decorative body 3350 is a circular central decorative body 3351 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be able to move up and down (downward) in the horizontal direction center, and arranged on both left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351. A pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a and a pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a are connected to each other and are attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A first projecting ornament 3352 having a connecting rod 3352b, a pair of second projecting ornaments 3353a arranged on the left and right sides of the central ornament 3351, and a pair of second projecting ornaments 3353a are connected to each other. The second protrusion is mounted coaxially with the first connecting rod 3352b of the first projecting ornament 3352 on the rear side of the central ornament 3351 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A second projecting decorative body 3353 having a Yuibo 3353B, and a.

  The first projecting decorative body 3352 has a pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a formed in a long projecting isosceles triangular shape having the central decorative body 3351 side as a base. In the pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the right side of the central decorative body 3351 is arranged rearward in the front-rear direction than the first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the left side. The first projecting decoration 3352 has a link mounting portion 3352c at the tip of the right first projecting decoration 3352a to which the tip of a second link rod 3304 on the right side described later is rotatably mounted.

  The second protruding decorative body 3353 has a pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a formed in an isosceles triangular shape with a long base protruding from the central decorative body 3351 side. In the pair of second projecting decorative portions 3353a, the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the left side of the central decorative body 3351 is arranged rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the right side. The second projecting decoration 3353 has a link mounting portion 3353c at the tip of the second projecting decoration 3353a on the left side, to which the tip of a second link rod 3304 on the left side to be described later is rotatably mounted.

  In the upper front movable decorative body 3350, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a of the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the second protruding decorative body 3353 are formed in the same shape and the same size. There is. The upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a left second protruding decorative portion 3353a behind the left first protruding decorative portion 3352a and a right first protruding decorative portion 3352a behind the right second protruding decorative portion 3353a. The first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are positioned so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  Although not shown, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a plurality of LEDs on the front side of the central decorative body 3351, the pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a, and the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a. The upper front central decorative board, the first projecting decorative section decorative board, and the second projecting decorative section decorative board, the central decorative body 3351, the pair of first projecting decorative sections 3352a, and the pair of The second projecting decoration portions 3353a can be independently illuminated.

  Further, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis having a base end extending in the front-rear direction at a symmetrical position with the front-left center in the middle. A pair of first link rods 3303 extending in a rod shape and a pair of first link rods 3303 are attached to the respective tips at their proximal ends so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the tip sides project first. A pair of second link rods 3304 rotatably attached to the link mounting portion 3352c of the decorative body 3352 and the link mounting portion 3353c of the second protruding decorative body 3353 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the front surface of the unit base 3301. An upper stopper 3305 protruding forward from the first link rod 3303 for restricting upward rotation of the tip end side of the first link rod 3303, and a tip end of the first link rod 3303. It includes a lower stopper 3306, a for regulating the rotational downward.

  Next, an effect using the upper front movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state of the upper front movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 130 and the like, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is raised, and the central decorative body 3351 is located near the upper end in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. At the same time, the first projecting ornament 3352 and the second projecting ornament 3353 extend horizontally and overlap each other in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 147 (a)). In this normal state, the first projecting ornament 3352 and the second projecting ornament 3353 overlap each other in the front-rear direction, so that the player can recognize the ornament as one. Further, in a normal state, the pair of first link rods 3303 are in contact with the upper stoppers 3305, respectively, and further rotation in the direction in which the tip end side moves upward is prevented.

  In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004. Then, the central decorative body 3351 moves together with the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353, and the entire upper front movable decorative body 3350 moves downward. At this time, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 move downward while being horizontally extended. By moving the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 downward, the second link rod 3304 on the right side attached to the link mounting portion 3352c of the first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the right side and the left side And the left side second link rod 3304 attached to the link attaching portion 3353c of the second projecting decorative portion 3353a, respectively, moves downward, and a pair of second link rods 3304 attached to the tip ends thereof, respectively. The first link rods 3303 rotate so that their tip ends move downward.

  Then, when the pair of first link rods 3303 that rotate with the downward movement of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 (the central decorative body 3351) respectively abut on the lower stoppers 3306, further rotation is blocked. This is the state (see FIG. 147 (b)). After the pair of first link rods 3303 abuts the lower stoppers 3306, respectively, when the central decoration body 3351 further moves downward, the first protruding decoration portion 3352a on the right side and the second protruding decoration portion 3353a on the left side, Since the downward movement is restricted by the left and right second link rods 3304, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are located at the center of the first connecting rod 3352b and the second connecting rod 3353b ( Around the center of the central decorative body 3351), the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the opposite side to the side to which the second link rod 3304 is attached respectively rotate in the direction of moving downward. This is the case (see FIG. 147 (c)). Accordingly, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a, which are arranged on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, rotate around the central decorative body 3351 so that the scissors open, respectively. The entire upper front movable decorative body 3350 can be made large, and it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  As described above, according to the upper front movable effect unit 3300, in a normal state, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 are overlapped in the front-rear direction to form one decorative body. When the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is lowered, the overlapping first projecting decorative portion 3352a and second projecting decorative portion 3353a are rotated and opened so that their tips are separated from each other. It is possible to surprise the player who has recognized it as one ornament, and to entertain the movement of the upper front movable ornament 3350.

  Further, by the action of the first link rod 3303 and the second link rod 3304, only by moving the upper front movable decorative body 3350 downward, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are moved to the central decorative body 3351. Since it can be opened by rotating in opposite directions with respect to each other, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive motor for rotating the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353.

[6. Peripheral control unit configuration]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 13 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The overall configuration of will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 148 to 152. 148 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 149 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 150 is a front view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 151 is a XX line of FIG. 152 is a sectional view of FIG. 152, and FIG. 152 is a view on arrow A of FIG. 150. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, the peripheral control unit 1500 has a transparent cover body 1501 having a box shape that is open in the rear and is longer in the left-right direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control that controls the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of production based on a command from the main control board 1310 of the unit 1300, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510. A liquid crystal output board 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic wave noise that enters the liquid crystal output board 1530. , Attached (bonded) to the metal shield plate 1540 in place A sexual member 1545 includes a transparent base member 1502 for closing the opening of the cover member 1501, a. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with the metallic shield board 1540, so that the shield board 1540 is formed. The peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box) is configured by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various substrates and closing the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502.

[6-1. Cover body]
Peripheral data capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the peripheral control board 1510 is stored in various boards mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There are a ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having a region of about ⅔ when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface, and is arranged on the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are the upper right of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 has a square shape in the remaining one-third area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a square shape that is two times larger than the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and is disposed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

  The board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later. Connected to each other. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected, and the same ground is provided. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 shown in FIG. Connected to each other.

  The cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, is transparently molded, and covers the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the oblong rectangular cover plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) when viewed from the front. The side walls 1501b to 1501e are formed in a box shape having an opening by being provided so as to project rearward (on the front side of the pachinko machine 1).

  The cover flat plate 1501a is for mounting the air-cooling fan FAN at a position slightly above the center of the cover flat plate 1501a as viewed from the front and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles whose center points are the centers of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. In addition, in the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a predetermined cylindrical shape is inserted into the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed in the four corners of the air cooling fan FAN having a square shape. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 having a height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN) are respectively formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. By forming the arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa, it is possible to prevent illegal actions in which various electronic components and the like provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are illegally taken out from the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and diagonally. When the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa to be mounted, the front surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan head screw (not shown) having a seat (an integral shape of the pan head and the flat washer) is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover plate 1501a toward the rear. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan head screw with a seat, comes into contact with the front surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN jumps out from the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and the model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). A wiring lead-out concave portion 1501ab is formed so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooling fan FAN is mounted and fixed in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN can be drawn out from the wiring drawing-out recess 1501ab.

  When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a has a position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a along the lower side thereof. The connector concave portion 1501ac is formed as one closed rectangular area (more accurately, a convex area in which the volume adjusting switch 1510d and the connector CN1 are located at the upper portion and the connector CN2 to the connector CN7 are located at the lower portion) of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa. It is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface (position having a distance dimension longer than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). There is. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjusting hole 1501ac8 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjusting switch 1510d, respectively. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac substantially occupies the lower right area of the cover flat plate 1501a when viewed from the front. For this reason, as measures against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume control are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. Two reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 elongated vertically are formed so as not to interfere with the hole 1501ac8 and project forward with a predetermined interval.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are provided with connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. And the sound volume adjusting hole 1501ac8 is exposed. At this time, when the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted, the mounting height is lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted, the plug is hidden due to the protruding wall of the cover flat plate 1501a on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. It cannot be projected from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The volume adjustment switch 1510d is lower than the height of the connectors CN1 to CN7 and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, even if dust, powder of some kind of metal, or the like attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, the dust adheres to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d. Can be prevented.

  When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a has a single horizontally long rectangular region along the lower side of which a position corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a is closed. As a result, the opening of the cover body 1501 is opened at a position where the connector concave portion 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa). The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are formed on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, respectively. . At this time, when the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted, the mounting height is lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In other words, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted, the plugs are hidden due to the protruding wall of the cover flat plate 1501a on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. It cannot be projected from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, even if dust, powder of some kind of metal, or the like attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN8 and CN9. It is like this.

  Further, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting recess 1501af for mounting the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that is in communication with the wiring drawing opening 1501ae and can close the wiring drawing opening 1501ae is smaller than the bottom surface of the above-mentioned FAN mounting recess 1501aa. It is formed so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is located at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and has a predetermined cylindrical height that is inserted into the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503). A protrusion 1501afa having a dimension) is formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the mounting hole 1501afb1 is provided at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed respectively.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted in the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front side of the wiring cover body 1503 to the rear side. The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring drawing opening 1501ae is closed and a plurality of wirings connected to the connector CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600). The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the plurality of wirings from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a non-conductive resin and is transparently molded.

  When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side cover side wall 1501c and project outward in the vertical direction at predetermined center intervals. At the same time, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc that is arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and protrudes outward, and a hinge hooking portion 1501cd that is arranged below the guide portion 1501cb and protrudes outward are respectively formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left ends of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb. On the other hand, L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda that project toward the front are formed on the front surfaces of the left ends of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea protruding outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear surface so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the left side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. Four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed at the positions so as to project from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, and peripheral control. A soldering copper foil (so-called "land") 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape is formed on the back surface side of the board 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are respectively formed on the peripheral control board. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of 1510.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the back flat surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is aligned with the boss hole 1501ag1 and is aligned with the attachment boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. To arrange. Then, among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are defined as the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 and the L shape of the shield plate 1540. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the mounting piece 1540c1 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged so as to be aligned, and the through holes 1510r2, 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are formed. , The cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metallic shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. The lands 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. Further, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw part) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. The circuit 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, as described above, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the shield plate 1540 made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1530. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 as described above. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. .

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan head screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the side (that is, so as not to project outside from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 when viewed from the rear surface so that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. At a position to be formed, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are diagonally projected from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Has been done. Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 having a circular shape on the front surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, A circular copper foil (so-called "land") 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 having a circular shape is formed on the back surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are respectively formed. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2, 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, of the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the land 1520rf4 and the rear surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In addition, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. It comes into contact with them. Further, the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are in contact with the seat surface of the metal pan head screw. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metallic shield plate 1540 is brought into a state of being electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, whereby the metallic shield plate 1540 is surrounded by the peripheral data. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the ROM substrate 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the shield plate 1540 made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1530. In addition, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Since the metallic shield plate 1540 is electrically grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. Become.

  When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are attached to the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and on the back surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The rear surface of the peripheral control board 1510, which is fixed, is arranged on the same plane.

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the rear surface so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. At the position, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed diagonally protruding from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the liquid crystal output A soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape is formed on the back surface side of the substrate 1530, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are respectively formed on the liquid crystal output substrate. A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of 1530.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. The output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metallic shield plate 1540 is held between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 and the rear surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 come into contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501am2, respectively. In addition to this, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is brought into a state of being electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is attached to the liquid crystal output substrate. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and is the same. Since it is the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1520. In addition, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. .

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan head screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Is disposed inside the end surface on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is fixed to the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

  Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the shield plate 1540 is covered. In a state where the peripheral control IC 1510a is fixed by being sandwiched by the substrate and various substrates, a gap having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is provided between the front surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. (In the present embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  Ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blade portion, thereby performing peripheral control. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (in particular, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501 are formed. A gap is formed, and a gap is formed in the volume control switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501. Further, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are formed. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blade portion. In addition to taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, the above-described gaps (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connectors formed in the cover body 1501) are taken. The gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Two connectors CN8 provided And CN9, via the two connector hole 1501ac9,1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The above-described gap (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501) and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. And the gaps formed in the volume adjusting hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501 and the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac1 formed in the cover body 1501. If is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, it was added to the. Therefore, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blade portion. Air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is formed in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and a plurality of shield plates 1540 housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in via the ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to be small.

[6-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin and is transparently molded. The base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed in a box shape having an opening by being provided so as to project forward (to the back side of the pachinko machine 1). The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Accordingly, when the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502 to close the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. When is fitted, it becomes inscribed (surface contact).

  When viewed from the front, the base flat plate 1502a has wirings with respect to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at predetermined positions along the lower side so as not to interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Vertically elongated disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502a3 are formed to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from being warped by the force of inserting the connector for connection and breaking the electric wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The force for inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to the connector CN1 and the force for operating the volume adjusting switch 1510d at a position where they do not interfere with the connector CN1 and the volume adjusting switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the peripheral control board 15 Electrical wiring pattern formed on the zero elongated disconnection preventing rib portion 1502aa4 in the lateral direction to prevent the breakage is formed.

  Further, the base flat plate 1502a is on the right side when viewed from the front thereof, and is located at a position corresponding to an L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d formed by bending a metal shield plate 1540 described later, at an L-shaped circuit. A rectangular through hole 1502ab that is long in the vertical direction and has a shape slightly larger than the shape of the back surface of the ground piece 1540d is formed.

  When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca that protrudes outward is formed near the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left side base wall 1502c. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge engaging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

  The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the U-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are described above. The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping around, the L-shaped hook parts 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking parts 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bags 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving parts 1502cac and 1502cad. It is capable of engaging.

  A base-side sealing portion 1502ea protruding outward is formed at a position corresponding to the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 in the center of the right side base side wall 1502e. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 included in the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the right side base wall 1502e, respectively.

[6-3. Shield plate]
The metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic wave noise that enters the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a horizontally long rectangular shield when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 that are bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the present embodiment) between the upper left side center and the lower left side center of the flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). Are formed respectively.

  Further, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, on the right side upper side and the right side lower side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front thereof. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward by 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed, respectively, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm). An L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d is formed between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2, and is bent backward by a predetermined distance dimension (25 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in this embodiment). A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end.

  The shield flat plate 1540a is formed with notches around the shield flat plate 1540a so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, respectively, and is substantially at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring drawing recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a, respectively, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover flat plate 1501a, and The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is inserted into the shield flat plate 1540a without coming into contact with the opening 1540aa.

  The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged on the same plane. The back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed to be parallel to each other. In this embodiment, the distance dimension from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

  Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501. As described above, the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 is projected from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. One of the pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed as described above. As described above, the mounting boss hole 1501am1 is projected from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is one mounting boss hole of the pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed.

  Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 extend from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. 2 of the four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 that are formed by protruding.

  Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the shield plate 1540 is covered. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the substrate and the various substrates, a distance dimension of a predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (this embodiment). In the form, a space having a size of 14.8 mm is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is arranged in this space to form two spaces.

  These two spaces are the distance dimension of the first predetermined height between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. (In the present embodiment, a first space 1505a (see FIG. 151) having 12 mm) and a second space between a front surface of a shield flat plate 1540a of a metal shield plate 1540 and a back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, which will be described later. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 151) having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (1.6 mm in this embodiment).

  In the first space 1505a, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b described later, SDRAM 1510c described later, real-time clock IC not shown, backup power supply 1510e described later, power supply generation circuit not shown, A resistor (not shown), a capacitor (not shown), LEDs ML1 to ML4 (to be described later), special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 (to be described later), various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a to be described later, a resistor not shown, a capacitor not shown), While a special connector SCN3, etc., which will be described later) and various electronic parts and the like (a resistor (not shown), a capacitor (not shown), a special connector SCN4, which will be described later) provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are stored. The second space 1505b, various electronic parts and the like is not at all accommodated. This is because it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise in the first space 1505a, and various electronic components that generate heat in the second space 1505b. This is because heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a is efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540 by not housing such components. That is, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat dissipation plate in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic wave noise.

  The shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 has ventilation holes 1540az of the same shape formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. That is, like the ventilation holes 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. There is. When the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blade portion. Thus, the air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 to cover the cover. The first space 1505a (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) in the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[6-4. Conductive elastic member]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning property (elasticity) and includes a conductive coating portion 1545a. A foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material coated with the conductive coating 1545a and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive coating 1545a are included. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include a polyester woven cloth on which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed, and a polyimide film on which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed. As the foam 1545b, for example, a polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be mentioned. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by the peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (bonded) to another member.

  The conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape with a width of 5 mm and a height of 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a rectangular shape with a width of 2 mm and a height of 0.035 mm. have.

[6-5. Various connectors]
The peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501 includes a CPU, a RAM, a VDP, a VRAM, a sound source, a serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as “SATA controller”), and various I / O. A peripheral control IC 1510a in which an O interface and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip, and various programs and productions that can control the progress and demonstration of the game production (demonstration performed while the player waits) Various control information (peripheral data) stored in the control ROM 1510b that stores in advance various schedule data to be defined and the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be transferred and stored. An SDRAM 1510c including a DRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide type volume control switch 1510d capable of controlling volume, and a power supply to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when power is turned off A backup power supply 1510e capable of performing the above, a power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7 are provided. The peripheral control IC 1510a, the ROM 1510b, the SDRAM 1510c included in the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 have a small IC pin interval and various connectors CN1 included in the peripheral control board 1510. To CN7, the pin spacing between the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 becomes narrower, and the spacing between the connectors CN1 to CN7 becomes narrower as the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 increases, and the spacing between the connector CN7 and the special connector SCN2 also narrows. ing.

  The control ROM 1510b included in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 included in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

  Various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I / Os and various parallel I / Os. The various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

  In the present embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), various boards provided on the game board 5 side, and various boards provided on the door frame side. There is also a method that employs SPI communication or I2C communication as a communication method for transmitting control data to (for communication via a corresponding connector among the connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

  In the present embodiment, for example, using SPI communication or I2C communication, an electric drive source provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various motors provided in the lower movable effect unit 3100, and communication is performed via the connector CN6 or the connector CN7). Or an electric drive source provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, an operation ring drive motor 342 and an operation button elevating drive motor 367 provided in the effect operation unit 300, etc., and communicates via the connector CN3. Drive data is transmitted to a drive control IC for driving the various types of sensors (for example, lower movable effect unit 3100, upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and upper front movable effect unit 3300) provided on the game board 5 side. , Which are communication sensors through the connector CN6.) Are used as detection data. Received or various sensors provided to the door frame 3 side (e.g., a variety of sensor provided in the staging operation unit 300, communicating via a connector CN3.) And receives a signal from the detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kpbs and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

  As various parallel I / O, there is GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general-purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from an air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of an air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1) or provided on the game board 5 side. The signals from various sensors that confirm the operation of the controlled object and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), or the control signals for the unillustrated controlled object provided on the game board 5 side are transmitted from the GPIO (connector CN6 Output) or a signal from the GPIO to the LED ML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Further, in the present embodiment, GPIO is used so as to function as serial communication. For example, in a predetermined interrupt process (for example, an interrupt process that occurs every 16 milliseconds (ms)), a clock signal is generated from GPIO, and data is output bit by bit from GPIO based on this clock signal. Can produce serial data. By using such a GPIO to function as serial communication, in a predetermined interrupt process (for example, an interrupt process that occurs every 16 milliseconds (ms)), for example, a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 side The light emission data can be output to a plurality of game board side serial systems (communicating via a connector CN1), and a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 3 side (communicating via a connector CN6). The light emission data can be transmitted to a plurality of door frame side serial systems.

  In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1, SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , Connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as SPI communication and a connector in which GPIO coexists), and connector CN7 is SPI communication. Has been assigned.

  The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and has realized a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (supports up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be transferred at high speed.

  The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memories), and can realize a high data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for inter-board connection with the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and a special connector SCN2 for inter-board connection with the liquid crystal output board 1530. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a special connector SCN3 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510. The liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector SCN4 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510.

  The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 by a plurality of types of video signal systems. The plural types of video signal systems include, for example, the RGB system, the LVDS system, the MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface) system, the eDP (Embedded Display Port) system, and the clockless system. In the above, four systems (a total of four systems), that is, one system for RGB system, two systems for LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system are adopted. Further, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. It should be noted that instead of the MIPI system, for example, the eDP system is adopted, and the RGB system has one system, the LVDS system has two systems (the first LVDS system and the second LVDS system), and the eDP system has one system. It is also possible to create 1510.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes an LED ML1 near the control ROM 1510b, an LED ML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, an LED ML3 near the special connector SCN1, and an LED ML4 near the special connector SCN2. As will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The LED ML1 is for confirming (monitoring) the state where DC + 5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state where DC + 5V is supplied. The LED ML2 is for confirming (monitoring) the state where the direct current + 12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state where the direct current + 12V is supplied. The LED ML3 is for confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 35V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which DC + 35V is supplied. The LED ML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the shield plate 1540 is covered. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the substrate and the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is arranged in this space to form two spaces. As described above, the two spaces have the first predetermined height between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 151) having a distance dimension (in this embodiment, 12 mm) and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The second space 1505b (see FIG. 151) having a distance dimension of a predetermined height of 2 (1.6 mm in the present embodiment).

  As described above, various electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components included in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are housed in the first space 1505a. ing. The interior of the first space 1505a formed in this manner can be illuminated brightly by turning on the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 included in the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN4 included in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are included in the peripheral control board 1510 in that they include a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from that of the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, respectively, and the plugs of the corresponding connectors are inserted and pushed in the vertical direction with respect to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 so that the sockets and the plugs fit with each other. When the sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 are fitted together, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 do not move vertically when viewed from the front.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are sockets.

  The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 so that the socket and the plug are fitted together. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is in the front-back direction (the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that is capable of absorbing an error in the front-back direction that occurs when it is pushed in by moving a predetermined distance range in the direction (. The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the (peripheral control board 1510) is moved from the front side to the maximum extent within the predetermined distance range described above, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not come into contact with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, a gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

  The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the socket and the plug are fitted together. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket is in the front-back direction when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front (the direction of the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). ) Is provided with a floating mechanism capable of absorbing an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when it is pushed in by moving a predetermined distance range. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control) in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the board 1510) moves from the front side to the maximum within the predetermined distance range described above, the special connector SCN4 has a socket (front surface (upper surface)) that does not come into contact with the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

  Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is used for the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is used for the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a peripheral data ROM 1520a capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) which is a control target of the peripheral control board 1510. As various control information (peripheral data), image data such as a background image, a character image, and a pattern image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data that defines light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs and the like mounted on a plurality of, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, and alarm sound, door frame 3 and game board 5 Examples thereof include drive data for driving and controlling various movable effect bodies provided.

  The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory, is cheaper than the NOR flash (non-volatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

  As described above, by adopting the NAND flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to realize cost reduction, contribute to the suppression of power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer rate. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to the peripheral control substrate 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected to each other via a wiring (harness), but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are not connected to each other. By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by the board-to-board connector, the influence of noise entering the board-to-board transmission path is reduced.

  Although the procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided therein into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Since the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 need to be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 after pushing in by pushing in, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. As a result, by absorbing the error in the front-back direction that occurs when fixing the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510, a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket. To prevent damage to The transmission path between the substrate and the control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, since the cover body 1501 is made of the non-conductive resin as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after the molding although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by using the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the plug and socket are connected, a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket are prevented from being damaged, and a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided. It can be reliably formed.

  The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, which is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510, from the connector CN10, so that the effect display device 1600 progresses the effect (for example, to the player). An image that conveys a big jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state, an image that conveys that the jackpot gaming state does not occur, and a jackpot gaming state that does not occur, but a jackpot gaming state occurs when compared to the normal state It is an important substrate that draws an image such as an image that tells you that you are approaching. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit the drawing data of the image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are not electrically connected via a wiring (harness) between the substrate and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate 1510. By adopting a structure in which the board 1510 and the board 1510 are electrically connected to each other, the influence of noise that enters the board-to-board transmission path is reduced.

  Although the procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is configured such that the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided therein is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. After the push-in, it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. This absorbs an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510, so that a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket can be accommodated. Peripheral control board to prevent damage The transmission path between the substrate 510 and the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, since the cover body 1501 is made of the non-conductive resin as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after the molding although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-back direction that occurs at the time, damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is surely provided. Can be formed.

  When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are separated. Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the front surface of the peripheral control board 1510. Since the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced as compared with the case of performing the three-dimensional arrangement, for example, a large movable effect unit (a movable effect member is operated on the game board 5). It is equipped with an electric drive source and drive mechanism that can be used, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and operating position. It can contribute to ensuring the order in the depth direction of the distance dimension.

[6-6. Assembly method of peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Then, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

  Then, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are attached to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540b1a formed on the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is placed so that it fits into the hole 1501ah2 and is made of metal. A through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 are arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. The mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are formed in the same manner as the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  Next, insert a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and screw into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by the above, and a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form it on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a by screwing the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is removed. It is in a state of being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  Subsequently, since the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, they are left as they are or are finely adjusted. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are finely adjusted and arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are formed. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a by inserting a pan head screw (not shown) made of metal into the holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metallic shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. That is, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to cover the shield plate 1540. The body 1501 and various substrates are sandwiched and fixed.

  In this way, of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is restrained from moving vertically and horizontally by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the cover plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 has a mounting boss for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions, while the peripheral control board 1510 has the mounting boss protruding portions 1501an1, 1501an2 formed on the rear surface side thereof for restraining the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions. The protruding portion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a so as to constrain the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such constraint is covered by the peripheral control substrate 1510. When fixed to the back surface side of 1501a, absorbed by the respective dimensional tolerances of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. You can do it.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda are formed on the base body. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the 1502 are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bags 1502cae and 1502caf.

  Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bags 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Then, the base body 1502 is wrapped around so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502 to cover the base body 1502 as it is. When the body 1501 is covered, the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d projects from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. A metal one-way screw Screwed toward the base side sealing section 1502ea formed on the base member 1502 by entering. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip end surface of the metal anchor rivet spreads outward at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea to form the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The base side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is in a sealed state.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and inscribed (surface contact). Further, in this sealed state, the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 projects from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (projection length) to the back surface of the is 6.8 mm.

  In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed by a tool. Therefore, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by observing the traces of opening and closing, and a deterrent to the unauthorized conduct to the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been increased.

  Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN are pulled out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal-made pan head screw (a screw having a shape of a pan head and a flat washer) (not shown) is screwed into the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover plate 1501a toward the rear.

  Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring drawing opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. By inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front side to the rear side of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  Subsequently, the peeling paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is provided on the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. The adhesive tape 1545c of 1545 is attached (bonded).

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the mounting portion formed on the rear side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600, which is the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is located on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. And a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to insert a mounting groove that forms a mounting portion formed in the transparent synthetic resin box. It is fixed by screwing it toward a mounting hole that constitutes a mounting portion formed on the back surface side of.

  As described above, the effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. Further, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600, and electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 or the like housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. The same ground (GND) is formed by connecting the same to. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit ground piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. 1540d passes through a through-hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and as shown in FIG. 152, is attached to the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 via the conductive elastic member 1545. It comes into contact with them. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the present embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), so that dimensional deviation due to dimensional tolerance or assembly error occurs. Can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metallic shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically and reliably connected to each other, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided. Since the same ground (GND) can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510, an environment strong against electromagnetic noise can be built for the peripheral control unit 1500 and its periphery. You can

  In the assembling method described above, in the procedure of attaching various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is The through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metallic shield plate 1540 is arranged so as to match the formed attachment boss hole 1501ag4, and the attachment boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Of the metal shield plate 1540. A through hole 1540b2a formed in shape attachment pieces 1540B2, arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is arranged at the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the rear side). The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the cover plate 1501a of the peripheral control substrate 1510 at the above-described predetermined position (the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the cover member 1501 when viewed from the rear side). 1501)), the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and is pushed in. The special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 Is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is moved to the predetermined position described above (the peripheral control board 1510 sees the cover body 1501 from the rear side and It is also packed and placed on the left side). Also in the mounting procedure of such various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, by absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at the time of pushing in, a plug and a socket are formed. It is possible to prevent the connection terminals formed in plural from being damaged, and to reliably form the transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510, respectively, and at the same time, to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral. It is possible to reliably form the transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board.

  By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards having different game specifications, which are mounted on the pachinko machine. In this embodiment, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three parts and attached to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used commonly regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is a peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. By storing the peripheral data corresponding to, the board depends on the game specification of the game board, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 depends on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

  As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that is not dependent on the game specifications of the game board and is not dependent on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 having the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

  As the system of the video signal input to the display device such as the effect display device, for example, as described above, there are plural types of systems such as the RGB system, the LVDS system, the MIPI system, the eDP system, and the clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plural types of methods are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced according to the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS system systems as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 (for example, the first LVDS system system). Therefore, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 (LVDS method) is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the inter-board connector described above.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a non-conductive resin and are transparently molded, and the peripheral control board is provided in the internal space of the cover body 1501. 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and other various substrates are attached at predetermined positions together with the metallic shield plate 1540, whereby the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and various substrates. Then, the metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of various substrates. In addition, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Connected to each other. Therefore, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is passed through the metal shield plate 1540 as circuit ground to serve as the ground (GND) of various boards and the ground of the power supply board 630. (GND), and from the frame earth substrate 559 shown in FIG. 102 (b), it can be guided to the earth of the island facility in the game hall and removed. As a result, it is not necessary to provide each of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic noise, which contributes to cost reduction of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630). You can

  Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of tampering.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 150, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the peripheral control board. The part number or model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided in the 1510, the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number). , The pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the silk-screened contents on the peripheral control board 1510 are confirmed from multiple directions. In order to make it possible to disperse the control ROM 1510b into a larger area than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. It is. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence relationship between the control ROM 1510b and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. . Further, since the LED ML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b is designed to maintain the lighting state in the state where the direct current + 5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, the direct current + 5V is supplied. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the status of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the status of the IC pin. Of the peripheral control board 1510 and the visibility of the silk-screened content on the peripheral control board 1510 can be improved.

  Further, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and further provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number or model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, , Connector pin count, IC Orientation, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are silk-printed respectively. The contents are distributed and arranged so as to be a large area in which the contents can be substantially confirmed from the angles in multiple directions. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In addition to the correspondence relation with, the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is modified, and the inter-board connector is modified by the special connector SCN1 included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LED ML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is designed to maintain the lighting state in the state where the direct current + 35V is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620, and thus the direct current + 35V is maintained. As a spotlight that has a function of confirming (monitoring) the supplied state, but brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the function of, the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pin is improved, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. On the peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to the the special connector SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 special connectors provided in SCN3 obtaining.

  Further, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 in the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and 1530 are arranged in a dispersed manner so that the silk-printed contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the silk-screened content on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the silk-screened content on the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. can do. Further, the LED ML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is designed to maintain the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, so that the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although having a function, the peripheral control board 1510 has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 with the special connector SCN4. Improving the visibility of the silk-screened contents on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improving the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  Further, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pins of the 1510c2 and the contents (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. In order to be able to check the state of the IC pins and the silk-screened contents on the peripheral control board 1510 from the angles of the multiple directions, the IC pins are dispersed so that the areas are larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. It is arranged. Thus, in addition to the correspondence relationship between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the alterations of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. You can Further, the LED ML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in the lighting state when the direct current + 12V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Originally, although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state where DC + 12V is supplied, it also has a function as a spotlight of brightly illuminating the SDRAM 1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pin, and the improvement of the visibility of the silk-screened contents on the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, among the plurality of blades forming the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN, the clearance between the blades (specifically, the clearance between the blades by the inspector rotating the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN). From this, the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

  In the present embodiment, since the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are surface mount type and have a wide angle of about 120 degrees, and a type with weak directivity is adopted. It is also suitable for use as lighting. Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the shield plate 1540 is covered. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the substrate and the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is arranged in this space to form two spaces. As described above, the two spaces have the first predetermined height between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 151) having a distance dimension (in this embodiment, 12 mm) and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The second space 1505b (see FIG. 151) having a distance dimension of a predetermined height of 2 (1.6 mm in the present embodiment). As described above, various electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components included in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are housed in the first space 1505a. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a thus formed can be illuminated brightly by turning on the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is also suitable for use as illumination.

  Further, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has a glossiness and is a region on the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540, which has gloss and faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Further, it also has a function as a reflection portion that can reflect the light emitted from the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 to the surrounding area and redirect the light to the peripheral control board 1510 again. You may comprise so that a colored coating material having gloss may be further applied to these reflective portions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged near the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is provided on the side of the game board 5. Since the game balls are rubbed against each other in the sphere path constituted by these to be charged and electrostatically discharged, they become a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 in which the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are lined up opposite the island facilities of the game hall in the opposite direction. In this way, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to the influence of electromagnetic noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are transparently molded and made of a non-conductive resin, and the inside space of the cover body 1501 is formed. In addition, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with the metallic shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the various boards. The metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates by being fixed to be a circuit ground. Further, in the present embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are set to the ground of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 as described above. A configuration is adopted in which the same ground (GND) is formed by electrically connecting to the (GND) line.

  Thereby, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base. Electromagnetic noise that has entered from the body 1502 is passed through a metal shield plate 1540 as circuit ground to serve as a ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and a power supply. The ground (GND) of the board 630 and the frame ground board 559 shown in FIG. 102 (b) can be guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hole for removal. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base. Electromagnetic noise that has entered from the body 1502 can be removed through the metal shield plate 1540 as circuit ground called circuit ground from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island facility in the game hall.

  Further, in the vicinity of the game board 5 with the peripheral control unit 1500, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is arranged. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000, the special connector SCN1 and the peripheral data ROM board provided on the peripheral control board 1510. A board-to-board connector including a special connector SCN3 included in the 1520 and a board-to-board connector including a special connector SCN2 included in the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 included in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged near the center of the ball tank 552. So that it can be placed away from the tank rail 553. You have me. As described above, the tank rail 553 can drop the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a, and thus the above-described substrate. By arranging the inter-connector away from the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B in the inter-board connector described above.

  In addition, a board-to-board connector including a special connector SCN1 included in the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN3 included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a special connector SCN2 included in the peripheral control board 1510, and a special connector SCN4 included in the liquid crystal output board 1530. The board-to-board connector is a state in which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In FIG. 150, as shown in FIG. 150, since it can be arranged vertically long, it is possible to minimize the area where dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. adhere. When the above-mentioned inter-board connector is arranged long in the left-right direction, the area where dust, powder of some kind of metal, or the like adheres increases significantly. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged long in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. Although the area where the powders and the like that it has adheres is extremely increased, as described above, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is a cover flat plate 1501a. Even if the plugs corresponding to CN1 to CN9 are inserted, the plugs are hidden and cannot project from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Dust adhering to the surface of the cover side wall 1501 It is dropped from, so that it can be prevented from adhering to the connector CN1～CN9. In this way, the direction in which the above-mentioned inter-board connector is arranged and the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged so that dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. can be prevented from adhering to each electric terminal. Is selected.

  By the way, conventionally, a game machine including a ROM for storing image data of patterns, various background images, characters, characters, etc., a production control board on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images is mounted, and the like. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems input to the display device. Therefore, in the gaming machine described in this document, it is necessary to modify and produce the production control board in accordance with the video signal input to the display device, and it is difficult to suppress the cost of the production control board. there were.

  Further, conventionally, a ROM for storing image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, characters, etc., a production control board (production control means) on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images is mounted, and the like. A gaming machine including the above has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game ball supplied from the island facility in the game hall to the gaming machine is charged with static electricity due to the game balls rubbing against each other when circulating between the island facility in the game hall and the gaming machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the.

[7. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 can control the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 can control the progress of production based on various commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a capable of controlling the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b capable of controlling the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182. There is.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 153, the main control board 1310 capable of controlling the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Main control MPU1310a, which is a microprocessor having various processing programs such as a main control program for controlling a game operation and a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various sensors A main control input circuit 1310b to be input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a power failure of a predetermined voltage Alternatively, the main power control MPU 1310a and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring the signs of momentary power failure And a, a RAM clear switch 1310f for completely erasing information stored in has been has RAM.

  In the main control MPU 1310a, in addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in WDT”) that monitors the operation (system) thereof, a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. This once-added ID code is stored in the nonvolatile RAM and cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in hardware") that updates the big hit determination random number, which is used for determining whether to generate the big hit game state, among the various random numbers related to the game, by hardware. Random number circuit ") is built in. This hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and the initial value is generated. A predetermined value is not fixed as the value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured such that a different value is set every time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a clock signal (main signal) input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication, and within a predetermined numerical range. When all the values in the above are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a big hit determination random number. It is supposed to be set as.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various sensors to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, so that the various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. are inputted to its various input terminals. A main control output circuit with a reset function, which has a reset function for forcibly resetting the stored information, and a main control output circuit without a reset function, which has no reset terminal and has no reset function; It consists of The main control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with a reset function is a signal based on the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to the external board etc. by being reset by the main control system reset. Is configured as a circuit that does not output at all from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without the reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset not shown is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without the reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to the external board etc. by the main control system reset, so that the signal based on the information is output. It is configured as a circuit output from the various output terminals.

  A first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening sensor 2511 for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004, and a general winning opening 2001 General winning a prize sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B, a gate sensor 2301 for detecting the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a first prize for detecting the game ball B received at the first prize hole 2005 The detection signals from the mouth sensor 2512, the second special winning opening sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006, the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like. , Is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, so that the main control output circuit with reset function outputs the main control solenoid. By outputting a control signal to the drive circuit 1310d, a drive signal is output to the starting opening solenoid 2514, the first attacker solenoid 2515, and the second attacker solenoid 2516, and a main function with a reset function is provided from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal to the control output circuit, the status display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control output circuit with a reset function, a normal symbol display, a normal hold display, a first special symbol display, a first special hold Number display, second special symbol display, second special reserved number display, Lau De display, or outputs the drive signal to equal.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with the reset function, so that the payout control board 633 is output from the main control output circuit with the reset function. Main control output circuit with reset function by outputting various information (game information) about the game to or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function Outputs a signal (power failure clear signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2511, the gate sensor 2301, the first big winning opening sensor 2512, and the second big winning opening sensor 2513 are non-contact type electromagnetic. In contrast to the type of proximity switch, the general winning a prize sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2511. , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2301 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2511, and the gate sensor 2301.

  In addition, when an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (“big hit” game, etc.) occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is opened, and the game ball B is frequently entered. The detection of the game ball B by the first special winning opening sensor 2512 and the second special winning opening sensor 2513 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are also used for the first special winning opening sensor 2512 and the second special winning opening sensor 2513. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to payout from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function as serial data, whereby the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit without reset function. To send various commands as serial data. When the payout control board 633 completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal (payment main ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payment main ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 11310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. The main control output circuit with a reset function outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 633.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without the reset function, Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit having no reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Various voltages (DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 155 and the like). The capacitor BC0 enables the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. Various types of information stored in the RAM with built-in main control are operation signals (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. Is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and with this as a trigger, it is completely erased (cleared) from the main control internal RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. There is. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the main control output circuit without the reset function, and is also output from the main control output circuit without the reset function to the payout control board 633.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with DC + 12V and DC + 35V from the power supply board 630, and monitors the signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure of these DC + 12V and DC + 35V. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure notification signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notification when it detects signs of DC + 12V and DC + 35V power failure or momentary power failure. The input terminal of the main control board 1310 (outputted via the main control output circuit 1310c) and the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 4110, and the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa while being input to the input terminal. Entered in. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. The power failure notice signal may be input to each of the boards and the like on which the door frame 3 is mounted.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies the voltage to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to the two power lines, the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, respectively. Compared with the case of monitoring the voltage applied, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

[7-2. Discharge control board]
In addition to the payout control of the game ball B, the payout control board 633 that controls the launch of the game ball B, the ball feed control, and the like performs the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and the launch control by the launch solenoid 542. , A firing control unit 633b for controlling the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 145, an error LED display 633c for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an error LED display 633c for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display 633c. An error release switch 633d is provided.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 153, as shown in FIG. 153, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. A payout control MPU 633aa, which is a microprocessor having various processing programs including a payout control program for controlling a payout operation of a game medium, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like, and various types of payouts. A payout control input circuit 633ab to which a detection signal from a sensor is input, a payout control output circuit 633ac for outputting various signals to an external substrate, and a drive signal for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580. And a payout motor drive circuit 633ad.

  The payout control MPU 633aa has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”), and its operation ( It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with payout control") for monitoring the system) and functions for preventing fraud.

  The payout control input circuit 633ab is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various sensors to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 633ab, the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset, so that various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

  The payout control output circuit 633ac is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information, and a payout control output circuit without a reset function having no reset function provided with no reset terminal, It consists of The payout control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the payout control output circuit with a reset function is a signal based on the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by the payout control system reset. Is configured as a circuit that does not output at all from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, in the payout control output circuit without the reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to the external board etc. is not reset by the payout control system reset, so that the signal based on the information is output. It is configured as a circuit output from the various output terminals.

  Detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580, payout detection of the payout device 580. The detection signal from the sensor 591 and the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and the detection signal from the body frame opening switch that detects the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are the payout control input circuit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via 633ab.

  Further, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received by the input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab by the serial data method. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f from the main control board 1310 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  When the payout control MPU 633aa completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs a signal (payment main ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with the reset function. By outputting to the circuit, the payout control output circuit with reset function outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to the main control board 1310.

  In addition, the payout control MPU 633aa transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without the reset function to thereby output the payout control output without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted from the circuit to the main control board 1310 as serial data. When the main control board 1310 normally receives various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 633. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  Further, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs the drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with the reset function, thereby driving the payout control output circuit with the reset function. A signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 633ad, a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 633ad to the payout motor 584, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the error LED display 633c from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting the drive signal for display to the payout control output circuit with the reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with the reset function to the error LED display 633c.

  The error LED display device 633d is a segment display device, and displays alphanumeric characters and figures to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 633d include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number “1” is displayed, it means “out of ball” (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, the fact that there is no game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570) is notified, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball ball" (specifically Specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout blade 589 and the game ball B are engaged with each other and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate, and the number "3" is displayed. When the Error ”(specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is defective based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number“ 5 ”is displayed,“ retry ”is displayed. "Error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it means "full" ( Specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the lower bowl 202 is filled with the stored game balls B), and when the number "7" is displayed, "CR" is displayed. "Not connected" (electrical connection is cut off in any part from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1), and the number "9" is displayed. When displayed Indicates that it is "in stock (award ball stock (not yet paid))" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number) There is.

  In addition, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out as a prize ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function, thereby performing payout control with reset function. For example, the output circuit outputs the number of game balls actually paid out as a prize ball to the external terminal board 558 through a resistor (not shown).

  Further, the payout control board 633 outputs various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 558 is provided with a plurality of photo couplers (not shown) (incorporating an infrared LED and a photo IC), and a game hall (hall) through the plurality of photo couplers. ), The number of balls of the game ball B and various information (game information, error content regarding the payout operation of the game ball or the fact that there was an error) is transmitted to the hall computer. The external terminal board 558 and the hall computer are electrically insulated from each other by a plurality of photo couplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the hall computer can control the main control board 1310, which allows the game to proceed through the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, the payout and the like. An abnormal voltage is applied to the payout control board 633 that can be used and the peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the production, and malfunction or failure does not occur. The hall computer grasps the number of the game balls B actually paid out by the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like, and thereby the payout information of the game ball B by the payout operation of the pachinko machine 1 , Ball information) and the player's game.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. . The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game ball B to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is sent from the payout control MPU 633aaa through the CR unit input / output circuit (not shown). It is adapted to be input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is a ball. It is adapted to be input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the lending operation unit 220.

  Various voltages (DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the payout control board 633. As described above, the power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 has a capacitor BC0 (see FIG. 155, etc.) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. See). With this capacitor BC0, the payout control MPU 633aa can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. Regarding various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) is a payout control input circuit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the 633ab, and triggered by this, it is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control internal RAM by the payout control MPU 633aa.

[7-2-2. Firing controller]
The firing control unit 633b performs firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors related to firing are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal based on this clock signal. And a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing reference A ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , And generates a ball feeding reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

  Regarding the relationship of the handle unit 180, a detection signal from a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped depending on the intention of the player. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not is input to the firing control circuit after being input to the firing control input circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball B is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  This firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 182, and a launch reference pulse. It is output to the firing solenoid 542 in response to the input. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current to the ball launching device 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. Controlled.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of production based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and includes CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I / O. A peripheral control IC 1510a in which an interface or the like is integrated on one semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b that stores in advance various programs and various schedule data that regulates the progress of effects, and a peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are stored. SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing various kinds of control information (peripheral data), a slide type volume adjusting switch 1510d capable of adjusting the volume, and a real time controller (not shown). And backup power source 1510e which can also supply power during power failure to the time clock IC, and includes a power supply generating circuit (not shown) to create various supply voltages, and peripheral control input circuit (not shown), the. Examples of various I / O interfaces include various serial I / O ports and various parallel I / O ports.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stores various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 into the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 when the power is turned on (including the case of restoring power from a power failure). Control transfer. Since the transfer rate of 2 Gbps is provided between the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, the control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Transfers at high speed. As the control information (peripheral data), as described above, the background image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, the character image, the image data such as the pattern image, the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are provided. Light emission data that defines light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, and alarm sound, door frame 3 and games. The drive data and the like are used to drive and control various movable effect bodies provided on the board 5.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store or delete information associated with processing. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the activation of its own system, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on various commands from the main control board 1310 and advances the production. .

  Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the activation of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads out and reads out various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands. Various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are read out in accordance with the schedule data, control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600, and various LED light emission modes according to various effects are provided. By performing such control as described above, or by performing control so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow, the various effects are advanced.

  The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a generates drawing data for reading the image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Then, the output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is controlled. This drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. When the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a becomes ready to accept the screen data defining the screen configuration, the VDP outputs a V blank signal to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a to notify the fact.

  The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads and generates sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, generates the sound data, and outputs the sound data. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects are played from the 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. When the slide type volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, this volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume in accordance with the input volume adjustment operation signal based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side can be adjusted. Outputs acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. By doing so, it is possible to provide a more realistic sound effect (sound effect).

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the activation of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU reads the various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands and reads the read schedule data. Along with, the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and various serial I From the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2, the game board side drive data for transmitting from the / O port to each decorative board of the game board 5 and outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in the game board 5 Play and read from various serial I / O ports A door for transmitting to each drive board that drives the drive motor and / or the drive solenoid of the above, or for outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3 and the operation button lift drive motor 367. Door-side drive light emission configured by side-drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 Data is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted from various serial I / O ports to the door frame 3 side.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting positions in the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are peripheral control inputs. It is received by the various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the circuit. In addition, the detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 381, the detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the detection signal from the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are the peripheral control inputs. It is received by the various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the circuit. Further, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN included in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. .

  Various voltages (DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510. The power supply generation circuit (not shown) included in the peripheral control board 1510 includes a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510 from one voltage (for example, +12 V DC) among various voltages from the power supply board 630. We create and supply types.

  The peripheral control IC 1510a includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

[8. Ground wire system]
As described above, the frame earth substrate 559 shown in FIG. 102 is capable of once collecting electromagnetic noise generated at various places and grounding it to the island facility of the game hall. Here, the system of the ground wire by the frame ground substrate 559 will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing the configuration of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 154 (a) is a side view of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. 154 (b) is a mounting surface of the frame ground substrate 559. c) is a circuit diagram of the frame ground board 559, and FIG. 154 (d) is a table showing an explanation of each ground terminal provided on the frame ground board 559. As shown in FIG. 154 (a), the frame ground board 559 has its mounting surface facing downward (that is, the connector insertion openings of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are facing downward). It is housed and attached inside the board housing part 551aa formed in the top plate part 551a of the dispensing base 551 shown in FIG. 102 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 154 (b), the frame ground substrate 559 has the ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, and ECN2 arranged in a line from the right side to the left side along the upper side thereof, and the center of the left side thereof. A lower earth terminal ECN3 is arranged. Briefly describing the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, as shown in FIG. 154 (d), the ground terminal ECN1 is provided as an interface ground on the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The connection terminal is electrically connected via an interface ground wire, and the ground terminal ECN2 is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal in the island equipment of the game hall and the island equipment ground wire as the island equipment ground. The ground terminal ECN3 is shown as a ball tank ground in the ball tank 552 shown in FIG. 102 (b) (specifically, on the outside of the side wall of the ball tank 552 near the substrate housing portion 551aa). Attach one end of the ball tank ground wire with a metal screw that does not The other end of the quars wire is electrically connected, and the earth terminal ECN4 serves as a body frame metal ground and serves as a body frame metal ground. The body frame reinforcement frame 530 made of metal in the body frame base unit 500 of the body frame 4 shown in FIG. (Specifically, one end of the main body frame metal ground wire is attached to the upper side of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 by a metal screw not shown, and the other end of the main body frame metal ground wire is electrically connected. The ground terminal ECN5 is electrically connected as a power ground to a ground connection terminal provided on the power board 630 of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 113 via a power ground wire.

  In the circuit of the frame earth substrate 559, as shown in FIG. 154 (c), the earth terminal ECN3 as the ball tank earth is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER1, and the other end of the resistor ER1 serves as the power earth. The earth terminal ECN5, the earth terminal ECN2 as the island facility earth, and the earth terminal ECN1 as the interface earth are respectively electrically connected, and the earth terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal earth is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. At the same time, the other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to a ground terminal ECN5 as a power source ground, a ground terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground, and a ground terminal ECN1 as an interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are adopted as the resistors ER1 and ER2.

  Electromagnetic noise flowing through the earth terminal ECN1 as the interface earth is guided to the earth of the island equipment in the game hall through the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment earth and the island equipment earth wire, and is removed. Electromagnetic noise flowing through the terminal ECN3 is guided to the earth of the island facility in the game hall through the earth terminal ECN2 as the island facility earth and the island facility earth wire, and is removed, and flows into the earth terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground. The electromagnetic wave noise is guided to the earth of the island facility in the game hall through the earth terminal ECN2 as the island facility earth and the island facility earth wire to be removed, and the electromagnetic noise flowing to the earth terminal ECN5 as the power source ground is the island facility. A game hall through the earth terminal ECN2 as an earth and the island equipment earth wire. It is adapted to be removed is guided to the ground of the island facility.

  As shown in FIG. 98, a ball tank 552, a payout unit 560, and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The ball 552 is supplied with the game ball B from the island facility of the game hall, and the ball 552 is supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560. The game ball B is ground in the island facility of the game hall, rubs against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged to emit electromagnetic noise. Therefore, static electricity easily accumulates in the area where the ball tank 552 capable of accumulating the game balls B, the payout unit 560, and the periphery thereof is accumulated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the frame earth substrate 559 is arranged in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, and as a result of the static electricity easily accumulating, the ball tank 552 and the payout tank are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In the vicinity of the unit 560 and the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 made of metal in the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4, in the frame earth substrate 559, the earth terminal ECN3 as a ball tank earth and the main body frame metal The earth terminal ECN4 as the earth and the ER1 and ER2 resistances ER1 and ER2 respectively allow the electromagnetic noise to gradually flow and be attenuated to suppress the instantaneous discharge of the high voltage. It is possible to lead to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through the ground wire.In other words, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity is likely to be accumulated is used as a frame ground called a frame ground from the frame ground substrate 559 through the ball tank 552 and the metal main frame reinforcing frame 530. By leading to the ground of the island facility of the game hall, the electromagnetic noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be flowed to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed.

  On the other hand, when electromagnetic noise enters the shield plate 1540 made of metal housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 shown in FIG. 148, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are protected. It enters the ground (GND) line and flows into the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630, and from the ground connection terminal of the power supply board 630 to the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground in the frame ground board 559 through the power supply ground wire. The flow is led from the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment earth to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall through the island equipment earth wire and is removed. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base. The electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the body 1502 is guided to the earth of the island facility in the game hall from the frame earth board 559 through the metal shield plate 1540 as the circuit earth called the circuit ground, thereby covering the peripheral control unit 1500. It is possible to remove the electromagnetic noise that has entered from the 1501 and the base body 1502 by flowing it to the ground of the island facility in the game hall.

  In the present embodiment, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground are, as described above, strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. Since it corresponds to (surroundings), a large ground terminal is adopted, and the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground, as described above, absorbs the electromagnetic noise flowing into the frame ground substrate 559 in the game hall. A large ground terminal is used because it removes it by guiding it to the ground of the island facility. The ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 adopting this large-sized ground terminal are squares having a sectional shape of 1.14 mm on a side, and rated current: 7 A (when AC / DC, AWG # 18 is used), rated voltage: It has general specifications of 250V (AC / DC) and applicable electric wire range: AWG # 22 to # 18, and as shown in FIG. 154 (a), its height is 13.4 mm (earth terminal ECN2-). When the housing corresponding to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm).

  On the other hand, the electromagnetic noise flowing into the earth terminal ECN1 as the interface earth and the earth terminal ECN5 as the power earth is smaller than the above-mentioned earth terminals ECN2 to ECN4, and the current is small. As the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5, small ground terminals are adopted. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 that employ this small-sized ground terminal have a square cross section with a side of 0.64 mm, and a rated current: 3 A (when using AC / DC and AWG # 22) and a rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250V (AC / DC) and applicable wire range: AWG # 30 to # 22, and as shown in FIG. 154 (a), its height is 7 mm (for ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5). When the corresponding housing is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm).

  In the present embodiment, each ground wire (island equipment ground wire, ball tank ground wire, body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Compared with each ground wire (interface ground wire, power ground wire), the current due to electromagnetic noise is large, so each ground wire (island equipment ground wire, ball tank) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4. The thickness of the ground wire (main body frame ground wire) is thicker than the thickness of each ground wire (interface ground wire, power ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1, ECN5. In this embodiment, the frame earth substrate 559 has a thickness of 1.6 mm as shown in FIG. 154 (a).

  In this way, the electromagnetic noises generated at various places are once collected on the frame ground substrate 559 and can be guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hole from the frame ground substrate 559 to be removed. The substrate 559 has a function of exhibiting a charge eliminating effect.

  Further, since the electromagnetic noises generated at various places are once collected on the frame ground substrate 559 and guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall from the frame ground substrate 559, the noise can be removed. The ground wire (wiring) from the ball tank 552 arranged on the upper side is routed to the power supply board 630 arranged on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1, and the electromagnetic wave noise is once aggregated on the power supply board 630 so that the island facility of the game hall can be installed. The routing of the ground wire (wiring) is extremely simple as compared with the configuration in which it is guided to the ground and removed.

  Further, since the external terminal board 558 and the frame ground board 559 can be arranged in the board accommodating portion 551aa of the dispensing base 551 in a state of being close to each other, a plurality of electric wire connections provided on the external terminal board 558 can be connected. Terminal 558a (plurality of external terminals (in the present embodiment, the payout base unit 550 is provided with ten external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 arranged in a line from left to right when viewed from the rear)) ), And a hall computer provided in the game hall, and the work of electrically connecting them by wiring, and an earth terminal ECN2 as island facility earth in the frame ground board 559, and a ground connection terminal provided in the island facility of the game hall. , Can be electrically connected with the island equipment ground wire (wiring), and can be performed as a series of operations Because, it is possible to contribute to improvement in workability.

  Further, since the frame earth substrate 559 can be arranged in the substrate housing portion 551aa of the dispensing base 551, the earth terminal ECN2 as the island facility earth of the frame earth substrate 559 and the island facility of the game hall are provided. Various control boards (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game, which is provided with the island board earth line (wiring) that electrically connects the provided ground connection terminal and the island equipment ground wire (wiring) to the game board 5. The peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of the peripheral control board, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like) can be arranged so as to be separated from each other. It is possible to eliminate adverse effects on the electronic parts (including the connector) and the like provided in the.

  Further, by disposing the frame earth substrate 559 near the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the main body frame 4 near the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 which is strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In contrast to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500, the frame ground substrate 559 is provided with an earth terminal ECN3 as a ball tank earth and an earth terminal ECN4 as a main body frame metal earth, respectively. The length of electrically connected ground wire (ball tank ground wire, main body frame metal ground wire) is made extremely short, and electromagnetic noise is guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island facility in the game hall and removed. You can

  Further, by arranging the frame earth substrate 559 near the ball tank 552 where static electricity is likely to accumulate and the payout unit 560, the ball tank 552 where static electricity is likely to be accumulated and the frame earth substrate 559 exhibiting static elimination are electrically connected. The length of the ball tank ground wire (wiring) is the length of the main body frame metal ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits static elimination, and the power supply. A length of a power supply ground line (wiring) that electrically connects the substrate 630 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits static elimination action, and an interface that electrically connects the interface substrate 635 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits static elimination action. It can be configured to have the shortest length as compared with the length of the ground wire (wiring).

  Further, by disposing the frame earth substrate 559 near the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the main body frame 4 near the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 which is strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In contrast to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500, the frame ground substrate 559 includes the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main frame metal ground. Although a large current flows, the resistance is reduced by the resistors ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground substrate 559, so that the operation of the power supply substrate 630 is not affected, and the frame ground substrate 559 is connected to the island terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground to the island facility. It can be removed by guiding it to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through the ground wire. Can.

  By the way, as disclosed in the related art, to facilitate the supply of the power supply AC24V of the CR unit, the respective grounds are once aggregated on the power supply board arranged on the CR unit side under the main body frame, and the power supply board is used. There has been proposed a game machine that is connected to the ground of the island facility and grounded (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-120593 (paragraph [0335], FIG. 84, FIG. 85)). Since the power supply board is generally heavy, it is often arranged in the lower part of the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to collect the ground on the power supply board, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank or the prize ball device on the upper part of the game machine toward the power supply board below. By routing the ground wire in this manner, electromagnetic noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing on the way and may have an unexpected effect. Also, because the ground wire is integrated in the power board, if any problem occurs in the power board, it may affect the ground, or conversely, current may flow in the ground wire, which may affect the operation of the power board. there were. In addition, when the place for grounding the island equipment is located above the game machine, it may be complicated because it is necessary to draw and connect the ground wire aggregated by the power supply board again from below to above.

[9. Power board]
Next, the power supply board 630 included in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 155 is a circuit diagram illustrating the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board, FIG. 156 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply board, FIG. 157 is a view on arrow B of FIG. 156, and FIG. 158 is a power supply board. FIG. 159 is silk printing of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board (No. 2), and FIG. 160 is discontinued electronic components. It is a perspective view explaining the outline | summary. Here, first, the circuit configuration of the power supply board will be described, and subsequently, a method of identifying electronic components having the same shape, confirmation of blown fuses, capacitance of capacitors, and countermeasures for discontinued electronic components will be described.

  As described above, the island facility of the game hall has a transformer (not shown) that steps down the AC100V commercial power supply voltage to the AC24V game machine power supply voltage. When a plug of a power cord (not shown) is inserted into a power outlet of AC24V, which is the power source voltage for gaming machines in the island facility in the game hall, AC24V is supplied to the power supply board 630. The power supply board 630 creates various power supplies (direct current + 35V, direct current + 12V, direct current + 5V, and other direct current voltages) from the 24V AC supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and supplies them from the power supply board 630 to each internal board of the pachinko machine 1. is doing.

[9-1. Circuit configuration of power board]
As shown in FIG. 155, the circuit of the power supply board 630 includes a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, a power supply destruction circuit 630g, and a backup power supply. The circuit 630h is mainly configured.

  24V AC from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). AC24V from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power line (not shown), and fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in the present embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm). (The supporting terminals at both ends are made of metal) and the type B fusing specified in the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law) is input to the input side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a. Specifically, a line 1 of AC24V (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V1" (may be referred to as "L side").) Is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a, and the power switch. A line 2 of AC24V (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V2" (may be referred to as "N side").) Is input to the input side terminal 1 of 630a. The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b.

  When a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall turns on the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically connected to each other, and the AC 24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630 through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. When the supply is started, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 are electrically connected to each other, and the AC 24V2 is started to be supplied to various circuits of the power supply board 630 through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on by the ON operation of the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall turns off the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 become electrically non-conductive, and the AC24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630. The supply is cut off, and the input-side terminal 1 and the output-side terminal 2 are electrically disconnected from each other, and the supply of the AC 24V2 to the various circuits of the power supply board 630 is cut off. As a result, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be cut off by turning off the power switch 630a.

  In addition, while the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall remains ON, staff such as a game hall store clerk turn on the breaker in the game hall to operate the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. The power may be turned on all at once, or the pachinko machines installed in the game hall may be turned off all at once by turning off the breaker in the game hall.

[9-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasures, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, which is a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasures, and a choke coil L1, and outputs the power switch 630a. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

  The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC is composed of capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. The capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacitance and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistor ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers) and have the same varistor voltage. Varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that could not be reduced by capacitors C1 and C2.

  One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is connected to the AC 24V2 via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is connected via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC 24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the ground connection terminal DCN5 as the frame ground FG2. The earth connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the earth terminal ECN5 of the frame earth board 559 shown in FIG. 154 via a power earth wire (not shown).

  The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC is composed of a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 removes normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that could not be removed by the capacitor C3.

  One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V2 via the power switch 630a. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V2 via the power switch 630a.

  The AC24V1 output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input to the power source line connector DCN2 as AC24VA. The AC 24V2 output from the output side terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC 24V. . The choke coil L1 is a component against common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise interference. The power supply line connector DCN2 is provided outside the pachinko machine 1 via the interface board power supply line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 114, and the CR unit power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit not supplied and supplies AC24VA and AC24V to a CR unit not shown.

  The AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[9-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter, referred to as “FET”) Q1 and Q2, and a peripheral circuit 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q1 and Q2, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and a Zener diode.

  The AC24V1 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and also to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca, It is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q2 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and also to the gate terminal of the FET Q2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca, It is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q1 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are input to the CAI terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f, respectively.

  The AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are rectified into direct current by the switching by the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D2. 2 and are output respectively. The types of packages of the FET Q1, FET Q2, the Schottky barrier diode D1, and the Schottky barrier diode D2 are so-called TO-220F, which are the same type and are fixed to the heat radiation fin HS1 (see FIG. 156). ing. The heat dissipation fin HS1 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

  As described above, the AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c and the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. From the respective terminals and input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

  The rectified direct currents respectively output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 are input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[9-1-3. Power factor correction circuit]
The power factor correction circuit 630d includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter, referred to as “FET”) Q3 and Q4, and a peripheral circuit 630da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q3 and Q4, and mainly includes a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and an inductor.

  The direct current with the common mode noise reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminals 1 and 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are directly passed through without passing through the peripheral circuit 630da. Are input respectively. A gate signal for the power factor correction circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit is input to the gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminals and the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

  The direct current with the common mode noise reduced by the choke coil L2 suppresses the generation of harmonics by the switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da to improve the power factor, and the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10. Are output respectively. The types of packages of the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 are the same as the types of packages of the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 (TO-220F described above), and heat radiation is performed. It is fixed to the fin HS2 (see FIG. 156). The heat radiation fin HS2 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

  The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[9-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e is composed of a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The negative terminals of the plurality of electrolytic capacitors are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, and the positive terminals of the electrolytic capacitors receive the direct currents having the power factor improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d. The smoothing circuit 630e gently (smooths) the pulsating flow from the direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f, and at the same time fuses FUSE3 (this embodiment). In the form, it has the same shape as the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, through a transparent glass tube (diameter: 5 mm, length: 20 mm (supporting terminals at both ends are made of metal), and blown by class B as defined by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). Then, the power is supplied from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 as DC + 35V. The power supply line supplied via the fuse FUSE3 becomes the + 35V power supply line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[9-1-5. Power supply circuit]
When the DC from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power supply creation circuit 630f creates DC + 12V and DC + 5V from the input DC. The power supply creation circuit 630f outputs the created DC + 12V from the + 12V terminal and supplies it to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 from the power supply board 630, and outputs the created DC + 5V from the + 5V terminal to the pachinko machine 630. Supply to each substrate inside 1. The power line supplied from the + 12V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f becomes the + 12V power line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and the power line supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is + 5V of each board inside the pachinko machine 1. It becomes a power line.

  The power supply generation circuit 630f controls switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 in the power factor correction circuit 630d and the peripheral circuit 630da by performing control to output a power factor correction gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor correction circuit 630d. Suppress the generation of harmonics.

  In the power supply generation circuit 630f, AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the AC-DET terminal via the diodes D5 and D6. The power supply generation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal and determines whether to output the power supply destruction circuit gate signal from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power supply destruction circuit 630g.

  The plug of the power cord (not shown) is not inserted into the AC24V power outlet for the game machine power supply of the island facility in the game hall, and is accidentally inserted into the AC100V power outlet that is higher than the game machine power supply voltage of AC24V. When plugged in, a power supply voltage higher than + 35V DC is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f.

  The power supply generation circuit 630f uses the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal to reduce the common mode noise, and the power supply voltage has a predetermined value (threshold value: this embodiment). Then, the voltage is set to about 50 V.), the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit can be output to the power supply destruction circuit 630g.

  When the power supply generation circuit 630f outputs the power supply destruction circuit gate signal to the power supply destruction circuit 630g, the power supply destruction circuit 630g self-destroys and enters the short mode. When the power supply destruction circuit 630g is in the short mode and the power switch 630a is in the ON operation state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g, By flowing into the CGND terminal of the creation circuit 630f all at once, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown.

  The GND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. The ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 to which the GND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is grounded becomes the ground (GND) line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[9-1-6. Power supply destruction circuit]
The power supply breakdown circuit 630g includes an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as "FET") Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the other end on the opposite side of the resistor R25 whose one end is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. In addition to the other end of the resistor R25, the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the.

  The power supply destruction circuit 630g receives the power supply destruction circuit gate signal from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, and the FET Q5 operates to change the drain terminal of the FET Q5 to the source terminal. When a large current flows toward the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become an overcurrent), the FET Q5 is destroyed, so that a short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are electrically connected is maintained. To be done. The FET Q5 is the same as the package type of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 (TO-220F described above), but the FET Q1 is the same. , Q2, Q3, Q4, and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, they are arranged at positions that are not in contact with the heat radiation fins HS1, HS2. Specifically, the FET Q5 is arranged between the radiation fins HS1 and HS2, and is not fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 at all (see FIGS. 156 and 157). The purpose of this is to absorb and cool the heat of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 via the radiation fins HS1, HS2 so as not to be destroyed by the heat generation. On the other hand, the FET Q5 is short due to heat generation when the FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become an overcurrent). This is because it contributes to be destroyed in time.

  That is, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC24V power outlet for the gaming machine power supply of the island facility in the game hall, but is accidentally inserted into the AC100V power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V power supply voltage for the gaming machine. When plugged in, the power supply generation circuit 630f determines the magnitude of this power supply voltage to be a predetermined value (threshold value) based on the power supply voltage whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal. : In this embodiment, the voltage is set to about 50 V.), the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit is output to the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and the FET Q5 is controlled so as to self-destruct. As a result, the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conducted is maintained, and the source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. When it is in the ON operation state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FET Q5 in the short-circuit state in the power source destruction circuit 630g, and the power source generation circuit 630f outputs the current. By flowing into the CGND terminal all at once, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown, and only the power supply board 630 is destroyed and the plug of the power supply cord is commercialized. Power supply voltage A Even inserted incorrectly into a power outlet of 100 V, so that the can be reliably prevented that the pachinko machine 1 within each substrate except the power substrate 630 is broken.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC24V power outlet for the gaming machine power supply of the island facility in the game hall, and is accidentally inserted into the AC100V power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V power supply voltage for the gaming machine. In a state where the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is broken by being inserted, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are replaced with ones which are not blown, and the plug of the power cord is AC24V which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall. Even if it is plugged into the power outlet of the power source, since the FET Q5 of the power destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectification circuit 630c. , And the power destruction circuit 630g A large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f through the FET Q5 in the short mode, which causes a large current to flow through the replaced fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 or Both will melt again. That is, unless the power supply board 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has not been destroyed, the plug of the power supply cord should be used in the island facility of the game hall. Even if it is plugged into a power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines, the game cannot be started.

[9-1-7. Backup power supply circuit]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes a Schottky barrier diode D20 and a capacitor BC0. The Schottky barrier diode D20 has a low forward voltage drop and a high switching speed. The anode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f, and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is the capacitor BC0. It is electrically connected to the plus (+) terminal. The minus (-) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to the ground (GND). A main power supply line from the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and the positive (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0 to the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a included in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 153. A circuit in which a wiring pattern for extracting VBB and a payout VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the payout control internal RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 153 is formed. There is.

  That is, the negative (-) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to the ground (GND). A main VBB serving as a backup power supply line from the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 to the plus (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0 to the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310, and the payout control. The circuit is divided into two systems: a payout control MPU 633aa included in the payout control unit 633a of the board 633, and a payout VBB that is a backup power supply line to the payout control internal RAM.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs to restore power, the power line (that is, + 5V power line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is the Schottky barrier diode D20. To charge the capacitor BC0 by charging the capacitor BC0, and also to store various information stored in the main control internal RAM by supplying it to the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Then, the payout VBB is supplied to the payout control internal RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, and various information stored in the payout control internal RAM is held.

  On the other hand, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the power of all the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is cut off by turning off the breaker in the game hall). In this case, DC + 5V due to the power supply line (that is, + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f is not supplied to the capacitor BC0. In response to this, the capacitor BC0 starts discharging. This discharge is prevented from being supplied to the power supply line (that is, + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f by the Schottky barrier diode D20, whereas the main control board 1310 is provided as the main VBB. The main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with various information stored in the main control internal RAM, and is supplied to the payout control internal RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 as a payout VBB. Then, various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is held.

  In other words, the pachinko machines 1 are shut down (including the case where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are shut off all at once by turning off the breaker in the game hall). In this case, even if DC + 5V due to the power supply line (that is, + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is no longer supplied to the capacitor BC0, the capacitor BC0 is discharged to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the provided main control MPU 1310a is held, and stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 as a payout VBB. Various information to be stored is held.

[9-2. Identification method of electronic parts having the same shape]
Next, a method of identifying electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630 and having the same shape will be described. As the electronic components having the same shape and mounted on the power supply board 630, as described above, the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky of the power factor correction circuit 630d are included. The barrier diodes D9 and D10 and the FET Q5 of the power supply breakdown circuit 630g have the same package type (TO-220F), and the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 have the same shape (diameter: 5 mm, long Size: 20 mm transparent glass tube (supporting terminals at both ends are made of metal).

  Although the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic components of completely different types, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2. D9 and D10 are electronic components that are not destroyed, and the FET Q5 is the only electronic component that is destroyed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, which are the electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630 and having the same shape, the only electron which is destroyed. In order to make it easy to identify the parts, the silk screen printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 has a characteristic different from the others.

  Specifically, for the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, which are electronic components that are not destroyed, as shown in FIG. The line and the thick white line indicating the direction in which the electronic parts are arranged are silk-printed on the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10. Silk-printed TSLK1 to 4 and FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4. TSLKs 5 to 8 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. The thick white line is the side fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. Note that in FIG. 156, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 need to be arranged adjacent to each other in order to fix them to the radiation fins HS1, HS2. It is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 so that the silk-printed white outline on which the HS2 is arranged is connected to the white thick line portions of the silk-printed TSLK1 to TSLK8.

  On the other hand, for the FET Q5, which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, as shown in FIG. 158 (b), a white outline and a plurality of white diagonal lines arranged at equal intervals within the outline. Silk printing TSLK9 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630, as ad1 and a thick white line indicating the direction in which the electronic component is arranged, as silk printing. That is, the white diagonal line ad1 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  Thus, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic components having the same shape, silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 is possible. By visually observing the white slanted line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern among the TSLKs 1 to 9, among electronic components of different types having the same shape, which electronic component is focused on compared with other electronic components. It is possible to identify whether it is an electronic component that should be used. Accordingly, it is possible to very easily specify which of the different electronic components having the same shape is the electronic component to be destroyed.

  Further, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as a clerk in the game hall to call the FET Q5 by telephone, the silk-printed TSLK9 having the white diagonal line ad1 shown as a characteristic pattern. By instructing to search for, the staff such as the clerk in the gaming hall can accurately grasp the position of the FET Q5, so that the person in charge of the service center and the staff such as the clerk in the gaming hall can easily communicate with each other. Become.

  As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as a clerk in the game hall on the FET Q5 by telephone, the person in charge of the clerk in the game hall, etc. is instructed by the person in charge of the service center. In addition, it is possible to specify the FET Q5 of interest from among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630. Therefore, the FET Q5 to be noted among the plurality of electronic components can be identified from the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, which are other electronic components, and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

  The FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different electronic parts as described above, while the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are the same. Although it is a kind of electronic parts, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC24V power outlet for the game machine power supply of the island facility in the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage AC100V is higher than the game machine power supply voltage AC24V. If it is mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of the fuse, as described above, the FET Q5 of the power destruction circuit 630g is self-destructed and the short mode is maintained, and a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, so that one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. Will melt down. In other words, as a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power voltage, one or both of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE2 and FUSE1, FUSE2 are destroyed and become an electronic component. There is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, printing is performed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 so that the destroyed electronic component among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 that are mounted on the power supply substrate 630 and have the same shape can be easily identified. The silk printing that has different characteristics from other ones is adopted.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), white is provided for the fuse FUSE3 which is an electronic component that is not destroyed even if the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power voltage. As the outline of the above, the silk printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630.

  On the other hand, FIG. 159 (b) shows the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are electronic components that are broken as traces when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power voltage. As described above, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted in white are silk-printed, and silk-printed FSLK2 and 3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. That is, the white solid area ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. Both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are solid-painted in white on the inner area of the white outline and the area around the support fittings, although support fittings (not shown) are soldered to the power supply board 630. The area ad2 is visible, and the area ad2, which is the area inside the white outline and which corresponds to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and the corresponding white solid area, is transparent. It can be reliably viewed through a transparent glass tube.

  As described above, even if the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 have the same shape, white that is represented as a characteristic pattern among the silk-printed FSLK1 to 3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. By visually observing the area ad2 that is solidly painted, it is possible to identify which of the electronic components of the same type having the same shape is an electronic component that should be watched in comparison with other electronic components. It has become. This makes it extremely easy to determine which of the electronic components of the same type having the same shape is a trace in which the plug of the power cord is erroneously inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power supply voltage. Can be specified.

  In addition, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 calls the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 by telephone to a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall, a solid white area represented as a characteristic pattern By instructing to search for silk-printed FSLK2,3 having ad2, the staff such as the clerk in the gaming hall can accurately grasp the positions of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and thus the person in charge of the service center and the gaming hall It becomes easier to communicate with staff such as store staff.

  As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 by telephone to the person in charge of the game hall, such as the person in charge of the game hall, In accordance with the instruction of, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which should be noted, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630 can be specified. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the notable fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be distinguished from the other electronic component, the fuse FUSE3.

[9-3. Fuse blowout confirmation]
Next, a description will be given of the blowout confirmation of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 of the same type having the same shape and mounted on the power supply board 630. As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (supporting terminals at both ends are made of metal). When the fuses are blown, the fuse wires housed in the transparent glass tubes are broken and are transparent glass tubes. Soot adheres to the inside of the. Of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components that can show a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V that is the commercial power source voltage, as described above. If the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power source voltage, it will melt down. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-described silk printing FSLK2, 3 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing for the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 so as to easily confirm the state of the blown fuse wire. As described above, the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 correspond to the transparent glass tubes excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 because the white solid areas ad2 are represented as characteristic patterns. By visually observing the white solid area ad2 through the transparent glass tube, it is possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of the disconnection of the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2.

  As a result, a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall or a worker who installs the pachinko machine 1 (replaces the game board 5) plugs the power cord that supplies the power supply voltage to the pachinko machine 1 with the AC24V power supply voltage for the game machine. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by mistakenly inserting it into a power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, and turning on the power switch 630a of the power supply board 630, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are traces. Of these, one or both of the transparent glass tubes has a broken fuse wire and soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tube. Even if you insert the plug into a power outlet, it may not be the initial failure because the power cannot be turned on. " Wiring errors), it is so that it can not (can not excuse) to cheat.

  On the other hand, as the silk printing on the fuse FUSE3, as described above, the silk printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. In this embodiment, green is used as the resist of the power supply substrate 630. Further, in the present embodiment, the area of the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the silk printing FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3 is solidly coated with a green resist. No wiring pattern is laid out in the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 (that is, the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the area (1), no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is because the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 is visually observed through the transparent glass tube. It is possible to improve the visibility of the state and check whether or not the fuse wire is broken.

  As described above, the power supply line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630 is connected to the interface board power supply line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 114, and the CR unit power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1, and supplies AC 24 VA and AC 24 V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, the interface board 635 has not only the function of relaying various signals but also the function of supplying power to a CR unit (not shown). The interface board 635 has a fuse FUSE (not shown) (in the present embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (supporting terminals at both ends are made of metal), Class B fusing defined by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). It is provided, and the silk screen shown in FIG. 159 (a) is printed on the mounting surface of the fuse FUSE3 of the power supply board 630 described above. A green resist is solidly coated on the area of the mounting surface of the interface board 635 corresponding to the silk printing on the fuse FUSE (not shown). No wiring pattern is laid out in the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) (that is, the solid glass corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) is filled. Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the green resist area, no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE by visually observing, through the transparent glass tube, the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown). The visibility of the state of the fuse wire is improved, and it is possible to confirm whether or not the fuse wire is broken. The fuse FUSE (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 may be provided on one of AC24VA and AC24V supplied from the power supply line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630, or may be provided on both of them. You can also

[9-4. Capacitance of capacitor]
Next, the capacitance of the capacitor BC0 will be described. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is a power supply line (that is, + 5V power supply) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power failure or momentary power failure occurs to restore power. DC + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 via the Schottky barrier diode D20 by the line) so that it can be charged, while the pachinko machine 1 is shut off (breaker in the game hall). By turning off the power, it also includes the case where the power to all the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is shut off all at once.) When a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the power supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. Discharge according to the fact that DC + 5V due to the line (that is, + 5V power supply line) is no longer supplied to the capacitor BC0. To start.

  Due to the discharge of the capacitor BC0, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is simultaneously cut off by turning off the breaker in the game hall). In the state where the instantaneous power failure occurs, the backup power supply as the main VBB is supplied to the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a included in the main control board 1310 so that various information stored in the main control internal RAM is retained. In addition, the backup power is supplied as the payout VBB to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, so that various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is held. It is like this.

  When the operation of the game hall is completed, a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall turns off the breaker of the game hall to simultaneously shut off the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall. Then, at the time of starting the next business (normally, the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall remains in the ON state), the staff such as the clerk of the game hall breaks the game hall. By turning on, all the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned on at the same time. At this time, if the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is small, the main control board 1310 is equipped with the main control board 1310 by completing the discharge of the capacitor BC0 during the period from the end of the game hall business to the start of the next business. Various information in the main control built-in RAM of the control MPU 1310a and the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 cannot be held. As a result, at the start of business, a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall turns on the breakers in the game hall to simultaneously turn on the pachinko machines installed in the game hall. Regardless of whether it is operated or not, the main control MPU provided on the main control board judges the checksum (sum value) error of the main control internal RAM during the power-on process and completely erases the contents of the main control internal RAM ( Since all the pachinko machines will simultaneously execute the RAM clear notification for notifying that it has been cleared), the RAM clear notification sound that flows from the speakers of all the pachinko machines will ring in the game hall. In this case, in all of the pachinko machines, the payout control MPU provided in the payout control board judges the checksum (sum value) error of the payout control internal RAM in the process at power-on and completes the contents of the payout control internal RAM. Erase (clear).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the capacitance of the capacitor BC0 is selected so that the RAM clear notification is not executed even when the game hall business ends and the next business starts. Specifically, as the capacity of the capacitor BC0, to the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 as the main VBB for about 3 days (about 72 hours) after the game hall is closed. Various information that is supplied and stored in the main control built-in RAM can be held, and is also supplied as a payout VBB to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 and the payout control built-in. A memory having a capacity capable of holding various information stored in the RAM is selected. This capacity is selected such that the power consumption of the main VBB supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a included in the main control board 1310 is the payout control internal RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa included in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. It is also added that the power consumption of the paying VBB supplied to the device may be about 10 times larger. The power consumption of the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a included in the main control board 1310 is the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633aa included in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Compared with the power consumption of.

[9-5. Discontinued electronic parts measures]
Next, countermeasures against discontinued electronic components will be described. First, due to various circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, for a board that is treated as a main board such as a power supply board, a main control board, and a payout control board, a lead type electronic component is mounted on the mounting surface, which is the front surface side, and the back surface is mounted. It is necessary to solder on the soldering surface which is the side. However, lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of gaming machines such as pachinko machines, slots, and fusion game machines, but other general electric equipment manufacturers use surface-mounting type ( The so-called SMD type is used. For this reason, the production of lead-type electronic components may be reduced, resulting in discontinuation of production. If a lead-type electronic component obtained from one electronic component manufacturer is discontinued and a replacement is searched for, it is highly probable that other electronic component manufacturers will also be discontinued. The lead-type electronic component will be used with a limited time, and it will be difficult to mount the lead-type electronic component on the board that is treated as the main board.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lead-type electronic component that can configure the SMD type electronic component as the lead type electronic component can be mounted on the mounting surface of the substrate that is treated as the main substrate. . Here, the Schottky barrier diode D20 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 160A, the Schottky barrier diode D20 is located on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a at positions corresponding to the anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cb which are terminals of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b. Land patterns D20da, D20db for SMD are formed, and land patterns D20fa, D20fb for lead are formed at positions where one ends of the leads D20ea, D20eb corresponding to the land patterns D20da, D20db for SMD are arranged, and the land pattern D20da for SMD is formed. , D20db and lead land patterns D20fa, D20fb are electrically connected to each other to form wiring patterns D20ga, D20gb.

  The SMD land patterns D20da and D20db formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a are arranged and soldered so as to correspond to the anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cb which are terminals of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b. , The anode side D20ca, the cathode side D20cb and the SMD land patterns D20da, D20db are soldered, and one ends of the leads D20ea, D20eb are soldered to the lead land patterns D20fa, D20fb, respectively. Then, the front surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface of the substrate D20a are wrapped by epoxy resin and molded to form an electronic component body D20h that covers one end of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b and the leads D20ea and D20eb. The Schottky barrier diode D20 can be configured as a lead-type electronic component in which two leads D20ea and D20eb project from the electronic component body D20h. As shown in FIG. 160 (b), a symbol D20ha indicating the forward direction of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is printed on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component body D20h. Further, on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component body D20h, although not shown, the manufacturer name and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) of the Schottky barrier diode D20 are also printed.

  As described above, since the SMD type electronic component can be configured as a lead type electronic component, even if it is difficult to obtain the lead type electronic component due to a decrease in the number of production, This can be handled by using SMD type electronic components used by the electric machine manufacturer.

  In addition, although the Schottky barrier diode D20 has been described in the above-described embodiment, it is also applicable to an SMD type capacitor, an SMD type resistor, an SMD type coil, and the like. Alternatively, a plurality of the same SMD type electronic components may be arranged in a line in an array to form a lead type electronic component.

  Next, measures are taken against the commercial power supply voltage when the plug of the power supply cord for supplying the AC power from the island facility in the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is mistakenly plugged into the power outlet of the commercial power supply voltage (AC100V). Another configuration of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as "configuration of commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment") will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 shows the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment. Note that, in FIG. 161, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 155 (hereinafter, referred to as “composition of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment”) are denoted by the same reference numerals. expressed.

[Comparison between the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, as described above, the power supply destruction circuit 630g includes the FET Q5, the resistors R25 and R24, and the capacitor C22, and the power supply destruction circuit 630f breaks the power supply from the FUSE-GATE terminal. When the circuit gate signal is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal of the FET Q5 toward the source terminal (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are excessive. The FET Q5 is destroyed by becoming a current), so that a short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are electrically connected is maintained.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b is, as described above, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, which is the circuit for common mode noise countermeasure, and the circuit for normal mode noise countermeasure. The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1. There is.

  Moreover, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, the AC 24V1 and the AC 24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c as described above, and the diode D5 is also added. It is input to the anode terminal of D6, is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the AC 24V from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via the power cord (not shown) as described above, and the fuse FUSE1 is supplied. , FUSE2 to input side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a. As for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, as described above, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted in white are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLK2 and 3 are mounted on the power supply board 630. It is printed on the surface. That is, the white solid area ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are soldered to the power supply board 630, respectively, as described above, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are colored in white in the area inside the white outline and the area around the support metal fittings. A solid area ad2 is visible, and is an area inside the white outline and is a solid area corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. The ad2 can be reliably viewed through a transparent glass tube.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161, 24V AC from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). Then, the L side (AC24V1) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a via the fuse FUSE1, and the N side (AC24V2) is directly input to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. To be done. For the fuse FUSE1, as described above, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted in white are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLK2 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. ing. That is, the white solid area ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuse FUSE1 are soldered to the power supply board 630, respectively, as described above, the support metal fittings not shown in the figure are solidly painted in white on the area inside the white outline and the area around the support metal fittings. The area ad2 shown in FIG. 3 is visible, and the area ad2, which is the area inside the white outline and which corresponds to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuse FUSE1 and the corresponding white solid area, is transparent. It is possible to be surely seen through the glass tube.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, AC24V from the island facility in the game hall omits the fuse FUSE2 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. To briefly explain this, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the AC24V from the island facility in the game hall has fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 for both power cords (L side (AC24V1), N side ( This is because the input was made to AC24V2)), but the test conducted by the applicant did not cause any problem even if one of them (N side (AC24V2)) was omitted. Accordingly, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161, one of the AC 24V (N side (AC24V2)) from the island facility of the game hall is connected to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. Cost reduction is realized by directly inputting to.

  Further, the configuration of the countermeasure against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment employs the same power supply switch 630a as the configuration of the countermeasure against commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment. This will be briefly described because, for the power switch 630a, it is necessary to surely disconnect / connect both the L side and the N side of AC24V from the island facility of the game hall. As a result, the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment is the same as the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, which is 24V AC from the island facility in the game hall. Both L-side and N-side can be disconnected / contacted at the same time.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161, the N side (AC24V2) of AC24V from the island facility of the game hall and the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a are connected. It is electrically connected to one of the micro-gap type arrester AL1. The other of the micro gap type arrester AL1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. Micro-gap type arrester AL1 surges to the frame ground FG2 of the earth connection terminal DCN5 when a high voltage (called "surge voltage") enters AC24V from the island facility in the game hall due to a lightning strike. The surge voltage is restricted by flowing as a current so that the surge voltage is not applied to the power switch 630a, or a high voltage (surge voltage) temporarily generated by turning on / off the power switch 630a is supplied to the ground connection terminal DCN5. By supplying a surge current to the frame ground FG2, the surge voltage is limited so that the power switch 630a does not receive the surge voltage. In addition, the micro-gap type arrester AL1 has an error when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, and an operator makes an error and the earth terminal ECN2 (island equipment earth) of the frame earth board 559 shown in FIG. 102 (b). And, when forgetting to electrically connect the earth connection terminal in the island facility of the game hall with the island facility ground wire, as a collateral, electromagnetic noise is used as a collateral to the N side of AC24V from the island facility of the game hall (AC24V2 ), The noise resistance can be increased.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasure, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC which is a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasure, and the choke coil. In addition to L1, a power absorber circuit 630g 'is composed of a surge absorber SA1. Output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a have a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and a power source breakdown circuit. 630g 'and is input to the choke coil L1. The surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g ′ has a higher reaction speed than the varistor ZNR1 and ZNR2 of the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the varistor ZNR3 of the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC (for example, as the surge absorber SA1). A silicon surge absorber can be mentioned.), One end of which is electrically connected to the L side of AC 24V (AC24V1) via the power switch 630a, and the other end of which is the N side of AC 24V via the power switch 630a ( It is electrically connected to AC24V2), and when a circuit voltage exceeding the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) is input, a large current flows and is destroyed, causing a short circuit and a short mode.

  A varistor may be used as the surge absorber SA1, but a silicon surge absorber (also called a semiconductor varistor, VRD, etc.) is used here. The silicon surge absorber is capable of absorbing a surge voltage having a sharp rising edge as compared with a normal varistor, and utilizes the avalanche (electron avalanche) effect of a silicon pn junction. This silicon surge absorber has the features of extremely fast response to surges, excellent control voltage characteristics, and extremely small leakage current. Since the surge absorber SA1 is an AC circuit, a bidirectional type is used, and a rated voltage (breakdown voltage) of 47 V, which is about twice the input voltage, may be selected.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are electrically connected to the second (COM) terminal of the relay RL1. , And is electrically connected to one end of the thermistor TH1. The other end of the thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to the third (NO) terminal of the relay RL1 and also to one end of the choke coil L2. The other end of the choke coil L2 is electrically connected to the power factor correction circuit 630d. The four terminals of the relay RL1 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the first terminal of the relay RL1 is electrically connected to a relay drive circuit 630i described later. As a result, both ends of the thermistor TH1 are electrically connected between the terminals (that is, the contacts) between the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1. The thermistor TH1 is of a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature rises. As its characteristics, when the vertical axis represents the allowable capacitor capacity and the horizontal axis represents the AC voltage, the value of the AC voltage increases as the value increases. Therefore, a capacitor is selected that has a curve that the value of the allowable capacitor capacity is small and that is not destroyed even when AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, is applied.

  The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, and the relay drive circuit 630i. When the direct current from the smoothing circuit 630e is input, the relay drive circuit 630 creates an operating voltage (+ 24V) capable of operating the coil of the relay RL1 and supplies it to the first terminal of the relay RL1.

  The rectified direct currents respectively output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are insufficient due to insufficient power from the relay drive circuit 630i when the power switch 630a is turned on (the relay drive circuit 630i). Since the coil of the relay RL1 is in a non-operating state (because the power supply by + 24V from the 630i is insufficient), the relay RL1 cannot be turned on (that is, the relay RL1 remains off). , Is input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the thermistor TH1 and the choke coil L2 without passing through the relay RL1 while the terminals (COM) and No. 3 of the relay RL1 are in non-conduction state. It As a result, the rectified direct currents output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c flow only toward the thermistor TH1, and when the direct current begins to flow to the thermistor TH1, the resistance value Although the temperature of the thermistor TH1 gradually rises due to the current flowing through the thermistor TH1, although the current flowing through the thermistor TH1 causes a weak current to flow in the subsequent load of the thermistor TH1, the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 decreases accordingly. Apply a strong current to the load.

  On the other hand, when the power switch 630a is turned on and the coil of the relay RL1 is switched from the non-operating state to the operating state by the power from the relay driving circuit 630i (by the + 24V power supply from the relay driving circuit 630i), the relay RL1 is activated. By turning on the relay RL1, the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are brought into conduction, and the rectified direct currents output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are generated. In addition to the thermistor TH1, the current is shunted between the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal (that is, between the contacts) of the relay RL1 and passed through the choke coil L2, and input to the power factor correction circuit 630d. To be done. As a result, the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is applied between the terminals (that is, the contact points) between the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1. ), The current to the thermistor TH1 is reduced, the temperature of the thermistor TH1 is lowered, and the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 is increased accordingly, so that the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are connected. The current flowing between the terminals of (i.e., between the contacts) will increase.

  As described above, the thermistor TH1 is of a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature rises, and the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is the thermistor TH1. When flowing to TH1, the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises and the resistance value decreases, so that the current to the subsequent load of the thermistor TH1 increases. In other words, the current flowing through the choke coil L2 is limited until the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises. If this function is used, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the AC24V power outlet for the gaming machine power supply of the island facility in the game hall, and the AC100V power supply is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V power supply voltage for the gaming machine. If it is inserted into the outlet incorrectly, the circuit voltage applied to the surge absorber SA1 greatly exceeds the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) before the thermistor TH1 rises in temperature, causing a large current to flow in the surge absorber SA1. The absorber SA1 is destroyed and the short mode can be set.

  In such a state, when the power switch 630a is turned on, a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1 through the surge absorber SA1 in the short circuit mode of the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the fuse FUSE1 is blown. It will melt down. Further, since the fuse FUSE1 is blown while the surge absorber SA1 is in the short mode, a large current does not continue to flow to the surge absorber SA1 and the elements of the surge absorber SA1 scatter to prevent the surge absorber SA1. It can prevent being destroyed in open mode. As a result, only the power supply board 630 is destroyed, and even if the plug of the power supply cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power supply voltage, each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the power supply board 630 is destroyed. This can be surely prevented.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the AC-DET terminal for monitoring the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Since the FUSE-GATE terminal for outputting the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit and the CGND terminal for supplying a large current to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 need not be provided, the circuit configuration does not become complicated.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC24V power outlet for the gaming machine power supply of the island facility in the game hall, and is accidentally inserted into the AC100V power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V power supply voltage for the gaming machine. In the state where the surge absorber SA1 which is plugged in and constitutes the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'is destroyed, the fuse FUSE1 is replaced with one which is not blown, and the plug of the power cord is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall. Even if it is plugged into a 24 V AC power outlet, the fuse that has been replaced via the surge absorber SA1 has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained because the surge absorber SA1 that constitutes the power breakdown circuit 630g 'has already been destroyed. A large current flows through FUSE1 and fuse FUSE1 is re-activated. So that the blown. That is, the power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 forming the power supply destruction circuit 630g ′ has already been destroyed must be replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 forming the power supply destruction circuit 630g ′ has not been destroyed. Even if the plug of the power cord is plugged into the AC24V power outlet, which is the power source voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall, the game cannot be started.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a power supply unit capable of creating various power sources required for a gaming machine based on an external power source supplied from outside the gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-008221). Bulletin (Fig. 2) By the way, when a person in charge of the service center of the game machine manufacturer instructs a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall by telephone to instruct a specific component of the power supply means, he / she must follow the instruction of the person in charge of the service center. In addition, there is a problem that it is difficult to identify a noteworthy part among a plurality of parts mounted on the power supply means.

  Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine including a power supply unit that creates various power supplies based on a power supply from a game island facility and supplies the power to a board (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-083337 (paragraph [0038]). )). The gaming island facility converts a commercial AC power supply (AC100V) into a gaming machine AC power supply (AC24V). However, if the power cord for supplying the power from the island facility to the gaming machine is plugged into the commercial AC power outlet instead of the gaming AC power outlet, the commercial AC power source will be Since it has a high voltage, an abnormal power source may be output from the power source means and various substrates inside the gaming machine may be destroyed.

[10. Main control board circuit, payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuits of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 153 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 163. FIG. 162 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 163 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of the payout control board, and FIG. 164 is a perspective view for explaining an outline of wiring to the board treated as the main board. It is a figure. First, the power supply and the input signal in the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be described, and the power supply and the input signal in the circuit of the payout control board 633 and the wiring to the board treated as the main board will be described.

[10-1. Power supply and input signal in the circuit of the main control board]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the main control board 1310, the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with + 5V DC from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630, and is supplied to the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The supplied backup power is supplied from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 as the main VBB.

  Direct current +5 V from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310h, as shown in FIG. The main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is applied with DC + 5V from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 at its 1st terminal, and its 2nd terminal is grounded (GND), and its 3rd DC + 5V with noise component removed is output from the terminal. The DC + 5V applied to the first terminal is first electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded (GND), so that ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is removed first. Has been smoothed.

  The direct current + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (electrostatic capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in the present embodiment), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Are connected to each other, the ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V DC is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when an instantaneous blackout occurs and the power from the game hall is shut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is generated after the instantaneous blackout occurs. It is adapted to be applied as direct current +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the direct current + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4 whose one end is grounded (GND), and also the power supply via the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h on the substrate 630. As a result, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is applied to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a via the resistor MR0.

  Among the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2511 Detection signal, a detection signal from the first special winning opening sensor 2512, a detection signal from the second special winning opening sensor 2513, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, etc. Are input to the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Detection signal from the gate sensor 2301, detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2511, detection from the first big winning opening sensor 2512 The signal, the detection signal from the second special winning opening sensor 2513, and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 are respectively input to the input terminals PA0 to PA6 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. ing. The input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminal PA7 is an empty terminal. The input terminal PA7, which is an empty terminal, is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process.

  The operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Like the input port PA, this input port PB is composed of 8 bits. Although not shown, a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to the input terminal PB1 of the input port PB, and detection signals from other sensors are input to the input port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b. The input terminals that are respectively input to the predetermined input terminals and are vacant terminals are grounded to the ground (GND) as vacant terminal processing, like the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA.

[10-2. Power supply and input signal in circuit of payout control board]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power supply of the payout control MPU 633aa is supplied with + 5V DC from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630, and is supplied to the payout control internal RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa. The supplied backup power is supplied as VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

  Direct current + 5V from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633h, as shown in FIG. The payout control filter circuit 633h mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The pay-out control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. The payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with DC + 5V from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply substrate 630 at its first terminal, its second terminal is grounded (GND), and its third terminal DC + 5V with noise component removed is output from the terminal. The direct current + 5V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND) and is grounded first, so that ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is removed first. Has been smoothed.

  The DC + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Are connected to each other, the ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V DC is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, when an instantaneous blackout occurs and the power from the game hall is shut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is generated after the instantaneous blackout occurs. It is adapted to be applied as direct current +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). The power consumption of the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a included in the main control board 1310 is the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633aa included in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. The power consumption of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 (electrostatic capacity: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the main control board 1310 is larger than that of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633. In the form, the larger one is selected as compared with the capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF). As a result, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 when the power supply from the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure. The charged charges are applied as +5 V DC for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the instantaneous blackout.

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the direct current + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4 whose one end is grounded (GND), and also through the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h on the substrate 630. As a result, the payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is applied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, via the resistor PR0.

  Of the input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633, for example, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 194, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the payout detection sensor 591. The detection signal and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are input to the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 194, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are They are respectively input to the input terminals PA0 to PA5 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. The input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminals PA6 and PA7 are empty terminals. These input terminals PA6 and PA7, which are empty terminals, are grounded to the ground (GND) as empty terminal processing.

  The power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB (not shown) through the payout control input circuit 633ab, and detection signals from other sensors. The input terminals that are respectively input to the predetermined input terminals of the input port PB via the payout control input circuit 633ab and become the empty terminals are grounded as empty terminal processing, similarly to the input terminals PA6 and PA7 of the input port PA. It is grounded to GND).

[10-3. Wiring to the board treated as the main board]
Examples of the board handled as the main board include a power supply board 630, a main control board 1310, and a payout control board 633. If a fraudulent modification is made to the wiring to the board treated as the main board, the operation of the board treated as the main board becomes uneasy, and a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the wiring to each of these boards is tampered with, there is a risk of being acquired by an actor, and it is necessary to detect the modified wiring at an early stage.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, regarding the wiring to the power supply board 630, as shown in FIG. 164 (a), a connector SHG (not shown, but the connector SHG has a manufacturer name and a product number (numbers listed in the catalog )), The name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the illegal identifiers on the covering portion of each wiring. Specifically, for example, the connector SHG is a connector having a total of 22 pins from the first pin to the 22nd pin, and the first pin has a manufacturer name: XXX as an illegal identifier SLAB in a covering portion of the wiring SCBL1. And the product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed, and the second pin has the manufacturer name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) as the illegal identifier SLAB on the covering portion of the wiring SCBL2. Is repeatedly printed. The length of the wiring to the power supply board 630 is at least the wiring coating portion so that the manufacturer name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as the illegal identifier SLAB in the wiring coating portion. Has a length in which the illegal identifier SLAB is repeatedly printed twice.

  Note that the coating portion of the wiring SCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and has a color (e.g., black) that is easily visible with respect to the color of the coating portion and is an illegal identifier SLAB as a manufacturer name: XXX and a product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portions of the wirings SCBL2 to SCBL22 connected to other pins may be of another color different from white (a single color (for example, red or gray), or a plurality of colors). Color (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.), or a color that is easily visible to the color of the coating (for example, a single color or multiple colors may be used) ), The manufacturing company name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the illegal identifier SLAB.

  As for wiring to the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 164 (b), it is connected to a connector MHG (not shown, but to the connector MHG, a manufacturer name and a product number (numbers listed in the catalog)). The wire manufacturer name and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the covering portion of each wiring as an illegal identifier. Specifically, for example, the connector MHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from the first pin to the 30th pin, and the first pin has a manufacturing company name: YYYY as an illegal identifier MLAB in a covering portion of the wiring MCBL1. And the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number published in the catalog) are repeatedly printed, and the second pin has the manufacturer name: YYYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (listed in the catalog) as an illegal identifier MLAB on the covering portion of the wiring MCBL2. Is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the main control board 1310 is at least the wiring so that the manufacturer name: YYYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number published in the catalog) can be confirmed as the illegal identifier MLAB in the covering portion of the wiring. Has a length in which the illegal identifier MLAB is repeatedly printed twice.

  Note that the coating portion of the wiring MCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and has a color (for example, black) that is easily visible with respect to the color of the coating portion, and is a fraudulent identifier MLAB. Manufacturer name: YYYYYY and product number: DEFXYZ-1 (a number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portions of the wirings MCBL2 to MCBL30 connected to other pins may be of another color different from white (a single color (for example, red or gray), Alternatively, a plurality of colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and a color that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) However, the manufacturing company name: YYYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the fraudulent identifier MLAB.

  As for the wiring to the payout control board 633, as shown in FIG. 164 (b), it is connected to a connector HHG (not shown, but to the connector HHG, a manufacturer name and a product number (a number listed in the catalog)). The wire manufacturer name and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the covering portion of each wiring as an illegal identifier. Specifically, for example, the connector HHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from the first pin to the 30th pin, and the first pin has a manufacturing company name: YYYY as an illegal identifier HLAB in a covering portion of the wiring HCBL1. And the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the second pin has the manufacturer name: YYYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (listed in the catalog) as the illegal identifier HLAB on the covering portion of the wiring HCBL2. Is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the payout control board 633 is at least the wiring so that the manufacturer name: YYYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number published in the catalog) can be confirmed as the illegal identifier HLAB in the covering portion of the wiring. The illicit identifier HLAB is repeatedly printed twice on the covering portion of the above.

  Note that the coating portion of the wiring HCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and has a color (for example, black) that is easily visible with respect to the color of the coating portion, and is an illegal identifier HLAB as a manufacturer name: YYYYYY and a product number: DEFXYZ-1 (a number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portions of the wirings HCBL2 to HCBL30 connected to other pins may be of a different color (white (for example, red or gray)) different from white, Alternatively, a plurality of colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and a color that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) However, the manufacturing company name: YYYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the illegal identifier HLAB.

  In this way, even if the wiring to the board treated as the main board is tampered with, the name of the manufacturer and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the connector and the wiring connected to the connector. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the early discovery of the modified wiring. As the wiring to the substrate treated as the main substrate, it is preferable to use wiring that is difficult to obtain even if it is listed in the catalog.

  In the present embodiment, the two wirings from the first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 provided on the gaming board 5 and the second wiring provided on the gaming board 5. The two wires from the second starting opening sensor 2511 for detecting the game ball B received in the starting opening 2004 and the two wires from the second starting opening sensor 2511 are electrically connected directly to the main control board 1310 via unillustrated connectors. On the other hand, a gate sensor 2301 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5, and a game ball B that is received by the first special winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5 are detected. One big winning opening sensor 2512, a second big winning opening sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006 provided in the game board 5, and a general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5 Two wires from various sensors such as a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting a magnetism acting near the first starting opening 2002 provided on the game board 5 have respective connectors. Is electrically connected to a main board 1310 via a connector and is integrated together in a relay board (not shown). That.

  Therefore, the two wirings from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the two wirings from the second starting opening sensor 2511 may be erroneously electrically connected to the main control board 1310. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the colors of the covering portions of the two wires from the first starting opening sensor 3002 are yellow and the other is pink, and the covering portions of the respective wires are treated as illegal identifiers. The manufacturer's name and product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed. As the color of the covering portion of the two wires from the second starting port sensor 2511, one is white and the other is black, and the covering portion of each wire has an illegal identifier as the manufacturer name and product number of the wiring (catalog). The numbers listed in) are printed repeatedly. This allows the manufacturer of the line to identify the two wires from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second starting opening sensor 2511 at the manufacturer. At the same time, in the game hall, an attendant such as a clerk of the game hall distinguishes between the two wires from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second starting opening sensor 2511. You can do it.

  Further, in this embodiment, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first starting port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310, and the second starting port is also selected. A connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the sensor 2511 to the main control board 1310. As a result, the two wirings from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the two wirings from the second starting opening sensor 2511 can be electrically connected only to those corresponding to themselves. Therefore, in the manufacturing process, the line operator has two wirings from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and two wirings from the second starting opening sensor 2511. In addition to being able to reliably prevent work mistakes such as erroneous wiring (wiring mistakes due to incorrect insertion), staff at the game hall, such as the clerk in the game hall, can perform wiring by maintenance when confirming the presence or absence of fraud. In the case of temporarily removing and returning to the original state, a mistaken wiring of two wirings from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and two wirings from the second starting opening sensor 2511. Miss (wiring that inserted mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

[11. Each decorative board for the door frame]
Next, each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 165 to 169. FIG. 165 is a block diagram for explaining electrical connection of each decorative substrate included in the door frame, FIG. 166 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative substrate including one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. 167 is an LED. FIG. 168 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative substrate provided with two constant current drive circuits, FIG. 168 is a schematic diagram of an arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuits, and FIG. 169 is a view showing an LED non-mounting surface in a D part of FIG. 168. It is the enlarged view seen. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub relay board provided in the door frame 3 will be described, and an outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, a decorative board including the LED constant current drive circuit, and an LED constant current will be described. A method of arranging the drive circuit will be described.

  First, as described above, the door frame 3 surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a so that the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate center upper decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the side. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are arranged respectively, and the plate upper left decoration body 271, the plate upper right decoration body 276, and the plate. Below the center upper decoration body 312a, a plate lower left decoration body 281, a plate lower right decoration body 286, and a plate center lower decoration body 312b are arranged, respectively.

  The plate upper left decorative body 271 is provided with a plate upper left decorative substrate 273 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending in the left and right along the plate upper left decorative body 271, and a plurality of plate upper left decorative substrates 273 are mounted on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273. Light-emitting decoration is performed by full-color LEDs (6 in this embodiment). The plate upper right decorative body 276 is provided with a plate upper right decorative substrate 278 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending laterally along the plate upper right decorative body 276, and a plurality of plate upper right decorative substrates 278 are mounted on the plate upper right decorative body 276. It is illuminated and decorated with full-color LEDs (five in this embodiment). The plate center upper decorative body 312a is provided with a plate center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate having a semi-arcuate shape along the plate center upper decorative body 312a at the rear thereof. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 314 are used for light emission decoration.

  The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate extending vertically along the door frame left side decoration body 404 at the rear of the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the left side lower decoration board 402a and the left side lower decoration board 402b. A door frame left side decoration board 402 configured by and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decoration board 402a and the left side lower decoration board 402b (in the present embodiment, the left side upper decoration board 402a). 5 and 10 on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b). The side window interior decoration portion 410b is provided in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction of the side window interior decoration member 412, and behind that, a side formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends vertically along the side window interior decoration member 412. The decoration part decoration board 413 in a window is arrange | positioned, and it light-emits by the full-color LED (12 in this embodiment) mounted in multiple in the decoration part decoration board 413 in a side window. The door frame right side ornamental body 419 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate extending vertically along the door frame right side ornamental body 419 at the rear of the door frame right side ornamental body 419. A door frame right side decoration board 418 composed of is arranged, and a plurality of full color LEDs are mounted on each of the right side upper decoration board 418a and the right side lower decoration board 418b (in this embodiment, the right side upper decoration board 418a). 4 and 10 on the lower right side decorative substrate 418b).

  The door frame top decoration body 453 has a door frame top center decoration board 455 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending laterally along the central portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 behind the door frame top decoration body 453. A door frame top left decoration substrate 456 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the left side portion of the top decoration body 453 is arranged, and extends left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decoration body 453. A plurality of door frame top right decorative substrates 457 formed in the shape of a long and narrow strip are arranged, and a plurality of them are mounted on each of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. Light emission decoration by full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 11 on the door frame top central decoration board 455, 7 on the door frame top left decoration board 456, and 6 on the door frame top right decoration board 457) It is.

  The plate lower left decorative body 281 is provided with a plate lower left decorative substrate 283 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending in the left-right direction along the plate lower left decorative body 281 and a plurality of plate lower left decorative substrates 283 are mounted. Light-emitting decoration is performed by full-color LEDs (6 in this embodiment). The plate lower right decoration body 286 is provided with a plate lower right decoration board 288 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending in the left-right direction along the plate lower right decoration body 286. A plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, six LEDs) are mounted for light emission decoration. The dish center lower decorative body 312b has a plate center lower decorative substrate 316 formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate having a semi-arcuate shape along the plate center lower decorative body 312b. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 316 are used for light emission decoration.

  The effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 provided in the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 is provided with the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 formed in a shape in which a ring is divided into front and rear, as described above. The production operation ring decoration substrate 352 includes a front decoration substrate 352a formed in a front side semi-circular elongated strip plate shape, and a rear side decoration substrate 352b formed in a rear side semi-arcuate strip shape. ,,. The rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 9) mounted on the front decoration board 352a and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the rear decoration board 352b ( In this embodiment, 9) are used for light emission decoration.

  As described above, each of the decorative substrates included in the door frame 3 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate. Thus, by increasing the distance dimension in the up-down direction and the left-right direction of the game board 5, it is possible to provide a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, etc. on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large-sized display device, or the like can be provided.

[11-1. Electrical connection between each decorative board and frame door sub-relay board]
The plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the side, which are arranged in various decorative bodies and decorative parts provided in the door frame 3. Window decoration part decoration board 413, right side upper decoration board 418a, right side lower decoration board 418b, door frame top central decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board 456, door frame top right decoration board 457, plate left bottom decoration board 283, the lower right dish decorative substrate 288, the lower dish central decorative substrate 316, the front decorative substrate 352a, the rear decorative substrate 352b, and other door frame side decorative substrates, and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. The electrical connection with the provided door frame sub relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 165.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 included in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control board 1510 illustrated in FIG. 148 via the interface board 635 included in the main body frame 4 illustrated in FIG. The light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1 which are serially output from the door frame side first serial system, and the light emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2 which are the door frame side second serial system are independently input. There is. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 155 via the interface board 635 to receive + 12V DC, and the ground of the power supply board 630 ( It is electrically connected to the GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

[11-1-1. Door frame side first serial system]
The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the dish unit relays of the dish unit 200 shown in FIG. It is input to the board 214 and the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG. 54.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the dish unit relay board 214 are the dish lower left decoration board 283, the dish lower right decoration board 288, And input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 70.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the plate lower left decoration board 283 are input to the plate upper left decoration board 273, respectively. That is, the lower left plate of the plate serves as a bridging substrate that transmits the first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) of the door frame side, + 12V DC, and the ground (GND) to the upper left plate of the plate 273. The decorative substrate 283 and the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are electrically connected to each other. A door frame-side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) from the dish unit relay substrate 214 are input to the dish lower left decoration substrate 283 serving as a bridge substrate, respectively. Not provided is provided with an input connector, and is not shown for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) to the plate upper left decoration substrate 273, respectively. An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 electrically connected to the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 (that is, the latter stage and the final stage of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283) includes the lower plate left decorative substrate 283 shown in the drawing. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the direct current + 12V, and the ground (GND) respectively output from the output connectors that are not provided are provided only as input connectors (not shown). .

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the dish lower right decoration board 288 are input to the plate upper right decoration board 278, respectively. In other words, the dish lower right decoration board 288 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) to the plate upper right decoration board 278. The lower right decorative substrate 288 and the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are electrically connected to each other. A door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), a direct current + 12V, and a ground (GND) from the dish unit relay board 214 are input to the dish lower right decoration board 288 serving as a bridge board. An input connector (not shown) is provided, and a door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the dish upper right decoration board 278, respectively. No output connector is provided. On the other hand, the plate right lower decorative board 288 is electrically connected to the plate lower right decorative board 288 (that is, the latter and final stages of the plate lower right decorative board 288). Only the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) that are respectively output from the output connectors 288 not shown are provided. ing.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the rendering operation unit 300, are the decoration board 314 on the plate center and the plate. Inputs are made to the lower central decoration board 316 and the front decoration board 352a of the rendering operation ring decoration board 352, respectively.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the front decorative substrate 352a, are input to the rear decorative substrate 352b, respectively. That is, the front decoration board 352a serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) to the rear decoration board 352b. The rear decoration substrate 352b is electrically connected to the beads. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 are respectively provided on the front decorative board 352a serving as a bridge board. An input connector (not shown) for input is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the rear decorative substrate 352b, respectively. An output connector (not shown) is provided. On the other hand, the rear decorative substrate 352b electrically connected to the front decorative substrate 352a (that is, the latter stage and the final stage of the front decorative substrate 352a) has an output connector (not shown) of the front decorative substrate 352a. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), + 12V DC, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the above, are provided only with input connectors (not shown).

  Here, for example, the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the plate unit relay substrate 214 will be briefly described. Then, the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat distribution circuit 283c, and six full color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current driving circuit 283a is a sink type constant current driving circuit 283x capable of flowing a constant current to sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing to sdLED1 to sdLED6. It is mainly composed of a circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x controls to flow a constant current to sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the dish unit relay board 214. Since the constant current drive circuit 283x is a sink (sink) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x is taken over by the heat distribution circuit 283c, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x can be dispersed.

  Further, for example, a brief description will be given of the plate upper left decoration board 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the plate lower left decoration board 283. The plate upper left decoration substrate 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat distribution circuit 273c, and six full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current driving circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current driving circuit 283a of the lower left decorative substrate 283, and is a sink type constant current driving circuit 273x capable of flowing a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6. , SuLED1 to suLED6, and a maximum current setting circuit 273y capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through suLED1 to suLED6. The constant current drive circuit 273x controls to supply a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the lower left dish substrate 283. Since the constant current drive circuit 273x is a sink (sink) type as described above, it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x is taken over by the heat distribution circuit 273c, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x can be dispersed.

[11-1-2. Door frame side second serial system]
The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are decorations on the lower left side of the door frame left side decoration board 402. While being input to the board 402b, the decoration part decoration board 413 in the side window, the right side lower decoration board 418b of the door frame right side decoration board 418, and the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. 89. Have been entered respectively.

  The direct current + 12V and the ground (GND) input to the lower left side decorative board 402b of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are input to the upper left side decorative board 402a of the door frame left side decorative board 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, are the door frame top right decoration board. Has been input to 457.

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative board 457 are input to the door frame top central decorative board 455, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top right decorative board 457 becomes a bridging board for transmitting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top central decorative board 455. Thus, the door frame top right decoration board 457 and the door frame top center decoration board 455 are electrically connected to each other. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457, which serves as a bridge substrate, has a door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, DC + 12V, and ground. Input connectors (not shown) to which (GND) are respectively input are provided, and the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) are provided in the door frame top center. An output connector (not shown) for outputting each to the decorative substrate 455 is provided. Further, the door frame top center decorative board 455 electrically connected to the door frame top right decorative board 457 (that is, the latter stage of the door frame top right decorative board 457) includes the door frame top right decorative board 457 shown in the drawing. A door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors, are provided, and not-shown input connectors are provided. , A door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) are provided to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, respectively, and output connectors (not shown) are provided. .

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the door frame top central decoration substrate 455, are input to the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, respectively. ing. In other words, the door frame top central decoration board 455 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decoration board 456. Thus, the door frame top central decoration board 455 and the door frame top left decoration board 456 are electrically connected in a beaded state. On the other hand, the door frame top left decoration board 456 electrically connected to the door frame top center decoration board 455 (that is, the latter and final stages of the door frame top center decoration board 455) has a door. Door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors (not shown) of the frame top central decoration board 455, are input respectively. Only the connector for is provided.

  Here, for example, on the door frame left side decoration board 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the door frame sub relay board 105. The left side lower decorative substrate 402b will be briefly described. The left side lower decorative substrate 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat dispersion circuit 402bc, and ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decoration board 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the plate upper left decoration board 273, and applies a constant current to hdLED1 to hdLED8. It is mainly configured by a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bax and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay capable of setting the maximum current of the currents flowing through the hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax applies a constant current to eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. Take control.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decoration board 283, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the plate upper left decoration board 273. hdLED10 and sink type constant current drive circuit 402bbx capable of supplying constant current to huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side decorative substrate 402a, hdLED9, hdLED10, and left It is mainly composed of a maximum current setting circuit 402by capable of setting the maximum current of the currents flowing through the huLED1 to huLED5 of the side decorative substrate 402a. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub relay board 105, and is mounted on the board (left side lower decorative board 402b) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted. The constant current is controlled to flow through the hdLED9, the hdLED10, and the huLED1 to huLED5 on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a.

  Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (sink) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED8. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (sink) type as described above, heat is generated by absorbing the constant current flowing through the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is handled by the heat distribution circuit 402bc, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed. Further, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat distribution circuit 402bc and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a. ing.

  In this way, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed only by the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the substrate on which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is mounted (lower left side decorative substrate 402b). On the other hand, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx becomes a subsequent board in addition to the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the board on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted (left side lower decorative board 402b). The heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a can distribute the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to flow a constant current to the huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is the subsequent substrate across the substrate on which the constant current driving circuit 402bbx is mounted (left side lower decorative substrate 402b). Has been done. Therefore, the work of electrically connecting the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a is inevitably involved. A worker who performs this work has his finger touching the connector of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the connector of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, or the left side upper decorative substrate 402a. Since the distributed circuit 402ac is touched, it is necessary to prevent the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a have a function of dispersing heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, It also has a function to prevent damage to electronic components due to.

  As described above, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a receives the direct current + 12V and the ground (GND) from the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and also has five full color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. Lines for passing current are input respectively. As described above, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a includes the heat distribution circuit 402ac in addition to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. As described above, the heat distribution circuit 402ac has a function of preventing heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx and a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

[11-1-3. Light emission data]
Here, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 are data for designating a light emission mode, and include ID information and a floor. And key information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits is to be designated among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The gradation information is information indicating which of the gradation degrees 0 (zero) to 127 is to be designated.

[11-2. Overview of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is the same circuit, and therefore the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided on the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 will be described here. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a sets a sink (constant) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of supplying a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 and a maximum current of the current supplied to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. And a maximum current setting circuit 283y capable of

[11-2-1. Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels and can output current for each channel. In the present embodiment, the output channel LR is provided for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED. , LG, LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. You can do it.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current drive unit 283xi. It is mainly composed.

[11-2-1a. Linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit that can generate and supply an internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V in this embodiment) to which DC + 12V from the + 12V power supply line is input and which is used in the constant current drive circuit 283x. The internal power supply Vreg generated by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit. The internal power supply Verg supplies the reset unit 283xb, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi. Is able to work.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line of the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 155, and + DC 5V is independently created as the internal power supply Vreg and used in the constant current drive circuit 283x. There is. This is because if the + 5V power supply line from the power supply board 630 is used, this + 5V power supply line is used by laying around the electric wiring, and therefore the length of the + 5V power supply line for supplying DC + 5V becomes long and noise is generated. Easy to invade. Then, if external noise is transmitted to the + 5V power supply line and DC + 5V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, there is a possibility that the LED may flicker due to the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line from the power supply board 630 is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the + 12V power supply line from the + 12V power supply line that has extremely high noise resistance as compared with the + 5V power supply line is connected to the constant current drive circuit 283x. In the linear power supply 283xa, a configuration in which direct current + 5V is created as the internal power supply Vreg is adopted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by utilizing the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x toward the other substrate without using the internal power supply Vreg. Since it can be made difficult, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. As a result, the internal power supply Vreg is stabilized, which can contribute to the prevention of flicker of the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 due to external noise. Therefore, it is possible to increase resistance to external noise. Further, the electric wiring for input to the + 5V power source line and the electric wiring for external transmission are not required, which can contribute to miniaturization of the connector.

[11-2-1b. Reset section]
The reset unit 283xb creates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa and outputs it to the constant current drive circuit 283x to initialize the constant current drive circuit 283x and operate the constant current drive circuit 283x. It is a so-called power-on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset unit 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi are started.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x does not receive the reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 148, for example, and creates a reset signal independently as the internal reset signal RST and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x. There is. For example, if a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter, referred to as “reset signal transmission line”) is used, this reset signal transmission line can be used by arranging electrical wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal becomes long, and noise easily enters. Then, if the external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the constant current drive circuit 283x may be reset by the influence of the external noise and the LED may be turned off. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the reset signal transmission line is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the reset unit 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x independently creates the reset signal as the internal reset signal RST. did.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external substrate, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current driving circuit 283x to another substrate, and only in the constant current driving circuit 283x. By using it, it is possible to make it difficult for external noise to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, and therefore it is possible to stabilize the internal reset signal RST. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x due to external noise is not reset, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, It is possible to contribute to the prevention of unexpected turning off and flicker of the LED elements that compose the full-color LEDs corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it is possible to increase resistance to external noise. In addition, the electric wiring for input to the reset signal transmission line and the electric wiring for external transmission are not required, which can contribute to miniaturization of the connector.

[11-2-1c. buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc is a line (hereinafter, referred to as “data line”) for transmitting serial data (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. From the logic processing unit 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x, respectively. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line (hereinafter, referred to as “clock line”) that transmits a clock signal (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. From the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x.

  The data line and the clock line are transmitted across a plurality of boards and relay boards as described above. For this reason, the length of both the data line and the clock line becomes long, and noise easily enters. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd in the constant current drive circuit 283x, noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x is provided. The waveform is shaped in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd so as not to be transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent substrate.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when both the data line and the clock line are long, it is possible to form the data line and the clock line resistant to noise. This makes it possible to realize signal transmission that is resistant to noise. Therefore, it is possible to increase resistance to external noise.

[11-2-1d. Address setting section]
The address setting unit 283xe sets 64 types of addresses as IDs (IDs capable of identifying the individual) of the constant current drive circuit 283x by three ID resistors (not shown) based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa. Is able to.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ID capable of identifying the individual constant current drive circuit 283x is preset by the address setting unit 283xe by the hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). However, it is not set properly by receiving data by software.

[11-2-1e. Oscillator, logic processing unit]
In the logic processing unit 283xg, serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, the emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) and the clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the shaped constant current drive circuit 283x is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) based on the address that is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. Sometimes, the gradation information is fetched from this serial data, and the gradation degree in the output channel is set in the PWM unit 283xh based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so as to be the fetched gradation information. On the other hand, when the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not taken in and is set in the PWM unit 283xh. Control to maintain the current contents.

[11-2-1f. PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation level) of the LED in each output channel in a total of 128 steps from gradation off to lighting (maximum brightness) from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127. The gradation control is performed by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown) for one output channel. That is, the PWM unit 283xh includes the PWM gradation control units 1 to PWM gradation control units 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 individually (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the gradation level is set, each of the PWM gradation control section 1 to the PWM gradation control section 24 controls the constant current drive section 283xi so that a current having the set gradation level flows.

[11-2-1g. Constant current drive]
The constant current driving unit 283xi has one constant value (not shown) for one output channel so that the gradation levels are set in the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 included in the PWM unit 283xh described above. A current driver causes a constant current to flow through the LED element that constitutes the full-color LED. That is, the constant current drive unit 283xi includes the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24 individually (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24.

  Each of the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 has one end of a resistor Rr that sets a maximum current flowing through a red (R) emitting LED element that constitutes a full-color LED in eight output channels LR1 to LR8. The resistor Rr is electrically connected and the other end is grounded to the ground (GND). Each of the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 has one end of a resistor Rg that sets a maximum current flowing through a green (G) emitting LED element that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels LG1 to LG8. The resistor Rg is electrically connected, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). Each of the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 has one end of a resistor Rb that sets a maximum current flowing through a blue (B) emitting LED element that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels LB1 to LB8. The resistor Rb is electrically connected and the other end is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element that constitute the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24, respectively. The anode terminal is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and receives DC + 12V.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 are output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 1 to the constant current driver 8) so that the constant currents flowing in the red (R) LED elements that form the full-color LED can be respectively sucked into the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 side. Has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements forming the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 are output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 9 to the constant current driver 16), and the constant currents flowing in the green (G) LED elements that form the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 side, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 are output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 17 to the constant current driver 24), and the constant currents flowing in the blue (B) LED elements forming the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 side, respectively. ing.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 respectively absorb the constant currents flowing in the red (R) LED elements that form the individually set full-color LEDs, and thereby the red (R) LED elements that form the full-color LED. Can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 respectively absorb the constant currents flowing in the green (G) LED elements that form the individually set full-color LEDs, and thus the green (G) LED elements that form the full-color LED. Can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 respectively absorb the constant currents flowing in the blue (B) LED elements that configure the individually set full-color LEDs, and thereby the blue (B) LED elements that configure the full-color LEDs. Can emit light.

  As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit can perform the dimming lighting by emitting 24 LED elements, that is, 8 full-color LEDs with the individually set constant current, and thus the dimming lighting is performed. Thus, it is possible to turn off, turn on with one gradation, blink with one gradation, and the like.

[11-2-2. Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current to flow in the LED element that emits red (R) that constitutes the full-color LED in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8 described above, and the output channels LG1 to LG1. A resistor Rg that sets the maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits green (G) that constitutes a full-color LED in eight output channels up to LG8, and a full-color LED in eight output channels from output channels LB1 to LB8 are configured. And a resistor Rb that sets a maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits blue (B) light.

  As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 included in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 included in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 provided in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded (GND). There is.

[11-3. Decorative substrate with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the decorative substrate including the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. Here, a decorative substrate including one LED constant current driving circuit will be described, and a decorative substrate including two LED constant current driving circuits will be described. The above-mentioned LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is configured as the same circuit. Therefore, in FIGS. 166 and 167, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals for convenience of description.

[11-3-1. Decorative board with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decorative substrate having one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. 166, the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 is an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a heat generator. The distribution circuit 283c is provided.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 included in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 included in the main body frame 4 as described above. The light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1 which are the first serial system on the door frame side are input. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 as described above via the interface board 635 so that direct current + 12V is input thereto, and the ground of the power supply board 630 ( It is electrically connected to the GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

  As described above, the lower left plate of the plate 283 has the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, DC + 12V, and ground (GND) of the plate unit 200. It is input through the dish unit relay board 214. The direct current + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a and constitutes sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full-color LEDs, the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are output channels LR1 to LR6 (constant currents described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the drivers 1 to 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that form sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LG1 to LG6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6, respectively. The driver 9 to the constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements forming the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-mentioned constant currents) via the heat dispersion resistors sdRb1 to sdRb6, respectively. The driver 17 to the constant current driver 22) are electrically connected. The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 283a starts from the light emission data SDAT1 when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1). Gradation information is captured, and sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled and dimmed to be the captured gradation information.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is of the sink type as described above, it heats up by absorbing the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more accurately, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is taken up by the heat dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, sdRb1 to sdRb6, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 283c. As a result, it is possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more accurately, the constant current drive circuit 283x).

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is decorated on the left upper side of the dish via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above). While being input to the board 273, the direct current + 12V and the ground (GND) are input to the dish upper left decoration board 273 through the dish lower left decoration board 283. As a result, the noise that has entered the data line and the clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-mentioned constant current drive circuit 283x) is not transmitted to the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 which is the subsequent substrate. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a can shape the waveform (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd included in the constant current drive circuit 283x described above).

  The direct current + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and constitutes the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistances suRr1 to suRr6 (the constant currents described above). It is electrically connected to the drivers 1 to 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (the above-mentioned constant currents) via the heat dispersion resistors suRg1 to suRg6, respectively. The driver 9 to the constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements forming the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current driving circuit 273a (the above-mentioned constant currents) via the heat dispersion resistors suRb1 to suRb6, respectively. The driver 17 to the constant current driver 22) are electrically connected. The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 273a starts from the light emission data SDAT1 when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1). Gradation information is captured, and the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled and dimmed and turned on so that the captured gradation information is obtained.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is a sink (sink) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more accurately, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is responsible for the heat dispersion resistances suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 273c. As a result, it is possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x).

  As a decorative substrate having one LED constant current drive circuit, in addition to the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 and the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate lower right decorative substrate 288, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456. , And the door frame top right decorative substrate 457.

[11-3-2. Decorative board with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has LED constant current drive circuits 402ba, 402bb, and 10 full-color LEDs, hdLED1. -It has hdLED10 and the heat distribution circuit 402bc.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 included in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 included in the main body frame 4 as described above. Light emission data SDAT2, which is the second serial system on the door frame side, and clock signal SCLK2 are input. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 as described above via the interface board 635 so that direct current + 12V is input thereto, and the ground of the power supply board 630 ( It is electrically connected to the GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

  As described above, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b receives the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub relay substrate 105. There is. Direct current + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, and the anode terminals of the red (R) LED elements and the green (G) LED elements that form the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. , And the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the light emitting mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. It can be controlled. Therefore, among the 10 full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba controls the light emission mode for the eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, and the remaining two LEDs. For the hdLED 9 and the hdLED 10 which are full-color LEDs, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb controls the light emission mode. The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is a succeeding substrate across the substrate on which the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb is mounted (that is, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). The light emitting modes of the huLED1 to huLED5 are controlled.

  Of the 10 full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements that make up the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to sdLED8, are different from the eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8. Through the heat dispersion resistances hdRr1 to hdRr8, electrically connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 described above), the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are output channels LG1 to LG8 (constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the heat dispersion resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. And electricity The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are connected to the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 (of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively). It is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24) described above.

  Of the 10 full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs, hdLED9 and sdLED10, are different from the two full-color LEDs, hdLED9 and hdLED10. The full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 and LR2 (constant current driver 1 and constant current driver 2 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistances hdRr9 and hdRr10. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 and LG2 (constant current driver 9 and constant current driver 1 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via thermal dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. ) Is electrically connected to the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs, hdLED9 and hdLED10, and the cathode terminals of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. It is electrically connected to LB1 and LB2 (constant current driver 17 and constant current driver 18 described above).

  In addition, for the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a substrate subsequent to the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the reds (huLED1 to huLED5 that are full-color LEDs are configured). The cathode terminals of the LED elements of R) are respectively connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistances huRr1b to huRr5b on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a and the heat dispersion resistances huRr1a to huRr5a on the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (constant current driver 3 to constant current driver 7 described above) of the huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, respectively. Decoration on the left side Through the heat distribution resistances huRg1b to huRg5b of the plate 402a and the heat distribution resistances huRg1a to huRg5a of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the output channels LG3 to LG7 (the constant current driver 11 to the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to the driver 15) and that constitute the huLED1 to huLED5 that are full-color LEDs are respectively the heat dispersion resistances huRb1b to huRb5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side. Electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (constant current driver 19 to constant current driver 23 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistances huRb1a to huRb5a in the lower side decorative substrate 402b. To have. The output channels LR8, LG8, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba outputs the light emission data SDAT2 from the light emission data SDAT2 when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2). Gradation information is taken in, and eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, among the ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, are individually controlled and dimmed to obtain the obtained gradation information. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a door frame side second serial system (light emission data) that is input via the data line buffer 402baxc and the clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402bax that constitutes the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. If the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2), gradation information is captured from this emission data SDAT2, and 10 Of the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, the remaining two full-color LEDs, hdLED9 and hdLED10, are individually controlled to perform dimming and lighting, and the left side that is the subsequent board to the left-side lower decorative board 402b. Top decorative substrate 40 Is the five independent control huLED1~huLED5 a full-color LED of and turned dimming implemented in a.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (sink) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the eight hdLED1 to hdLED8 out of the ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. To do. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more accurately, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is taken up by the heat dispersion resistances hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, hdRb1 to hdRb8 that constitute the heat distribution circuit 402bc. As a result, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more accurately, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) can be dispersed.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (sink) type, it absorbs the constant current flowing through the two hdLED9 and hdLED10 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the left Heat is generated by absorbing the constant currents flowing through the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a substrate subsequent to the side lower decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is converted into two full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, for two hdLED9 and hdLED10. The five heat dissipating resistors hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, hdRb10, which constitute the heat dispersal circuit 402bc, and are mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is the subsequent substrate of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. For huLED1 to huLED5 which are full-color LEDs, the heat distribution circuits huRr1a to hudRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 402bc in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the left side upper side. Heat distribution resistors huRr1b to hudRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, huRb1b to huRb5b, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 402ac in the decorative substrate 402a, are responsible for the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx). The heat generation can be dispersed.

  Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left-side upper decoration substrate 402a are the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (correctly, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by, it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

  As a decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, in addition to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the plate center lower decorative substrate 316, the side window interior decorative portion decorative substrate 413, the right side. There is a lower decorative substrate 418b and a door frame top central decorative substrate 455.

  In addition to the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, there is a right side upper decorative substrate 418a as a decorative substrate that does not include any LED constant current drive circuit.

[11-4. LED constant current drive circuit layout method]
Next, a method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 168 and 169. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is the same circuit as described above. Here, a description will be given as an electronic component in which the constant current drive circuit forming the LED constant current drive circuit is integrated on one semiconductor chip. The type of IC package of the constant current drive circuit is a surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square planar shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). ) And so-called VQFN. Of the four sides of the constant current drive circuit, one side is an input side and the remaining three sides are an output side 1 to an output side 3, respectively. Note that in FIG. 169, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for the sake of easy viewing of the drawing.

  As described above, each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip plate shape, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. There is. Since the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuits on each of the decoration boards of the door frame 3 is almost the same, here, the left side formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate including two LED constant current drive circuits is formed. The lower decorative substrate 402b and the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-arcuate shape will be described.

[11-4-1. Left side bottom decorative board]
As shown in FIG. 168 (a), the left side lower decorative substrate 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba, 402bb, ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb are mounted. , Is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b which is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. A connector LDUCN for connecting electrical wiring to the left side upper decoration substrate 402a is mounted on the upper end side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, and no LED is mounted on the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. A connector LDLCN for connecting the door frame sub-relay board 105 and electrical wiring is mounted on the lower end side of the surface 402by.

  A white resist is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the present embodiment, the reflectance of the front side (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is made by the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Can be increased.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are printed by silk printing. It has not been. Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the board management number of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is not formed as a blank character by a white resist.

  This is because the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b due to the emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. To prevent that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b from decreasing due to the emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

  Further, the door frame left side decoration 404 shown in FIG. 91 provided in the door frame 3 is formed in a translucent milky white as described above, but the game is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. When a person moves the head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), and the player visually recognizes the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b provided in the door frame left side decorative body 404. Even if it can be done, in the first place, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged. Since the area indicating the position is not printed by silk printing at all, the full color LE has no relation to the game for the player. Corresponding part numbers, and a region indicating where to place the full color LED are prevented from being viewed by the player and. Therefore, a number identifying the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10) and the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, the full-color LED It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize a certain area (where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged).

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged are not printed by silk printing at all. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN, which has no relation to the game to the player, and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist. Each of the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white) of the package, and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of the same color). In other words, it is an electronic component that has a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b (is solidly coated). The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. As described above, in this embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b at all. Not not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the board management number of the lower left side decorative board 402b is a foil removal character (that is, a wiring that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which a wiring pattern is formed). It is formed as a character formed by patterning and removing the copper foil around it, and is formed by a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Is covered. The wiring pattern forming the characters without the foil is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. The board management number of the left-side lower decorative board 402b is not the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative board 402b, but the foil removal characters (that is, the wiring pattern) on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative board 402b. May be formed as a character formed by a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which is formed, and a copper foil around the character is formed, and is formed as a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are made of foil-free characters (that is, characters are formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed, Each may be formed as a blank character formed by removing the copper foil. Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a solid earth as described later. Therefore, the board management number of the lower left side decorative board 402b is a character without a foil (that is, a character is made with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and the copper foil around it is removed. Not formed as a blank character) formed on one or both of the solid ground of the LED mounting surface 402bx and the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 402by. May be.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuit 402bax forming the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, and various dispersions. Areas indicating the positions of electronic parts such as resistors are printed by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are silk printed near these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black). Specifically, for example, the area showing the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a solid yellow line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 169 (a)) as the silk screen printing, and the lower left side decorative substrate. The IC1 (see FIG. 169 (a)), which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the 402b and in the vicinity of the area LSLKa and above the silkscreen printing. Is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as a solid yellow line (or a solid black line). Then, the areas showing the positions of the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd as silk printing (see FIG. 169 (a)). Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively, and the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are provided on the right side in the vicinity of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 169 (a)) corresponding to the above are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. There is.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, a region corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b is a silk-printed yellow chain line. (Alternatively, black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (only the chain lines LSLK4 and LSLK5 corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED4 and hdLED5 are shown in FIG. 169 (a)), respectively, and these areas are also printed. In the vicinity of LSLK1 to LSLK10, the part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are located above or below (in FIG. 169 (a), there are LED4 and LED4 which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full color LEDs). Only expressed respectively.) Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

  In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b, an area showing a position where the connector LDLCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b is arranged is not shown as silk-printed yellow chain line. (Or, it is printed with a black chain line), and the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of this area.

  Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has no white color. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of resin having any one of black color, brown color, and blue color. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a reduced reflectance due to the light emission of a full-color LED, the LED non-mounting surface Implemented in.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b, lighting tests are individually performed on the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b (for example, (For each LED element that constitutes one full-color LED, LED elements that emit red (R), LED elements that emit green (G), and LED elements that emit blue (B)) A plurality of check pins (not shown) can be formed as a test pad (or a through hole) connected to a wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who makes an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe and the check pin (not shown) are electrically connected and electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  In the embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and the connector that does not have white are LEDs that emit light from the full-color LED. Since the reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all, but the region corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface by the emission of the full-color LED is the LED mounting surface. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectivity in, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and the connector that does not have white color may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED non-mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed by silk-screen printing with a yellow chain line (or a black chain line) not shown, and an electronic region near the region is displayed. The part number corresponding to the part or connector is printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk screen printing.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a so-called solid earth that grounds a region other than a land pattern and a wiring pattern of an electronic component or a connector to a ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). There is.

  As described above, since the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip that extends vertically, the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. The width dimension from the left edge 402beg1 to the right edge 402beg2 is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx. Therefore, when the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the land of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx is arranged. Since the distance between the edge of the pattern and the left edge 402beg1 or the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is extremely short, the wiring pattern can be extracted from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge side because there is a limit of the minimum distance dimension to the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the interval between the wiring patterns adjacent to each other. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Adopted the configuration.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the lower right side of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx is input to the lower right side. By arranging the terminal on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b toward the left end side 402beg1 so as to be the terminal on the side, the input side terminal is the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) shown in FIG. ), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), and the resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402by are input, and the left lower end side, the upper left end side, and the upper right end side are mainly the terminals on the output side 1 to the output side. 3 and the terminals on the output side 1 to the terminals on the output side 3 are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 shown in FIG. LG8, LB1~LB8, and door frame side second serial line (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) to output the like. The terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have terminals to which a ground (GND) is input. There is.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, of the four edge sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, two edge sides are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being able to be arranged as a state, the remaining two end sides can be arranged as being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. As a result, the minimum distance dimension is restricted to the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the space between adjacent wiring patterns from the lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. Even all wiring patterns can be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region where the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn from the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of a vertically elongated strip.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, there are a group 1 composed of four full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED4, and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be arranged between the group 2 composed of hdLED5 to hdLED8, the length of the constant current drive circuit 402bax when the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed. Can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing the wiring pattern for the group 1 and the group 2 from being lengthened or shortened in one group of the group 1 and the group 2. It is possible to improve the efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in the work.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be installed in the central portion in the up-down direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (the full-color LED hdLED6 in FIG. 168 (a)). The portion of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be arranged closer to the lower side compared to the portion to be arranged), and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be arranged at the central portion in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (FIG. 168 (a)). Of the full-color LED, which is closer to the upper side, than the full-color LED, which is the full-color LED configured in group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 402bax. . Accordingly, it is possible to secure a region for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and from the constant current drive circuit 402bbx. 2 full-color LEDs, hdLED9, hdLED10, and five left-side upper decorative substrates 402a shown in FIG. 167, which are provided for the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. It can be secured in 402b.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay, 402by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are so-called EIA type 0805 (designated 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length. S: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are larger than those of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, unlike the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) have one end side in the longitudinal direction of the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb that is the left end side of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The capacitor (not shown) is arranged so as to be parallel to the 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor is perpendicular to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each edge of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx arranged such that the edge of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistance. Rr, Rg, and Rb are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b so as to be non-parallel to one side of the capacitor (not shown) in the longitudinal direction.

  Further, as described above, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is such that the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is 45 with respect to the left end side and the right end side of the decorative board. The door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 of the door frame top decoration body 453 are the doors although they are arranged in a tilted state and are almost the same. Unlike the other decorative substrates of the frame 3, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged in the door frame top decorative body 453, and Since the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side is large, the edge side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is set to the door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top. It is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper side and lower side of the right decorative substrate 457. That is, in the present embodiment, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate, and the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is not parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate. And are mixed. In the present embodiment, the door frame top central decorative board 455 includes, in addition to the 11 full-color LEDs included therein, another central decorative board on which 5 full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted. LED constant current drive circuit (first LED constant current drive circuit (first constant current drive circuit, first maximum current setting circuit), second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, Second LED constant current drive circuit (here, second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, second maximum current setting circuit)) Not provided through two heat distribution circuits (first constant current circuit is first heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistance), second constant current circuit is second heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistance)) Direct lighting control, door frame top left decoration The plate 456 includes, in addition to the seven full-color LEDs included in itself, another left decorative substrate on which one full-color LED (not shown) is mounted, one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive) included in itself. Circuit, maximum current setting circuit) to directly control light emission through one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance) provided in itself (not shown), and the door frame top right decoration board 457 is provided in addition to the six full color LEDs provided in itself. Then, another right decorative substrate on which two full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted is provided to itself (not shown) by one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) provided to itself (not shown). Light emission is controlled directly via two heat dispersion circuits (heat dispersion resistance). Then, the other central decorative board is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative board is the left side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. Is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends in the left-right direction along the line, and the other right decorative substrate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends in the left-right direction along the right side portion of the door frame top decoration body 453. It is necessary to provide a heat distribution circuit (heat dispersion resistance) on each of the other central decoration board, the other left decoration board, and the other right decoration board. As described above, the door frame top has the heat distribution circuit (here, the second heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistance)) provided in the central decoration board 455 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other center decoration board. In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the second LED constant current drive circuit (to be more precise, the second constant current drive circuit) provided on the central decorative substrate 455 itself, damage to electronic components due to static electricity is prevented. It also has a function that can be done. Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided in the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and the heat distribution circuit of the other left decoration substrate are the LED constant current drive circuit (exactly In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit, it also has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity. Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided in the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 and the heat distribution circuit of the other right decoration substrate are the LED constant current drive circuit (exactly In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit, it also has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

  Further, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and 10 full color LEDs are arranged. When the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is closer to the right end side 402beg2 and along the vertical direction of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b And the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are located closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left lower lower decorative substrate 402b. L of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b Adopting a configuration of placing the D non-mounting surface 402By. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are of a sink (sink) type, and generate heat by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element. Therefore, even in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, by separating the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx and the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be made less susceptible to the ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10.

  Further, by arranging the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuit is arranged. One in which the end sides of the land patterns of 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative board (that is, the door frame top central decoration board 455 of the door frame top decoration body 453, the door frame top left decoration). Compared with the board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457), the one in which the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative board is a decorative board. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side can be further shortened. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension of the game board 5 in the left-right direction.

[11-4-2. Decorative board on the center of the dish]
As shown in FIG. 168 (b), the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, which is the upper side of the effect operation unit 300, while the LED constant current drive circuit 314a. , 314b are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, which is the upward side of the effect operation unit 300. In addition, when the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 shown in FIG. 168 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is actually arranged along the dish center upper decoration body 312a). On the right side along the upper end side 314eg1 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314, a connector HCN for connecting the operation portion relay substrate 392 and electric wiring is mounted.

  A white resist is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. In the present embodiment, the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light to the front side (that is, the side toward the upper side of the performance operation unit 300). The reflectance of the can be increased.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are completely printed by silk printing. It has not been. Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the substrate management number of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is not formed as a blank character by a white resist.

  This is because the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 due to the emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. To prevent that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

  Further, although the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91 provided in the door frame 3 is formed in a translucent milky white as described above, it is in front of the pachinko machine 1. When the player seated on the table moves the head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), and the LED on the plate center upper decoration board 314 provided in the plate center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 is temporarily provided. Even when the player can visually recognize the mounting surface 314x, in the first place, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 has a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the full-color LED. The area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing, so that it is completely related to the game for the player. It has not full LED with the corresponding part numbers, and a region indicating where to place the full color LED is prevented from being viewed by the player. Therefore, a number that specifies the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs (that is, the part number that corresponds to the hLED1 to hLED10 that is a full-color LED) or the auxiliary line that indicates the mounting position of the hLED1 to hLED10 that is a full-color LED (that is, in the full-color LED). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize a certain area) where hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged.

  It should be noted that the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 has no part number corresponding to the connector HCN and a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector HCN having no relation to the game to the player and the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the plate center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin with a white package (a color that is recognized to be the same as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of a color recognized as the same as that of the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (painted solid). A full-color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. Thus, in this embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center. Not not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is a foil removal character (that is, a wiring that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which a wiring pattern is formed). It is formed as a character formed by patterning and removing the copper foil around it, and is formed by a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center. Is covered. The wiring pattern forming the characters without the foil is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. The board management number of the plate center upper decorative board 314 is the same as the plate non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314, instead of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314. May be formed as a character formed by a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which is formed, and the copper foil around the character is formed, and is formed on the plate center decoration board 314. Foil-free characters are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (that is, characters are formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and the surroundings thereof). Each may be formed as a blank character formed by removing the copper foil. Further, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a solid earth as described later. For this reason, the board management number of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is a character without a foil (that is, a character is formed with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed, and the copper foil around it is removed. The solid character of the LED mounting surface 314x and the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 314y are formed as a blank character in which a character is omitted. May be.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax forming the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various dispersions. Areas indicating the positions where electronic parts such as resistors are arranged are printed by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown in the figure as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are silk-screened near these areas. As printing, each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, a region corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED center mounting substrate 314x of the dish central decorative substrate 314 is not shown as silk printing in yellow. The chain lines (or the black chain lines) of HSLK1 to HSLK10 are printed respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 are yellow (or not shown) as silk printing (or , Black) respectively.

  In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314, a yellow chain line not shown as silk printing is a region indicating a position where the connector HCN to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is arranged. (Or, it is printed with a black chain line), and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of this area.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative board 314 on the plate center do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip does not have the white color. The package is made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED decreases.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the lighting inspection is individually performed on the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED center mounting substrate 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, (For each LED element, the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B) that make up one full-color LED) A plurality of check pins (not shown) that can be formed are formed as test pads (or through holes) that are connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who makes an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe and the check pin (not shown) are electrically connected and electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a so-called solid earth, which grounds a region other than a land pattern and a wiring pattern of an electronic component or a connector to a ground (GND). The solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 and the solid earth formed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). There is.

  In the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and the connector that does not have white, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs, emits light from the full-color LEDs. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is lowered, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all. However, in the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED, the area corresponding to the member arranged in front is mounted on the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED non-mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed by silk-screen printing with a yellow chain line (or a black chain line) not shown, and an electronic region near the region is displayed. The part number corresponding to the part or connector is printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk screen printing.

  As described above, since the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in the shape of a strip having a semi-circular shape, the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 shown in FIG. 168 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left. When viewed (that is, in the state where the dish center upper decorative board 314 is actually arranged along the dish center upper decorative body 312a), the upper end side 314eg1 to the lower end side 314eg2 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are. The width dimension up to is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Therefore, when the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the land of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is arranged. Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the upper edge 314eg1 or the lower edge 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 becomes extremely short, the wiring pattern can be extracted from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge side because there is a limit of the minimum distance dimension to the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the interval between the wiring patterns adjacent to each other. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is said that the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. Adopted the configuration.

  In this embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the left lower end side among the four end sides of the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx is input. By arranging the upper side 314eg1 of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center so as to be the terminal on the side, the terminal on the input side is the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) shown in FIG. ), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), and the resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left end side, the upper right end side, and the lower right end side are each mainly the terminal on the output side 1 to the output side. The terminals of the output side 1 to the terminals of the output side 3 are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and The door frame side first serial line (emission data SDAT1, clock signals SCLK1) to output the like. The terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have terminals to which a ground (GND) is input. There is.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, of the four end sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, two end sides are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. In addition to being arranged as a state, the remaining two end sides can be arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. As a result, the minimum distance dimension is limited to the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns from the lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Even all wiring patterns can be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region in which the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx in the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-arcuate shape.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, there are a group 1 including four full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4 and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 314ax can be arranged between the group 2 including the hLED5 to hLED8, the length of the constant current drive circuit 314ax when the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the group 1 and the group 2 is laid out. Can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing the wiring pattern for the group 1 and the group 2 from being lengthened or shortened in one group of the group 1 and the group 2. It is possible to improve the efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in the work.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, when the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 shown in FIG. 168 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left side (that is, the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is placed on the plate center upper portion). In a state in which the constant current drive circuit 314ax is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a), the constant current drive circuit 314ax is a full-color LED of a semi-arcuate central portion on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 (FIG. 168 (b)). It can be arranged closer to the right side than the part where the hLED6 is arranged), and the constant current drive circuit 314bx is arranged in the semi-arcuate center part on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (FIG. 168 (b). ), Which is closer to the left side than the portion where the hdLED6, which is a full-color LED, is arranged) and is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 314ax. It can be arranged on the left of hLED8 a full-color LED configured to 2. Accordingly, it is possible to secure an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8 in the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, and from the constant current drive circuit 314bx. An area for routing the wiring pattern to the two full-color LEDs, hLED9 and hLED10, can be secured in the dish center upper decorative substrate 314.

  In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are so-called EIA type 0805 (designated 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length. S: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are larger than the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, unlike the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, the resistors Rr, Rg and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) have resistors Rr, Rg and Rb whose one end side in the longitudinal direction is the upper end side of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The capacitor (not shown) is arranged so as to be parallel to 314eg1 and the lower side 314eg2, and one end of the capacitor, which is not shown, is vertical to the upper side 314eg1 and the lower side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each edge of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx arranged such that the edge of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and the resistance. Rr, Rg, and Rb are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 so that the longitudinal ends of the capacitors (not shown) are not parallel to each other.

  Further, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, and 10 full-color LEDs are arranged. HLED1 to hLED10 are in a semi-arcuate shape on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314, which is closer to the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are located closer to the upper end side 314eg1 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. A configuration is adopted in which it is arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the plate center. Like the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx are sink (sink) type as described above, and by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element, Fever. Therefore, even in the central upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-circular shape, by separating the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx from the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx can be less likely to be affected by the 10 full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

  Further, by arranging the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit is provided. Those in which the end sides of the land patterns 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative substrate (that is, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative of the door frame top decorative body 453). Compared to the board 456 and the door frame top right decoration board 457), the one in which the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right edges of the decoration board is the decoration board. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of can be further shortened. As a result, it is possible to contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction and the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the rendering operation unit 300, so that the large-sized rendering operation unit 300 can be provided in the door frame 3 and the rendering operation unit can be provided. A light emission effect by 300 can be performed.

[11-4-3. Metal pad on the bottom of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit
As the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, as the types of IC packages of the constant current drive circuit, as described above, It is a surface mount type having a square shape, and is a so-called VQFN. Here, an IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b will be described with reference to FIG.

  The metal pad FP is exposed in the central portion of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a so-called Exposed Pad (hereinafter, referred to as “EPad”) is formed. This IC package is designed to be improved in heat dissipation and bondability by being soldered to the substrate.

  In the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, in addition to each lead pad, a square EPad land pattern EP is provided. The EPad land pattern EP is electrically connected to the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the area of the EPad land pattern EP, nine thermal vias TV are arranged in a formation grid pattern. These thermal vias TV electrically connect the EPad land pattern EP and the solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, the wiring pattern from each lead pad cannot be drawn out within the area of the EPad land pattern EP.

  As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through each LED element. That is, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is transferred from the EPad through the EPad land pattern EP to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. By diffusing, heat can be dissipated in the entire left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

  Note that the relationship between the EPad land pattern EP and the nine thermal vias TV will be briefly described. The number and the size of the diameter of the thermal via TV are selected so that the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit is 50% or more. As a result, the joint area where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit and the EPad land pattern EP are soldered is prevented from becoming too large and the generation of voids is prevented, and the joint area is not too small and stable. It is possible to obtain the desired bonding strength. Although the EPad land pattern EP can be formed by dividing it into a grid pattern, in this case as well, in order to prevent the occurrence of voids and obtain a stable bonding strength, the constant current drive circuit is used as described above. The EPad (metal pad FP) of EPad (metal pad FP) must be soldered to the EPad land pattern EP at a junction region of 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

  As described above, each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip plate shape, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. In this embodiment, as an example, as described above, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends vertically is provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, and a semicircle. Each of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having an arc shape, and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are used to emit an LED by the emission of the full-color LED. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from decreasing, and a part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player. And a region indicating where to place a full-color LED has been described in detail that it is taken measures such reflectance decrease that can be prevented from being viewed by the player. Here, other configurations of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as "configurations for countermeasures for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the second to fourth embodiments") of the present invention in which countermeasures for reducing reflectance, etc. are taken will be described with reference to Figs. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. 170 shows a configuration of countermeasures such as reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment, FIG. 171 shows a configuration of countermeasures such as reflectance reduction according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 172 shows a D ′ portion of FIG. FIG. 172 is an enlarged view of the D ″ part of FIG. 171 viewed from the LED non-mounting surface, FIG. 173 is a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance and the like according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. It is the enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the part. 170 to 174 have the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 168 and FIG. 169 (hereinafter, referred to as “a configuration of measures for reducing reflectance etc. according to the first embodiment”). The same reference numerals. Also, in FIG. 172, various electronic components are omitted and a part of silk printing is omitted for the sake of easy viewing of the drawing. Also, in FIG. 174, various electronic components are omitted for the sake of easy viewing of the drawing.

[Comparison between Countermeasures against Reflection Decrease etc. According to First Embodiment and Countermeasures against Countermeasures against Reflectance Decrease etc. According to Second Embodiment]
As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reduction in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs and a full-color LED. The area indicating the positions of the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the area where the LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax that configures the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk printed near these areas. Each print is printed in yellow (or black). Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b, as described above, the area corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b has a silk area. It is printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as printing, and the part numbers corresponding to full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing near these areas. Has been done.

  In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 has a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. , And a region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax forming the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Areas indicating positions where electronic parts such as various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing (not shown) by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are located near these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, a region corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED center mounting substrate 314 LED mounting surface 314x is silk-screened. Not printed as yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 are printed respectively, and part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are silk-printed near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reduction in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a full-color LED, hdLED1. A part number corresponding to ~ hdLED10 and a region indicating a position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are printed by silk printing. Specifically, the areas indicating the positions of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b by silk-printing with solid yellow lines LSLK1 to LSLK10, respectively. In the vicinity of the areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, LED1 to LED10, which is a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full-color LED in the left or upper direction, are yellow as silk printing on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Each is printed.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is printed by silk solid printing with a yellow solid line (not shown), and the vicinity of this region corresponds to the connector LDLCN. The part number to be printed is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist. Each of the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white) of the package, and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of the same color). In other words, it is an electronic component that has a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b (is solidly coated). The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, lighting tests are individually performed on the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b (for example, 1 It is possible to perform each full-color LED for each of LED elements that emit red (R), green (G), and blue (B). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as a test pad (or a through hole) connected to a wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins is not shown as silk printing in yellow. It is printed with. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who makes an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe and the check pin (not shown) are electrically connected and electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 172, a constant current drive circuit 402bax forming the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, resistors Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating positions for arranging electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistors are printed by silk solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), respectively, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are provided in the vicinity of these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, a region showing the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 172 (a)) on the lower left side decorative substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 172 (a)), which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the 402b, and in the vicinity of and above the area LSLKa. Is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as a solid yellow line (or a solid black line). Then, the areas indicating the positions of the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd as silk printing (see FIG. 172 (a)). Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively, and the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are provided on the right side in the vicinity of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 172 (a)) corresponding to the above are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. There is.

  Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has no white color. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of resin having any one of black color, brown color, and blue color. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a reduced reflectance due to the light emission of a full-color LED, the LED non-mounting surface Implemented in.

  Even in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are solidly coated with a white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b increases the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Is able to.

  In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 has hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. Corresponding part numbers and areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed as silk printing. Specifically, the areas indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are printed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 with silk solid lines yellow solid lines HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively. In the vicinity of the areas HSLK1 to HSLK10, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, are printed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 in yellow as silk printing. Has been done.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center, a region showing the position where the connector HCN is arranged is printed by a yellow solid line (not shown) as silk printing, and the region corresponding to the connector HCN is provided in the vicinity of this region. The part number to be printed is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the plate center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin with a white package (a color that is recognized to be the same as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of a color recognized as the same as that of the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (painted solid). A full-color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED center surface decorative board 314x of the LED mounting surface 314x (for example, 1 It is possible to perform each full-color LED for each of LED elements that emit red (R), green (G), and blue (B). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as a test pad (or a through hole) connected to a wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins is not shown as silk printing in yellow. It is printed with. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who makes an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe and the check pin (not shown) are electrically connected and electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax forming the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors, etc. The areas indicating the positions where electronic parts are arranged are printed by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown as silk-screen printing, and the part numbers corresponding to electronic parts near these areas are shown as silk-screen printing. Not Printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

  In the second embodiment, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (integrated on one semiconductor chip 314bx) has a package made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED decreases.

  Even in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance or the like according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are solidly coated with white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center causes reflection of light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the performance operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the rate.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full-color LED. The areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all by silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 has components corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. The number and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are not printed at all by silk printing, while the configuration of the countermeasure for reducing the reflectance or the like according to the second embodiment is left. A full cover is placed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b. -Part numbers (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the area (yellow solid line) indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are printed by silk printing, respectively. In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the part numbers (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are provided. The difference is that the area (yellow solid line) indicating the position to be arranged is printed as silk printing, respectively.

  The white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is like this. In addition, due to the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the forward reflectance of the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the upward direction side of the performance operation unit 300). Can be increased. Therefore, when the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing, the silk-printing printed in black causes the LED to emit light from the full-color LED. The reflectance on the mounting surface decreases, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. In addition, various ornaments provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the plate upper left ornament 271, the plate lower left ornament 281, the plate upper right ornament 276, the plate lower right ornament 286, the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91). The plate center upper decoration body 312a, the plate center lower decoration body 312b, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the side window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453) are as described above. Although it is formed in a translucent milky white color, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face). In some cases, the player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of various decorative substrates provided in various decorative bodies provided in the. Then, there arises a problem that the player visually recognizes the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has nothing to do with the game, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed. , Different from black, by printing in a light yellow color on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface, an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, a region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged). ) Or finding the number identifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) can be difficult.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance or the like according to the second embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are silk-printed, and different from black, a light yellow. By printing with, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance and the like according to the second embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same operational effect as the configuration of the countermeasures for the reflectance and the like according to the first embodiment. That is, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number that specifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the auxiliary line that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is arranged). In addition, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

  In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed, and different from black (When printing in yellow), a polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and the connector that does not have white do not emit white light because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface decreases due to the light emission of the full color LED. The LED mounting surface is not mounted at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, but in the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED, the region corresponding to the member arranged in front is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed by silk solid printing with a solid yellow line (not shown), and a part number corresponding to the electronic component or the connector is provided in the vicinity of this region. Is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

[Comparison between Countermeasure Structure for Reducing Reflectance According to First Embodiment and Countermeasure Structure for Reducing Reflectance According to Third Embodiment]
As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reduction in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs and a full-color LED. The area indicating the positions of the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the area where the LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax that configures the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk printed near these areas. Each print is printed in yellow (or black). Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b, as described above, the area corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b has a silk area. It is printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as printing, and the part numbers corresponding to full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing near these areas. Has been done.

  In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 has a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. , And a region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax forming the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Areas indicating positions where electronic parts such as various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing (not shown) by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are located near these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, a region corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED center mounting substrate 314 LED mounting surface 314x is silk-screened. Not printed as yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 are printed respectively, and part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are silk-printed near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 171 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a full-color LED, hdLED1. ~ The part number corresponding to hdLED10 is a foil removal character (that is, a removal character formed by removing a copper foil around the wiring pattern which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed ( FIG. 171 (c) shows only the letters without foil foil LED7 as the part number corresponding to hdLED7 which is a full color LED. A foil stripping area excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a wiring pattern is formed In the (copper plane), excluding the terminals and the wiring pattern, in the region formed by removing the copper foil (FIG. 171 (c), only the foil removal region LSLK7 is shown as a region corresponding to the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED. .)), And the foil-removed region and the foil-removed character are covered with a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Specifically, the regions indicating the positions of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b as foil stripping regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, respectively, and the foil stripping is performed. Near the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, LED1 to LED10 which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as blank characters, respectively. The foil-removed region and the foil-removed character are covered with a white resist which is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The wiring pattern that forms the characters without the foil is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region showing a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed on each terminal (not shown) and a not-illustrated foil stripping region (not shown) except a wiring pattern (not shown). A layer (copper plane) except the terminals and the wiring pattern, which is formed by removing the copper foil), and the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is not shown in the vicinity of this area. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character that is formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it).

  The LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist. Each of the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white) of the package, and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of the same color). In other words, it is an electronic component that has a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b (is solidly coated). The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1 It is possible to perform each full-color LED for each of LED elements that emit red (R), green (G), and blue (B). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as a test pad (or a through hole) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is formed in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. In other words, in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil around make. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who makes an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe and the check pin (not shown) are electrically connected and electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 172, a constant current drive circuit 402bax forming the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, resistors Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating positions for arranging electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistors are printed by silk solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), respectively, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are provided in the vicinity of these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, a region showing the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 172 (a)) on the lower left side decorative substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 172 (a)), which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the 402b, and in the vicinity of and above the area LSLKa. Is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as a solid yellow line (or a solid black line). Then, the areas indicating the positions of the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd as silk printing (see FIG. 172 (a)). Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively, and the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are provided on the right side in the vicinity of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 172 (a)) corresponding to the above are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. There is.

  Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has no white color. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of resin having any one of black color, brown color, and blue color. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a reduced reflectance due to the light emission of a full-color LED, the LED non-mounting surface Implemented in.

  Even in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are solidly coated with a white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b increases the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Is able to.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 has hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. The corresponding part number is formed as a foil strip character (that is, a blank letter that is formed by forming a letter with the wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it). In addition, the regions showing the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are the terminals (not shown) and the foil removal region excluding the wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, the terminals in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed). And the wiring pattern except for the copper foil, which is formed as a region), and the L of the decorative substrate 314 on the plate center is formed. WHITE resists areafill to D mounting surface 314x and its foil vent area and the foil outline characters are covered respectively. Specifically, the regions indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed as the foil removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, respectively, and these foil removals are performed. In the vicinity of the areas HSLK1 to HSLK10, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs, are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 as blank characters, respectively, The foil-removed region and the foil-removed characters are covered with a white resist which is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the central upper decorative substrate 314. The wiring pattern that forms the characters without the foil is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, a region indicating a position where the connector HCN is arranged is formed on each terminal (not shown) and a foil stripping region (not shown) excluding a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a wiring pattern is formed). A layer (copper plane) except for each terminal and wiring pattern, which is formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil), and the part number corresponding to the connector HCN is not shown in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it).

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the plate center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin with a white package (a color that is recognized to be the same as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of a color recognized as the same as that of the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (painted solid). A full-color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED center surface decorative board 314x of the LED mounting surface 314x (for example, 1 It is possible to perform each full-color LED for each of LED elements that emit red (R), green (G), and blue (B). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as a test pad (or a through hole) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is formed in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. In other words, in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), characters are made with the wiring pattern that is copper foil and its surroundings. It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who makes an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe and the check pin (not shown) are electrically connected and electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax forming the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors, etc. The areas indicating the positions where electronic parts are arranged are printed by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown as silk-screen printing, and the part numbers corresponding to electronic parts near these areas are shown as silk-screen printing. Not Printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

  In the third embodiment, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (integrated on one semiconductor chip 314bx) has a package made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED decreases.

  Even in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are solidly coated with white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center causes reflection of light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the performance operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the rate.

  As described above, in the configuration of the measure for reducing the reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a full-color LED. The area indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 has components corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. The number and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, whereas the configuration of the countermeasure for reducing the reflectance or the like according to the third embodiment is left. A full cover is placed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side decorative substrate 402b. -The part numbers corresponding to the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are foil stripped characters (that is, the letters are made with the wiring pattern that is the copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and the copper foil around it is formed. Regions where the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, are arranged are shown as blank characters), and the foil-punched region (that is, the layer in which the wiring pattern is formed) excluding the terminals (not shown) and the wiring pattern (not shown). In the (copper plane), a white resist that is formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil, excluding each terminal and wiring pattern), and that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Covers the foil stripping area and the foil stripping characters, respectively. On the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314, the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are foil-printed characters (that is, the characters are printed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed) It is formed as a blank character formed by pulling out the copper foil around it and the area showing the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is a foil punched area excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (That is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, except for the terminals and the wiring pattern, the region formed by removing the copper foil), and the LED mounting on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The foil-removed area and the foil-removed character are respectively formed by the white resist solidly coated on the surface 314x. They differ in that they are covered.

  The white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is like this. In addition, due to the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the forward reflectance of the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the upward direction side of the performance operation unit 300). Can be increased. Therefore, when the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing, the silk-printing printed in black causes the LED to emit light from the full-color LED. The reflectance on the mounting surface decreases, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. In addition, various ornaments provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the plate upper left ornament 271, the plate lower left ornament 281, the plate upper right ornament 276, the plate lower right ornament 286, the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91). The plate center upper decoration body 312a, the plate center lower decoration body 312b, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the side window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453) are as described above. Although it is formed in a translucent milky white color, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face). In some cases, the player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of various decorative substrates provided in various decorative bodies provided in the. Then, there arises a problem that the player visually recognizes the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has nothing to do with the game, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED which has no relation to the game for the player is formed as a foil-cut character, and the player does not have the game at all. A full-color LED is formed by forming a region indicating a position where a full-color LED having no relation is arranged as a foil-extracting region and covering each of the foil-extracting characters and the foil-extracting region with a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface. The wiring pattern of the LED, the foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged), the number identifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED), Are made of copper foil to make them the same color, and the white color formed on the LED mounting surface By being covered with a gyst, a foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) is found, or a number identifying the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED). ) Can be difficult to find.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED which has no relation to the game for the player is formed as a foil-cut character, and the player does not have the game at all. A full-color LED is formed by forming a region indicating a position where a full-color LED having no relation is arranged as a foil-extracting region and covering each of the foil-extracting characters and the foil-extracting region with a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the LED.

  Even in the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance according to the third embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same operational effects as those of the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance according to the first embodiment. That is, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number for specifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the foil-removed area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged). In addition, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reflectance reduction according to the third embodiment, the step of silk printing on the LED mounting surface can be omitted. The manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reduction of reflectance according to the third embodiment, in the foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, when the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged is formed as the foil removal area). The polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and the connector that does not have white do not emit light of the full-color LED because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced due to the emission of the full-color LED. The LED mounting surface is not mounted at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, but in the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED, the region corresponding to the member arranged in front is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, a region showing the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is a foil stripping region (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane ), Except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as a region formed by removing a copper foil), and a part number corresponding to an electronic component or a connector is formed in the vicinity of this region (not shown). That is, in a layer (copper plane) in which a wiring pattern is formed, a character is formed by a wiring pattern which is a copper foil, and a surrounding copper foil is extracted to form a character.

[Comparison between Countermeasures against Reflection Decrease etc. according to the first embodiment and Countermeasure against Countermeasures against reflectivity decrease according to the Fourth Embodiment]
As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the reduction in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs and a full-color LED. The area indicating the positions of the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the area where the LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax that configures the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk printed near these areas. Each print is printed in yellow (or black). Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b, as described above, the area corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b has a silk area. It is printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as printing, and the part numbers corresponding to full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing near these areas. Has been done.

  In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 has a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. , And a region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax forming the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Areas indicating positions where electronic parts such as various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing (not shown) by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are located near these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, a region corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED center mounting substrate 314 LED mounting surface 314x is silk-screened. Not printed as yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 are printed respectively, and part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are silk-printed near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 173 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a full-color LED, hdLED1. The white resist removal character using the white resist of which the part number corresponding to ~ hdLED10 is applied twice (FIG. 173 (c) shows only the white resist removal character as the part number corresponding to hdLED7 which is a full-color LED. ), And a region showing the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is a white resist removal region using a double-coated white resist (FIG. 173 (c) shows a full-color LED hdLED7). Only the white resist removed region LSLK7 is shown as a region corresponding to. It has been made. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the white resists coated twice, and the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is made of white resist. That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with white resist as the first coating of the white resist coated twice. Then, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is a region showing the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be arranged as the second of the white resists that have been coated twice (predetermined pin number arrangement). The white resist removal area LSLK7 as the area corresponding to the full-color LED hdLED7 shown in FIG. 173 (c) includes the fifth pin arrangement of the full-color LED hdLED7. A notch portion is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark to be designated.) Is masked as white resist cut-out regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, and is left in the vicinity of these white resist cut-out regions LSLK1 to LSLK10. Or above, full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hd In a state where the ED10 with a corresponding part numbers LED1~LED10 is masked as a white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 402bx on the left side under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, but the entire surface is covered by the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist is formed. By covering the entire area except the area masked by the resist, the masked area is recessed as a concave portion, and the areas showing the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are white resist removal areas LSLK1 to LSLK10. In addition to being formed, full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and corresponding part numbers LED1 to LED10 are formed as white resist-free characters.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are the same. Since it is adopted, the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, and through the white resist of the second layer, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is attached. When the underlayer (the copper foil portion and the area excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter) is seen, the white resist of the first layer looks pale. That is, by looking at the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b through the white resist of the second layer, it is possible to identify the white resist omitted characters in the white resist of the first layer. ing.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region showing the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a part corresponding to the connector LDLCN is provided in the vicinity of this region. The numbers are formed as characters without white resist (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same. Light and shade occur in the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer, and when the underlayer of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the first layer The white resist in the eyes will appear light. As a result, when the underside of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer white resist, the white resist removal region in the first layer white resist can be identified. Has become.

  Since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal region in the first layer white resist, and the second resist The refractive index of light of the white resist of the layer changes. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist are identified. Is able to.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. Each of the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white) of the package, and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of the same color). In other words, it is an electronic component that has a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b (is solidly coated). The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1 It is possible to perform each full-color LED for each of LED elements that emit red (R), green (G), and blue (B). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as a test pad (or a through hole) connected to a wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is formed in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. Is formed as. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who makes an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe and the check pin (not shown) are electrically connected and electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 174, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 174, the constant current drive circuit 402bax that constitutes the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, A region indicating a position where electronic components such as Rg and various distributed resistors (not shown) are arranged is formed as a white resist removal region using a double-coated white resist like the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. At the same time, the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are formed in the vicinity of these areas as white resist-free characters using a double-coated white resist, like the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. . Specifically, first, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the white resists coated twice, and the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is white. It is covered with a resist (that is, the white resist is solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first time of the double-coated white resist). Then, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is, for example, a second area of the double-coated white resist and is an area (position of a predetermined pin number) indicating a position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged. 174. The white resist removal area LSLKa as an area corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax shown in FIG. 174 includes the first pin and the 36th pin of the constant current drive circuit 402bax. A notch portion is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark for instructing the arrangement.) Is masked as a white resist removal region LSLKa, and a constant current is provided above these white resist removal region LSLKa and upward. IC1 (see FIG. 174 (a)), which is a part number corresponding to the drive circuit 402bax, is a white resist. In a state that is masked as can characters, the whole of the LED non-mounting surface 402by the left under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, similarly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, but the first layer The entire surface is covered with the white resist, and the entire surface is covered with the exception of the area masked by the white resist of the second layer, so that the masked area is depressed as a concave portion and corresponds to the constant current drive circuit 402bax. The white resist removal region LSLKa is formed as a region to be opened, and IC1 which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax is formed as a white resist removal character.

  In addition, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a white resist (not shown) showing a region where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged. The white resist removal characters R1, R2, which are formed as a removal area and have a part number corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, are not shown in the vicinity of this area. Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) formed as R3 are formed as white resist removal characters (not shown). In the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region showing the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is provided in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as a white resist removal character (not shown).

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are the same. Since the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, the LED non-mounting surface of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b passes through the white resist of the second layer. When the underlayer of 402 by (the copper foil portion and the area excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter) is seen, the white resist of the first layer looks light. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removal characters formed on the white resist of the first layer can be identified. It is possible to identify the white resist removal area.

  In addition, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist, The refractive index of light of the white resist of the second layer changes. As a result, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removal character and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist are identified. You can do it.

  Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has no white color. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of resin having any one of black color, brown color, and blue color. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a reduced reflectance due to the light emission of a full-color LED, the LED non-mounting surface Implemented in.

  Even in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are solidly coated with white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b increases the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Is able to.

  In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 173 (b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 has hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. The corresponding part number is formed as a white resist removal character using a double-coated white resist, and the region showing the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged uses the double-coated white resist. It is formed as a white resist removal region. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is the first of the white resists coated twice, and the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is made of white resist. That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist as the first coating of the double-coated white resist. Then, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center is a region showing the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged as the second of the white resists coated twice (predetermined pin number is arranged). For example, the white resist removal region HSLK7 as a region corresponding to the hLED7 that is a full-color LED includes a notch mark that indicates the arrangement of the fifth pin of the hLED7 that is a full-color LED. The notch is formed at the corresponding position) as the white resist removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, and hLED1 which is a full-color LED in the vicinity of these white resist removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 and to the right. ~ LED which is a part number corresponding to hLED10 ~LED10 is in a state of being masked as white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the disc center on the decorative substrate 314 is covered by a white resist. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist is formed. By covering the whole area except the area masked by the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is the white resist removal area HSLK1 to HSLK10. In addition to being formed, hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs and LED1 to LED10 which are part numbers corresponding to them are formed as white resist-free characters.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are the same. Since it is adopted, the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, and through the white resist of the second layer, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 Looking at the groundwork, the white resist of the first layer looks light. That is, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removal characters in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. ing.

  It should be noted that the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate on the plate center 314 has a region showing the position where the connector HCN is arranged as a white resist removal region (not shown), and parts corresponding to the connector HCN are provided in the vicinity of this region. The numbers are formed as characters without white resist (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same. Light and shade occur in the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer, and when the underlayer of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the first layer The white resist in the eyes looks pale. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer white resist, it is possible to identify the white resist removal region in the first layer white resist. Has become.

  Since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center, the white resist removal character and the white resist removal region in the first layer white resist, and the second resist The refractive index of light of the white resist of the layer changes. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer white resist, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist are identified. Is able to.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the plate center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin with a white package (a color that is recognized to be the same as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural). It is made of a resin of a color recognized as the same as that of the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the plate center is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (painted solid). A full-color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers the whole (solid coating) are mounted. Thus, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of full-color LEDs. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, a lighting inspection is individually performed on the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED center surface decorative substrate 314 LED mounting surface 314x (for example, 1 It is possible to perform each full-color LED for each of LED elements that emit red (R), green (G), and blue (B). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as a test pad (or a through hole) connected to a wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is formed in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. Is formed as. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who makes an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, so that the probe and the check pin (not shown) are electrically connected and electrically connected to each other, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax forming the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various dispersed resistors not shown. Areas indicating positions for arranging electronic components such as are formed as white resist removal areas using a double-coated white resist as with the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and these areas are also formed. Similar to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, a part number corresponding to an electronic component is formed in the vicinity as a white-resist-extracted character using a double-coated white resist.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are the same. Since the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, the LED non-mounting surface of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is passed through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the base of 314y, the white resist of the first layer looks light. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer white resist, the white resist removal characters formed on the first layer white resist can be identified. In addition to the above, the white resist removal area can be identified.

  Since the white resist is applied twice to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist, The refractive index of light of the white resist of the second layer changes. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer white resist, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist are identified. You can do it.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative board 314 on the plate center do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip does not have the white color. The package is made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED decreases.

  Even in the configuration of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are solidly coated with white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative plate 314 on the plate center causes reflection of light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the performance operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the rate.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full-color LED. The areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all by silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 has components corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. The number and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, whereas the configuration of the countermeasure for reducing the reflectance or the like according to the fourth embodiment is left. A full cover is placed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side decorative substrate 402b. -The part numbers corresponding to the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed as white resist removal characters using a white resist that is painted twice, and the area showing the position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is twice. It is formed as a white resist removal area using a white resist for coating, and further, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is coated twice with part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. Is formed as a white resist removal character using the white resist of the above, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is formed as the white resist removal area using the double-coated white resist. Different in that .

  The white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is like this. In addition, due to the white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the forward reflectance of the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the upward direction side of the performance operation unit 300). Can be increased. Therefore, when the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing, the silk-printing printed in black causes the LED to emit light from the full-color LED. The reflectance on the mounting surface decreases, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. In addition, various ornaments provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the plate upper left ornament 271, the plate lower left ornament 281, the plate upper right ornament 276, the plate lower right ornament 286, the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91). The plate center upper decoration body 312a, the plate center lower decoration body 312b, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the side window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453) are as described above. Although it is formed in a translucent milky white color, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face). In some cases, the player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of various decorative substrates provided in various decorative bodies provided in the. Then, there arises a problem that the player visually recognizes the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has nothing to do with the game, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal character using a white resist with a double-coated part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player. In addition to the above, the full-color LED mounting position is formed by forming the region showing the position where the full-color LED has no relation to the game for the player as a white resist removal region using the white resist that is applied twice. It is difficult to find the white resist removal area (that is, the area showing the position where the full-color LED is arranged) that indicates that, or the number that specifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED). You can

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal character using a white resist with a double-coated part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player. In addition to the above, the region showing the position where the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, is formed as a white resist removal region using a double-coated white resist, so that the full-color LED emits light. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same operational effect as the configuration of the countermeasures for the reflectance reduction in the first embodiment. In other words, a white resist removal area that uses a number that specifies the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and a double-coated white resist that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the position where the full-color LED is arranged). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the area) and to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

  In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the step of silk printing can be omitted for each of the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface. By reducing the number of steps, it is possible to contribute to lowering the substrate manufacturing cost.

  In the fourth embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and the connector that does not have white do not emit white light because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface decreases due to the light emission of the full color LED. The LED mounting surface is not mounted at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in that region. In this case, regions showing positions for arranging electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) to be mounted on the LED mounting surface are formed as terminals (not shown) and white resist removal regions (not shown), and in the vicinity of this region. In addition, a part number corresponding to an electronic component such as a resistor and a capacitor (not shown) or a connector, which is mounted on the LED mounting surface, is formed as a white resist removal character (not shown).

  In addition, in the fourth embodiment, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the white resist of the first layer entirely covers the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface. By covering the entire area except the area masked by the second layer of white resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED or connector is arranged is formed as the white resist removal area. In addition to the above, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED or the connector is formed as the white resist extraction character, but the white resist extraction region and the white resist extraction character may be formed by using another method. . For example, after the white resist is solidly coated once or plural times on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, and before the white resist dries, a region showing the position where the full-color LED or connector is arranged. And a plate showing a part number corresponding to a full-color LED or a connector to form white resist-free characters, a LED mounting surface of a decorative substrate, and After the white resist is solidly coated once or multiple times on the LED non-mounting surface, after this white resist is dried, the area showing the position where the full-color LED or connector is arranged is set as the white resist removal area by laser irradiation. While forming, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and connector is white And a method of forming as outline characters.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with various substrates which are supplied from a power source from a power source substrate and can control the illumination (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (FIG. 8)). By the way, in the game machine, a line for transmitting a power source and a line for transmitting a control signal are routed to various boards, and the length of the line becomes long, so that various boards may be affected by external noise and malfunction. was there.

  Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine including a front frame configured to cover a window opening the game board back and forth with a see-through protection plate (for example, JP-A-2016-192989 (paragraph [0014]). , And Fig. 1)). By increasing the size of the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides of the front frame is reduced, and the decorative substrates accommodated in the left and right sides are also strip-shaped. Further, by providing the display device and the movable body on the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board becomes large, so that the decorative substrate provided on the game board also becomes a strip plate. However, when the light emission control means for controlling the light emission means is provided on the strip-shaped decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a region for drawing out the wiring from the light emission control means to the light emission means.

  Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine that is provided in a standby position below the display screen of the effect display device, and that includes a movable accessory device that operates during effect (for example, JP-A-2005-058064). Publication (paragraph [0040], FIG. 4, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9)). In the movable accessory device, a decorative substrate on which a light emitting means facing the back surface of the light emitting portion (lens) on the design surface is mounted is attached. However, there is a possibility that the player may visually recognize, through the light emitting unit, a number for identifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate and an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, which has no relation to the game.

[12. Game contents]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 131 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, it is driven into the upper part in the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. In addition, the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously recorded in one minute. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B contacts the obstacle nail N. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill (not shown) that rotates by abutting the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view from the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N, The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center role object 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage 2503.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2503, the part is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that it is received in the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When the game balls B are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first starting opening 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side unit 2200 and the obstacle nail N bring it to the center side in the left-right direction, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Alternatively, it may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B struck in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right hit). , Is discharged to the upper part of the gate unit 2300 through the right side of the center accessory 2500. In addition to the gate portion 2003 of the gate unit 2300, this portion is provided with the second starting opening 2004 and the general winning opening 2001 of the center accessory 2500, and passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

  Then, when the game ball B hit to the right passes through the gate unit 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the result of the drawn ordinary lottery is "normal win", the second start opening which is closed. 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second start opening 2004. Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are delivered from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Be paid out.

  In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0. 0.01 to 60 seconds, which is also commonly called a variable time). The suggestion of this ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time.

  If the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 and the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is held until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is finished. Further, the maximum number of ordinary lottery results to be held is up to four, and if the number is more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, the number is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 (for example, “big hit”, A lottery of special lottery results that generate "middle hit", "small hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit" is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time) Note that the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and is selected by lottery. The special lottery results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time saving (time saving) hit", " Probability Change Short Time Hit "," Probability Change Time Short Per ", and the like.

  The special lottery results (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are the special lottery results that cause the advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special variation time, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 becomes ready to receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 while the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of the game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 can accept the game ball B, by allowing the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 to receive the game ball B, many The game ball B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is "small hit", the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is a game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern of closing the open state after accepting is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) is reached after the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received. If any one of the following conditions is satisfied, that is, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are received in the first big prize hole 2005 or the second big prize hole 2006, the game ball B cannot be accepted. The open / close pattern for closing (one open / close pattern is called one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if "2R jackpot" is 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In the case of "big hit", change the probability that special lottery results such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game ("probability change"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. ("Short-time winning") There is a "hit".

  In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 to the suggestion of the special lottery result selected by the lottery, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result can be started until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Pending The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are set. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 directly controls the suggestion of the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is such that, in a state in which three picture strings each consisting of a plurality of pictures are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, each picture string is changed and the variably displayed picture string is displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective three rows of the stopped and displayed picture rows are stopped and displayed so that the pictures of the three picture rows are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “miss”, after the three picture rows are stopped and each picture is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is (Time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by the lottery. A player participation type effect in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated can be performed. In the player participation type production, the operation ring drive motor 342 can be used to rotate, vibrate, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation button lift drive motor. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 so as to be conspicuous, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

  Also, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, and the front movable unit 2600, the lower movable movable unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the upper rear. By appropriately using the movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like, it is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player with various effects, and the player's game It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform an operation to be operated, a correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is requested to be pressed, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates the same. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the table effect unit of the table unit 2000 on the game board 5 according to the special lottery result selected by the lottery. 2600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 and the like can be appropriately used to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, and the like. It is possible to entertain the player with various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  By the way, conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a plurality of game areas in which a game is played by driving a game medium by a player's operation and a predetermined gauge arrangement in the game area. Obstacle nails and a plurality of entrances (general winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large opening that allows the game medium to be received in the game area and gives a privilege according to the acceptance of the game medium) Prize hole, accessory prize hole), V prize hole, etc.). Then, when the game medium is received at the entrance, benefits (payout of the game medium, occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous, etc.) are given, so that the game medium is delivered to the entrance. As it is accepted, the operation of driving the game medium can be enjoyed.

  As this type of gaming machine, a plurality of units are arranged movably in the vertical direction between the vicinity of the upper edge and the vicinity of the center in the front view game area, are rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and project outward. There has been proposed a device including the rotating ornament (1) (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-279548). In the technique of this document, in a normal state, the rotary ornament is located near the upper edge, and the rotary ornament is lowered near the center in accordance with the game state that changes as a game is played in the game area. By rotating, the plurality of rotating ornaments rotate in a state of protruding outward, and the whole becomes large, which can make the player frighten, and suggest the arrival of a chance to the player.

  However, in the technique like the above-mentioned document, in a normal state in which the rotation is stopped, the plurality of rotary ornaments visible from the player side are projected outward by the rotation, so that the whole becomes large. In addition, the appearance does not change significantly, so that some players may get tired of the effect by the plurality of rotary decorations at an early stage, and the enjoyment of the effect may reduce the interest of the game. It was

[13. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 153 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 177. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175, and FIG. 177 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart showing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and subsequently, the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process will be described.

[13-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether to generate a reach (out of reach) when the big hit game state is not generated For the random number for reach determination to be used for the determination, and for the variable display pattern to be used for determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers, big hit symbols for use in determining big hit symbols that are derived and displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 when generating a big hit game state, and this big hit Random number for determining the initial value of the big hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the symbol, small hit function display unit when generating the gaming state Random numbers for small hit symbols to be used for determining the small hit symbols derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device for 400, for use in determining the initial value of the random numbers for this small hit symbol Random numbers for initial value determination for small hit symbols are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol used for determining whether to open or close a movable piece that allows the game ball in the second starting port 2004 to be opened and closed, and this normal symbol determination Normal to be used to determine the initial value of the random number for the random number for determining the initial value per symbol determination, and normally to be used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 Random numbers and the like for the pattern variation display pattern are prepared.

  Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random number is updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main random number circuit with built-in main control first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value at a high speed in advance based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. After extracting the other values in the specified numerical range one after another, and after extracting all the values in the specified numerical range, one value in the specified numerical range is extracted again and the main control is performed. Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a big hit determination random number. It is supposed to be set as.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one and the count is incremented. This counter normally counts up from the random number for initial value determination for the symbol determination to the maximum value, and then counts from the minimum value to the random number for determination of the initial value for the regular symbol determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an “initial value updating type counter”. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for randomly selecting a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination. .

  In the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, or the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by considering the various information stored in the table as numerical values and calculating the sum is the checksum value stored in the power-down process (power-off) on the main control side. When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when it does not match the (sum value), the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is normally stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The ID code is taken out, and the same fixed value is always set from the fixed numerical value range of the counter which normally updates the random number for symbol determination based on the taken out ID code. Perform initial value derivation to output a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, as for the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by the execution of the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination is derived by using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored in the ID code, and by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control internal RAM, the ID code The second security measure of deriving the same fixed value on the basis of the above and the two-step security measure of are taken to prevent analysis.

  Here, an advantage that an ID code is taken out from a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and the taken ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination will be described. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it, and uses an ID code previously stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is unique for identifying an individual. Since they are provided with reference numerals, they are completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a 'included in the other game board 5'. In other words, in the other game board 5 ', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hitting determination random number and the normal symbol hitting judgment value match is completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5 ′, that is, the other pachinko machine 1 ′, and thus disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary blackout is generated at each of the obtained predetermined intervals and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 of the gate unit 2300 at each of the predetermined intervals, the movable piece is opened and closed to the second start opening 2004. Cannot generate a game state in which it can be accepted.

[13-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after ending the subroutine. It indicates an address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, the main control side power-on process is performed. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control internal RAM can be updated.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " WDT control register "), sets a timer setting value, starts the main control built-in WDT, and resets the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the main control built-in WDT starts timing, and the watchdog timer clear register ( Hereinafter, the WDT clear register will be referred to as "). If the timer clear setting value is not set, the main control built-in WDT forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the WDT with built-in main control is activated and clocking is started, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the time counted reaches the time set by the timer set value, The timekeeping by the WDT with main control is cleared and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the processing of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and restarting the time measurement again. Can be monitored.

  Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In the power outage clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not the power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is input. The voltage does not increase immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e inputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e inputs the power failure warning signal. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been done.

  Following step S14, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines to perform the RAM clear when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is performed, and the RAM clear switch 1310f is determined to be operated.

  When determining in step S16 that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S16 that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20). That is, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state capable of executing the RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and game information related to games such as probability variation, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls). Is a flag indicating whether or not to erase various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter), and is set to a value of 1 when the various information is erased and a value of 0 when the various information is not erased. . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Following step S18 or step S20, the main control MPU 1310a performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut down, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as the power failure notification when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the power outage notification signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power outage notification signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control built-in WDT forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on process again. A detailed description will be given later of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed after the wait time waiting process in step S22.

  In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the power failure advance notice signal is not input, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when erasing various information and a value 0 when not erasing various information. In step S26, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that various information is not erased (step S28). This checksum regards various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the sum thereof.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control MPU 1310a uses the calculated checksum value (sum value) as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores various information, a checksum value (sum value), and game backup information such as the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main power supply-side power-off process to be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been done, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power cut-off processing is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , Will be described later in detail.

  In the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off processing has been normally completed, the main-control MPU 1310a determines that the main control internal RAM is to be restored when power is restored. A work area is set (step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power recovery" refers to a state in which the power is turned on after being turned off, a state in which power is restored after a power outage or a momentary power failure, and fraudulent means (for example, a fraudulent person puts on the hem of an arm). The main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device), the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset, and a state after that is also included.

  Following step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various processes thereafter, so that the main control side power-off process, which will be described later, is normally terminated and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control internal RAM is cleared, as will be described later.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S26, the main control MPU 1310a determines that when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when various information is erased, or in the determination of step S30, When the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1 (value 0). That is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off processing has not been normally terminated, the entire area of the main-control built-in RAM is cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a performs by writing the value 0 to the main control internal RAM. The main control MPU 1310a may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Further, the main control MPU 1310a uses the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f to instruct RAM clear, and erases various information, when the thumb values do not match, or the main control side. When the power-off process is not normally terminated, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and the normal symbol-per-judgment random number is updated based on the taken-out ID code. The initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter is performed, and this fixed value is used as the normal value for determining the normal symbol for determining the initial value of the random number for determining the normal symbol described above. Set to a random number for decision.

  Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the ROM with built-in main control and setting this initial information in the work area of the RAM with built-in main control. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and, for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 633, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels for the peripheral control board 1510). Corresponding to the above), the transmission serial port prescaler is set with the communication speed and the presence / absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set with the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU 1310a performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in the test organization of the gaming machine, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

  Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, the big hit determination random number used for determining whether to generate the big hit game state is stored in the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a in order to be updated by the hardware. Settings such as latching and obtaining random numbers are performed, and the hard random number setting register is set to activate the hard random number circuit with main control. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the predetermined value is determined in advance. When all the values within the specified numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical range is set at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Other values in are extracted one after another without duplication. Note that the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when the latch signal is input. The random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a big hit determination random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control MPU 1310a sets the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. A power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, which are classified into Remember. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on state command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command will be transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given later of the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S42.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S54). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage becomes the power failure warning voltage or less, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. To be done. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When determining in step S54 that the main control MPU 1310a does not input the power failure advance notice signal, the main control MPU 1310a performs the non-winning random number updating process (step S56). In the non-win / win random number updating process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the winning / judging determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. The random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-win / win random number updating process.

  After step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an input of the power failure advance notice signal. Then, step S54 to step S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S54 that the main control MPU 1310a has received the power failure advance notice signal, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of various information including the game information and other information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting the power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing as the processing that started the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clearing processing in step S14 is performed.

  Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops, for example, the drive signals output to the various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting opening solenoid 2514, the first attacker solenoid 2515, the second attacker solenoid 2516, and the like ( Step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum regards the game information in the work area of the main control internal RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, and calculates the total thereof.

  Following step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). Since the setting of the RAM access prohibition makes it impossible to access the RAM with built-in main control, it is possible to prevent the content of the RAM with built-in main control from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the time count by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on process again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power restoration.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off processing is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraud.

  Here, a description will be given of the point that the presence / absence of a power failure advance notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence or absence of the power failure advance notice signal is not determined in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 after the wait time waiting process in step S22 and the subsequent process is performed Described below are the problems.

  As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 162 when the power from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. The charged electric charge is applied as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of power failure or momentary power failure. That is, even if the power from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V, so that the island in the game hall is The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the facility power is cut off. This is when the player is playing a game, that is, while performing main processing on the main control side or timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later, a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs and the island facility of the game hall is installed. When the power supply from the power source is cut off, the main control side power-off processing can be surely completed.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the waiting time until the system for performing the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted) (boot timer: in the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set.) If a momentary power failure or power failure occurs immediately before the standby time is reached, the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the charged electric charge is applied as DC +5 V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side described later is performed. Even if the contents of the main control internal RAM are updated by the timer interrupt processing, the main control side power supply is turned on. It may become impossible to complete when processing main control side power-off during the process. For this reason, the value when the checksum is calculated based on the content of the RAM with built-in main control is not stored, and the power-on process on the main control side is started again when power is restored.

  Then, at the time of power recovery this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and then, in step S28, the main control internal RAM When the value calculated as the checksum based on the contents of the above is compared with the value stored in the main control internal RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum value should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when power is restored, the RAM clear switch 1310f is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if there is no intention of a RAM clerk such as a clerk in the game hall to operate the RAM clear switch 1310f. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information will be erased (cleared).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24 again, the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure advance notice signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Although the value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before performing the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the main value as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the content of the main control internal RAM (game information) is not changed at all.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, the step When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input, By repeating the determination of step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. I can not, game information and other information (for example, the value of the counter for the main prize ball number information output determination Various information including the information) can be prevented from being updated, so as never change occurs in the checksum calculation result. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when restarted, determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

  Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game, the pachinko machine Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, the power supply by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is supplied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the game information by the progress of this game and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) A backup for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control MPU 1310a, which is the process of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power-off process constituted by an infinite loop, When the main control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculated and stored in step S64). Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure stored in the main control RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notice signal is input, the main control internal WDT forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a to reset the contents of the main control internal RAM. While the main control-side power-off processing can be restarted without updating at all, while immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notice signal has not been input, As described above, it is possible to surely complete the power-off process on the main control side within the “power supply securing period during an instantaneous power failure or power failure” of about 7 ms due to hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power from the island facility in the game hall is cut off. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as direct current +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, in the case where the main control side power-off processing cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby processing of step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. If the power failure warning signal is input, the determination in step S24 is made. As long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, by repeating the determination in step S24, the timer clear setting is made in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12. By setting a value and clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT so that the timekeeping cannot be started again, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

  Since the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT by such software, a step after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). The contents of the main control internal RAM (game information, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) are set by blocking the progress of the control flow of starting the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later, by setting the interrupt permission. It is possible to avoid updating various information) including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter). When the power from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or momentary power failure, the contents of the main control internal RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) Various information) (including information indicating the counter value) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of main control internal RAM (game information, and By configuring it in two parts, that is, the part covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter) is not changed at all. , It is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. So that the can.

  Next, description will be made regarding the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, it is indicated that the power is turned on (power recovery). In order to convey, a power-on status command classified into power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize number information output determination counter notification command are created and main control is included as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. The power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2514 and information indicating the driving states of the first attacker solenoid 2515 and the second attacker solenoid 2516. . Here, first, the power-on main control return destination command includes information indicating the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2514 and information indicating the driving states of the first attacker solenoid 2515 and the second attacker solenoid 2516. If not, that is, the problem when the reservation of the command to be transmitted by the power-on main control return destination command at power-on is not set in step S50 will be described.

  For example, the main control board 1310 drives the first attacker solenoid 2515 while the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600. When the first special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 causes the main control built-in RAM in the work area of step S34 to operate. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the drive state of the first attacker solenoid 2515 is started by being restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. The state where the first special winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member is changed to the state where it is opened.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when the power is restored. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit game state as a game state, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed and returned to the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state, the jackpot gaming state. It is not possible to display at which round of the time. That is, for example, a game ball enters the first special winning opening 2005, is detected by the first big winning opening sensor 2512, and the big winning opening 1 count that conveys the number of balls of the game balls entered into the first big winning opening 2005 Even if the main control board 1310 transmits the display command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the display command, the peripheral control board 1510 enters the first special winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number of balls of the played game sphere can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is impossible to display at all which round (that is, how many rounds) of the big hit game state.

  In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the first attacker solenoid 2515 and closes the first special winning opening 2005 when the fourth big round (fourth round) of the big hit game state is finished, for example. By the main control board, the special winning opening 1 closing display command for instructing the transition from the opened state to the closed state (that is, the closing of the first special winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2100 between the rounds) is issued. When the main control board 1310 transmits from the peripheral control board 1510 to the peripheral control board 1510 and starts the 5th round of the big hit game state (the 5th round), the first attacker solenoid 2515 is started to drive the first big winning opening 2005. The effect of shifting from the state closed by the opening / closing member to the state opened (that is, the first special winning opening 2 To send the 05 th round winning opening open the fifth display command to open start) to instruct the from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen for starting the fifth round in the big hit game state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  Further, for example, a screen informing that the game ball is in a game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and is advantageous to the player (for example, the player is notified that the movable piece is open). Screen is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting opening solenoid 2514 to open the movable piece to open the second starting opening. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs in the state where 2004 is opened, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the main control internal RAM in the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area, by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the driving of the starting opening solenoid 2514 is started and the movable piece is closed. So that the transition to the state for closing the second start-up port 2004 by work.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when the power is restored. Then, when power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state and the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of the power recovery. Even if the player can display and return to the display area of the effect display device 1600, a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004 is entered, which indicates that the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the transmitted screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure occurred, and at the time of power restoration, the game ball was received at the second start opening 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. It may be forgotten that it is a possible game state, and in such a case, it is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 as the game state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, since the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored, There was also a problem that the player would not know what kind of game to play.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be promptly restored after the power restoration. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs after that. There was a problem.

  In view of this, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power-on and power recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on The main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above example, in the four big rounds of the big hit game state, When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, from the state where the first attacker solenoid 2515 is driven and the first special winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member, as the return destination of the main control board 1310. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified to the effect that the state is shifted to the open state, the peripheral control board 1510 specifies a screen that indicates that it is the fourth round of the jackpot gaming state (that is, how many rounds it is). Although it is not possible to display the screen indicating) on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the first attacker in the big hit game state. A screen that starts driving the Renoid 2515 and informs that the first big prize hole 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member (for example, "Big hit. The big prize hole is open. Please display a message that tells the player that a ball should be entered. ”) Is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine is restored after the power is restored. It is possible to instruct a game in which a game ball is to be entered into the one big winning opening 2005, and, for example, in the above-described example, the player is in a game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004. In the state of being advantageous to the game, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the drive of the starting opening solenoid 2514 is started as the return destination of the main control board 1310. A screen that tells that the movable piece is opened to open the second start opening 2004 (for example, "The movable piece is open. Enter the game ball into the second start opening." The peripheral control board 1510 displays in the display area of the effect display device 1600 a screen that conveys the message "Please play the game." To the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine, and then the second start after power recovery. A game of entering a game ball into the mouth 2004 can be instructed.

  This allows the main control board 1310 side to finely instruct the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs after that. Can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 is checked. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspecting process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if a checksum based on the contents of the main control internal RAM is calculated in step S28, In the comparison judgment, the checksum values should not match, and the entire area of the main control internal RAM must be cleared in step S38.

  Accordingly, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information. By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, the power-on state command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. In the main control timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, these commands are first transmitted as a power-on state command, then transmitted as a power-on main control return destination command, and subsequently as a power-on main prize ball count. The information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 sends a power-on state command as the first command. It will be transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, the power-on state command operates the RAM clear switch 1310f at the time of power-on (including power-on, power recovery when power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored). Information for instructing that when the RAM is cleared and the above-mentioned information at the time of power-on (including power-on and power-recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Specify the pachinko machine model code and information that indicates which state (probability and time saving state) to recover from among the low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non-time saving state, and high probability non-time saving state. And information to indicate. Here, a problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  The model code of the pachinko machine, to which the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type are respectively created as the pachinko machine 1 (to be precise, the main control board 1310), is the copyright for which work? What kind of game specifications (for example, if probability changes occur, in addition to the game specifications that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is possible to specify whether the game specification (so-called ST machine) or the like) in which the probability variation occurs in the state)).

  In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works may be mixed. Then, the worker on the production line is the main copyright holder for whichever of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of movies A, B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of the work of movie D). Even though the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line.

  Therefore, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is It is not possible to confirm which work copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 belongs to, and even for the copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also not possible to confirm whether the game specification is a type or not, and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine in which if a probability change occurs, that state is maintained until the next big hit game state occurs).

  Accordingly, when the main control board 1310 is mixed in the production line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards for the copyrights of the plurality of kinds of works are mixed. 1310 is mixed and sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, also when the power is restored and power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to send a power-on status command including information indicating the power-on status to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command classified into power-on, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on status The main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

  As a result, the operator of the manufacturing line of the manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspecting step, which is the inspecting step of the manufacturing line, so that the inspection apparatus operates as the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, configuring the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, described above, Max type indicating the model type, middle type, And, a series code for specifying which type is the sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if probability variation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability change with a limited number of changes in the special symbol Based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine etc.) of slipping, and by visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, the main control board 1310 can control the copyright of which work. It is possible to determine which is the model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type) for the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to discriminate whether or not it is a game specification or ST machine in which when a probability variation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs.

  As a result, in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually checking the inspection monitor, the operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification. Can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from decreasing due to the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[13-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 175 and 176.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 177 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control timer interrupt processing which is the present routine, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing is changed to the second register bank. Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

  Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 are turned on according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on according to the normal symbol and the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal electric accessory control process described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmits. Performing time management such as ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 normally receives various commands is input. .. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, the variation time of the variable display pattern or the normal symbol variable display pattern is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes the value 0.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes the value 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection from the second starting opening sensor 2511. A signal, a detection signal from the first special winning opening sensor 2512, a detection signal from the second special winning opening sensor 2513, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, which will be described later. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633, which tells that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing, is read, and the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM is input as input information. Remember. Further, when the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2511 are read, the corresponding starting port winning commands classified as other are transmitted as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Stored in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and the second starting is performed. When there is a detection signal from the mouth sensor 2511, the corresponding start mouth winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  It should be noted that in the present embodiment, when the switch input process is started in a state in which the input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those subjected to the vacant terminal process) is performed. First, it is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has passed, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read in the second time is compared with the result read in the first time. It is determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is treated as if there is no game ball.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the state of being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including the ones subjected to the vacant terminal process) is repeated from the first time to the third time. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, ie, two readings for comparison and two readings for the second to fourth times. Therefore, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2511, the first Detection signal from special winning opening sensor 2512, detection signal from second special winning opening sensor 2513, detection signal from magnetic sensor 3003, RAM clear The reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which informs that the payout control board 633 normally receives the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the switch 1310f and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. Can be increased.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs an input terminal failure monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been subjected to the vacant terminal process is determined based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104 as to whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the vacant terminal process is applied among the input terminals of various input ports is LOW. Based on. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is applied is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a is divided into a notification display indicating that a defect has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. The defective command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned big hit symbol random number and small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, which is updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 176, Also, the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is updated. The random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are respectively updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process to further enhance the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers involved in the winning determination (big hit determination), each time the counter random number updating process is performed, each counter counts up. In addition, the above-mentioned normal symbol per determination random number, normal symbol per determination initial value determination random number is also updated by this winning random number update process.

  For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining the normal symbol is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from the maximum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by one each time this main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol per hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for randomly selecting a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination. .

  In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not included in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 176. The winning random number updating process and the winning random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively. However, each time the interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and If the number of executions of the non-winning random number updating process of step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer of is generated, a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And a small hit symbol initial value determining random number may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56. .

  Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are used. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the first big prize hole 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is 10 balls. Since it has reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to notify that fact, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633. When the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. A command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

  Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls based on the input information. In order to notify that fact, a main prize ball number information output command classified into other is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is obtained by reading the input information from the input information storage area described above and based on this input information, that is, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 provided in the game board 5. , The second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2006, and the like (hereinafter, referred to as "various winning openings provided on the game board 5"). The number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is counted based on the above, and in the prize ball control process of step S108, the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control internal RAM is stored and updated. Has become. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter. To the value of, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. When the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball has reached 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output command is created in order to inform that fact, and as the transmission information. The prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the number of exceeded balls is set as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. It is adapted to store update.

  Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 sends various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame status 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame status 2 command) classified into status displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, the information to inform the payout control board 633 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as output information. Further, the main control MPU 1310a formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a command of 2 bytes (16 bits) (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, And frame state 2 command)), and is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Following step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent activity detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area described above and the detection signal from the first big winning hole sensor 2512 is input when the jackpot is not in the gaming state (the game ball enters the first big winning hole 2005). At the time of performing) or the like, a prize-winning abnormality display command classified into notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114). In this special design and special electric auditors product control processing, the latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is It is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a big hit determination random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance match. (Judgment whether or not to generate a big hit game state (called "special lottery")), or take out the value of the counter that updates the random number for big hit symbols and determine the probability change probability stored in advance in the main control ROM It is determined whether or not the value matches the value (determination as to whether or not a probability change occurs).

  Here, the “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change time) set higher than in a normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, as the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability, and the value is read from the normal time judgment table, whereas the value 31768 to the value in the high probability. 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation time determination table. In this way, in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing of step S114, a big hit determination random number (that is, a random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in ROM in advance. When determining whether or not the stored jackpot determination value matches, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range. Depending on whether or not it is done.

  When these determination results are based on the first starting opening sensor 3002, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect are created, while when the lottery result is based on the second starting opening sensor 2511, Figure 2 Create various commands related to tuning effect, and store it in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and according to the variable display pattern of the determined special symbol, the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the display device, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as big hit related commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1 closing display command, big Winning prize 1 count display command, big hit ending command, and big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, drive to the first attacker solenoid 2515 to open / close the opening / closing member. When the signal output is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the number of times (round) the first special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two, the round of the function display unit 1400 is performed. Point to the 2 round display lamp to turn on the 2 round display lamp of the display unit The signal output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, and when the number of rounds is 15, the 15-round display lamp of the function display unit 1400 is turned on to turn on the 15-round display lamp. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the presence / absence of probability variation in a predetermined color. Then, it is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In the gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol per determination random number is extracted and the gate information is the gate of the main control built-in RAM. Store in the information storage area.

  The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd partitions (4 partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like this. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. Store in a compartment.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is set to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is set to the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is set to the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage, The gate information of the two sections is respectively shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the hold balls. Based on the gate information, the output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for normal symbol determination is extracted from this read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit determination value matches (called "ordinary lottery"). Whether or not to open / close the movable piece is determined based on the result of this determination (the result of the ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is in the opening operation state, and the game ball becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004, which is a game state advantageous to the player. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified in relation to the general symbol synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above as the transmission information is stored. While storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variable display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value previously stored in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric-role effect are created and transmitted. The information is stored in the transmission information storage area as information, and the output of the drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2514 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. When the value of the random number for symbol determination is not the same as the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above. , Create various commands that are related to the general figure synchronization effect, and store them in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information, Set the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 so as to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal pattern variation display pattern, and the output information storage area described above as output information. Remember.

  Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. The main control MPU 1310a, for example, when the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is issued to the payout control board 633. To the starter solenoid 2514 which outputs the drive signal to the first attacker solenoid 2515 which opens and closes the opening and closing member of the first special winning opening 2005 when it is in the big hit game state, and which opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to outputting the driving signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal , Various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as a start opening winning information output signal, etc. 33 or to output.

  Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified by special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified by special figure 2 tuning effect related, and jackpot related, which are created by the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. Various commands (for example, the special winning opening 1 corresponding to the special winning opening count command based on the detection signal from the first special winning opening sensor 2512 when the game ball that entered the first special winning opening 2005 is detected) Count display command), various commands that are classified as power-on, various commands that are classified as related to public figure synchronization performance, various commands that are classified as normal electric figure performance, various commands that are classified as notification display, and status display Various commands classified, various commands related to the test, and other various commands classified to others (for example, the main control board 1310 Whenever the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game balls that have entered the various winning holes provided on the board 5 reaches 10, the main prize number information is used as the main prize number information. A main prize ball number information output command for instructing to transmit the output signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 is stored. One packet of the main serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main circumference serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes various commands as main circumference serial data. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as DC +5 V when a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs. The main-circulation serial transmission port built in the main control MPU 1310a must at least transfer the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register as main-circulation serial data. You can do it. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the power is restored and power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the power is turned on at step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 176. In order to notify that power has been restored in the reserved setting of the command, the power-on status command that is classified as power-on, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter Since a notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, the power-on status command is configured as main-cycle serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The status, mode, and sum value, which are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and then constitute the main control return destination command at power-on. Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in order, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information and set according to the various information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. There are also cases where various commands are stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on state command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command will be transmitted.

  Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT is cleared in step S122 by setting a timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, the main control built-in WDT is restarted, so that the main control built-in WDT is not forced to reset the main control MPU 1310a.

  Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 backs up the above-mentioned backup for storing the game information based on the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off during the progress of the game. It can be completed by executing the process, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off as the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 based on the game information for which the backup process is executed. When the power is turned on, a power-on main control return destination command for instructing the drive state of the starting opening solenoid 2514 and the first attacker solenoid 2515 which are electric drive sources by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to output. In other words, the main control board 1310 sets the main control internal RAM of step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. 175 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power on of step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM when setting the work area, the power-on status command classified as power-on is transmitted in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery). A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, a power-on state command is configured as main-circulation serial data, The status, mode, and sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The status, mode, and sum value are then transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Subsequently, the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value.

  For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery, the return destination of the progress of the game display area of the effect display device 1600. The effect can be displayed in. As a result, when a player is playing a momentary power failure or power outage, and then recovers power, the game state immediately before the power outage or power failure should be promptly restored after power recovery. In addition to being able to perform, the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 for notification, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, that is, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has broken down. Therefore, by returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed.

  Also, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the power-on process shown in the main control side, the entire area of the main control internal RAM must be cleared without fail. Accordingly, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 176, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified as power-on. , Power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM A state in which only three commands, a state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Therefore, in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, As the serial data, the power-on state command is configured, and the status, mode, and sum value are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in order, and subsequently the power-on main control return destination command is configured. The status, mode, and sum value are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output determination at power-on is configured. The data is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in order. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which is included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for identifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type indicating the model type, a copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (For example, if a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (ST Based on the game specification code for specifying the machine) etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process. It has become.

[14. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 153 will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 181. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing the payout control unit power-on process, and FIG. 180 is a payout control unit following FIG. 179. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described.

[14-1. Discharge controller power-on process]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. 178 to 180, the payout control unit power-on process is performed. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU 633aa. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control MPU 633aa performs input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 633aa are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU 633aa performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not increase immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. It Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 of step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

  Following step S508, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 has been operated (step S512). This determination does not instruct to perform the RAM clear when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. While it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined to instruct to perform the RAM clear. Then, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated.

  When determining in step S512 that the payout control MPU 633aa has operated the RAM clear switch 1310f, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU 633aa is in a state capable of executing the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU 633aa has not operated the RAM clear switch 1310f, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prize ball information storage area). The number of prize ball stocks PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area, and the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. The PRDY signal output setting information etc.) indicating whether or not the payout information relating to the payout is to be erased. The flag is set to 1 when the payout information is erased and to 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 633aa.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU 633aa makes settings for permitting access to the payout control internal RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when exiting the subroutine and returning to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to the initial address, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are stacked on the stack from the initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Following step S520, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not erased (step S524). This checksum regards the payout information stored in the payout control RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (power-off) described later. (Step S526). When it is determined in step S526 that the payout control MPU 633aa is in agreement, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored and retained in the payout control internal RAM in the power-off process of the payout control unit to be described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally terminated, and the value is set to 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated.

  In the determination in step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off processing has been normally completed, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the power is restored and the payout control internal RAM is used. The work area of is set (step S530). With this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the payout control built-in ROM) built in the payout control MPU 633aa. The information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the sphere stock number PBS, the actual sphere count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the CR communication information storage area is set, Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. It should be noted that the term "power recovery" includes not only a state in which the power is turned off and a state in which the power is turned on, but also a state in which the power is subsequently restored from a power failure or an instantaneous power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when the payout control MPU 633aa determines to delete the payout information, or in the determination of step S526. When the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not value 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off processing has not been normally terminated, the entire area of the payout control internal RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Following step S532, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the work area of the payout control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 2 ms, ie, the interrupt period set in step S536.

  Following step S538, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared and set by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S540). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is used as a power failure warning. Is entered. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When it is determined in step S540 that the payout control MPU 633aa has not received the power outage notification signal, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Is set.

  In the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU 633aa returns to step S540 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, and the payout control MPU 633aa receives the power failure warning signal. It is determined whether it has been done.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value 2 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

  Following step S544, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B set after the value A set in step S539 is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU 633aa based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command or self-check command) are normally received, and drive control of the payout motor 584 is performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 633c are stored, and payout is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the control MPU 633aa, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 and a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or, the payout motor 584 outputs the number of balls actually paid out of the game balls as an award ball number information output signal. And outputs to the terminal plate 558 (in this embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls.

  Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output the prize ball number information is provided, and this prize ball number information output determination counter is actually the payout motor 584. The number of game balls paid out to is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. By a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of balls of the game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is displayed. Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of step S550 described later, the value is added with the number of balls of the game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and the memory is updated.

  In the port output processing of step S548, the value of the award ball number information output determination counter is read from the award ball information storage area, and when the value of the read award ball number information output determination counter exceeds 10 ( That is, when the payout motor 584 has actually paid out 10 balls, the award ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter.), And a display signal is output to the error LED display 633c.

  Following step S548, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU 633aa are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. For example, an operation signal of the RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit. , A BRDY signal and a CR connection signal, and a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 which informs the main control board 1310 that the various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later are normally received, and read as input information. Stored in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU 633aa performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer updating process, when it is determined whether or not a ball gami state is caused by the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the ball gami determination time set as the determination condition, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and is set as the determination condition when it is determined whether or not the lower bowl 202 is full of game balls stored. When determining whether or not the number of balls of the game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the full tank determination time and the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574. In addition to performing time management such as the out-of-ball determination time set as the determination condition, the number of balls of the game balls received and received by the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589, and the actual It is determined whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and the discontinuity of the game balls due to the disagreement with each other are repeatedly paid out. At that time, time management of the mismatch counter reset determination time set as the determination condition is performed. For example, when the ball-game determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so the ball-game determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time this timer update process is performed, and the subtraction result is the value. When it becomes 0, the ball-game determination time is accurately measured. The various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

  Following step S552, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a CR communication process (step S554). In this CR communication processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on the input information, it is determined whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) are input from the CR unit. judge. The payout control MPU 633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit based on various signals from the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in various information storage areas, as described above. Etc. (eg, prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the signal logic state is set.

  By this processing, for example, even after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. As a result, even when the payout device 580 is performing the payout operation of the game balls, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power restoration. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, the payout control MPU 633aa, in the CR communication process, exchanges various signals with the CR unit, while paying out the game ball to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202, causes a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the CR unit. Even if it is not possible to continue paying out game balls, the exchange of various signals with the game ball is interrupted, and at the time of power recovery, the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. The value is restored to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, or the like, which is stored as the payout backup information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, so that the instantaneous value is restored. The power of the various signals exchanged between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit immediately before the stop or power failure is restored. It is possible to continue from, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stop even when the power is restored, even if the power is stopped or stopped. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit are not changed due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit can be improved.

  Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530. When the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal which tells that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example, the PRDY signal is payout controlled. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU 633aa to the CR unit. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area, which is included in the payout backup information and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM, is included in the payout backup information in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one process of the main operation setting process. It is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH on the basis of the above. When the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal operation. That is, that is, the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1, and in the payout ball gami operation determination setting process, To set the error status output to the CR unit, for example, pay a ball when not communicating with the CR unit. The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting.

  As a result, in the CR communication process, the logical state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa at the next timer interrupt from the power recovery. To the CR unit. Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary power failure, if the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the state is restored when the power is restored, so it is extremely early after the power is restored. At the stage, the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa, and the payout device 580 is provided to the CR unit. It is possible to inform that the payout operation of the game ball by is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the useless ball rental request signal BRDY from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, a CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, and based on the CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, a pachinko machine. 1 is turned on, and when the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected to each other, in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible, the PRDY While outputting the signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa to the CR unit as HI, the logic state of the signal is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. To convey the fact is outputted from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU633aa to CR unit logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control internal RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored in the payout control board 633. A CR connection signal indicating whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU 633aa performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the above-mentioned lower bowl 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether the tank is full, or the number of balls of the game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is a predetermined number or more based on the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574. Or not. For example, the determination of whether or not the lower bowl 202 is full with the stored game balls is performed from the full tank detection sensor 154 in the current full tank and out-of-ball check processing using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full tank (2 ms before) and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, the above-described full tank determination time is counted in the timer updating process of step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time comes, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower bowl 202 is full in the stored game balls is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. To do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, full tank information indicating that the lower bowl 202 is not full in the stored game balls is stored in the state information storage area area.

  To determine whether or not the number of balls of the game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used to check whether the game is full or out of balls. When the detection signal from the ball cut switch is ON, and when the detection signal from the ball cut switch is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) and the ball cut check process, that is, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is When the state is changed from OFF to ON, the time counting of the out-of-ball determination time described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the out-of-ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is ON, it is considered that the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the ball is cut off. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not more than the predetermined number. The out-of-ball information that indicates that is stored in the state information storage area.

  Following step S556, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception processing, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. On the other hand, when the various commands are not normally received, the connection abnormality is transmitted to inform that the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is abnormal (the various command signals are abnormal). The information is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

  Following step S560, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, ball rental, ball removal and ball gamming are performed, retry operations are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls stock) is monitored. .

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU 633aa performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various kinds of information are read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 633c of the payout control board 633 is created, and are stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. Remember. For example, when the above-mentioned ball cutout information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the ball cutout information, it corresponds. The display data (in the present embodiment, the display value 1 (numeral "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) that are classified into state display are created based on this various information. Then, the data is transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the frame state 1 A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  Following step S566, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL subsequent to the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to be cleared.

  After step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL and determines in step S540 whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. In step S546, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, The timer update process is performed in step S5. 4 performs CR communication processing, performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing in step S556, command reception processing in step S558, command analysis processing in step S560, main operation setting processing in step S562, and step S562. LED display data creation processing is performed in S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

  The processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ according to the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 633aa varies. Therefore, in the port output processing of step S548, the payout control MPU 633aa preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU 633aa secures the processing time so that the other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the payout control MPU 633aa has received the power failure advance notice signal, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). By this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the above-mentioned payout information is protected.

  Following step S570, the payout control MPU 633aa stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game balls is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control MPU 633aa sets clearing of the watchdog timer (step S576). The clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value calculated in step S524, is calculated as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

  Following step S578, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the prohibition of access to the payout control internal RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

  Following step S582, the payout control MPU 633aa enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU 633aa is reset, and thereafter the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. The processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off processing".

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the payout control unit power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to an illegal act.

[14-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 178 to 180.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register, as shown in FIG. 181 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout controller from being destroyed.

  Following step S590, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU 633aa switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). The value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten by using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control MPU 633aa sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[15. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 153 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller power-on process, FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 184 is an example of the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process. 185 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral controller power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral controller V blank interrupt processing, peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing, peripheral controller power failure notice signal interrupt processing. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

  As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[15-1. Peripheral controller power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 182. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral controller power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initialization processing, processing for initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself, hot start / cold start determination processing, processing for setting a wait timer after reset, and the like are performed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC 1510a is extremely short. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in a peripheral control command reception interrupt process to be described later, a command related to game effect control output from the main control board 1310. It becomes a state in which various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the like can be received.

  Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. The current calendar information and the current time information are set in the RAM.

  In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after performing the current time information acquisition processing so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when executing the peripheral control unit steady process, the peripheral control unit steady process. When not executed, the value is set to 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, which indicates that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be received. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later and is executed in response to this. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG and then outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a from being reset.

  Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1006 again to determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so as not to reset the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1. ing.

  In the determination of step S1006, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first sets the regular processing in-progress flag SP-FLG when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when the peripheral control unit regular processing is determined to be executed. The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the effect operation unit 300. The rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 based on the detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382 (hereinafter, referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”) and Various information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation. Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set) Monitors operation whether the rotational direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302, appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302 to the game effects.

  Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process to be described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a and generates it on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed that exceeds the VDP drawing capability of the peripheral control IC 1510a, output of the generated one-screen (one-frame) drawing data is canceled. There is. This makes it possible to prevent a delay in processing time, but although so-called frame drop occurs, the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame are generated by the sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism in which various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter referred to as “various speakers”) can give priority to effects such as music and sound effects that match various effects.

  Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in a sound data creation process to be described later, and outputs the set output channel to various speakers. Output. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various effects.

  Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which of the screen data from the first screen data to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a among the time-sequential screen data forming the screen generation schedule data, To update the pointer.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is used to instruct which light emission data from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series which configures the light emission mode generation schedule data is to be output. Update.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, the first sound of the sound command data instructing the sound data of music, sound effect, etc. The pointer is updated to instruct which sound command data is output from the command data to the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Further, in the scheduler update processing, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series which form the electric drive source schedule data, the drive data from the first drive data to the output target is the number of the drive data. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which form the electric drive source schedule data, is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor and solenoid is driven according to the drive data designated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time the own processing is executed. In other words, the drive data designated by the pointer updated in the motor / solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if the other drive data is instructed from the drive data to be instructed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data originally instructed in the scheduler update process.

  Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in peripheral control section command reception interrupt processing, which will be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In this received command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Analyze the various commands that have been performed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands ( (Extracted) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, the start mouth winning command for instructing the start of the start mouth winning effect, the normal symbol Ordinary symbol storage command for identifying the number of holdings (0 to 4), a design synchronization production start command for instructing the start of design synchronization production, a pattern storage command output when the number of starting suspensions changes, the first large It is analyzed whether or not the command is the large winning a prize 1 count display command output every time the game ball is received in the winning a prize 2005, and the current game state is recognized.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the received command analysis process, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Various commands are analyzed. The various commands include various commands classified as special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified as special figure 2 tuning effect related, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, Figure Various commands related to performance related, various commands related to normal electric-role effect, various commands related to notification display, various commands related to status display, various commands related to test, and There are various other commands.

  Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 includes various commands classified into notification display, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set, The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the order of high priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the other abnormality notifications are automatically changed. It is supposed to do. As a result, it is possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing the information that one abnormal condition occurs after another abnormal condition occurs and before the abnormal condition is resolved. You can

  Subsequent to step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, is updated, and is the calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a based on this updated time information. The date is updated.

  Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer is displayed from the control ROM 1510b among the screen data arranged in time series which constitutes the screen generation schedule data. The data is read (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  When the screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data designated by the pointer is It is read from the control ROM 1510b (extracted) and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and outputs sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. Assemble and set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the sound volume adjustment switch 1510d is operated based on the sound volume adjustment operation signal from the sound volume adjustment switch 1510d. The slide position is specified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a so that the volume corresponds to the slide position of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and the sound data output process of step S1018 sets the sound data creation process. The sound data is output from the output channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects tailored to various effects can be played from various speakers.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the sliding operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the volume from the mute to the maximum volume by the program. The sound source of the control IC 1510a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a clerk such as a store clerk in the game hall slides the volume adjustment switch 1510d to set the volume to a low level, the pachinko machine 1 produces sound such as music and sound effects that flow from various speakers, although the volume is low. When a problem occurs in the player or when the player is cheating, the notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the staff member such as the clerk in the game hall from becoming liable to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating by the notification sound. Also, based on the current volume set by the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while There is a possibility that the screen (image) unfolded on the effect display device 1600 may be made more powerful in addition to the music or the sound effect by increasing the volume of sound played, or the game state may be shifted to an advantageous state for the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

  Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied and backed up in the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the contents stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c1. The backup is made by copying to the regular processing backup area provided in 1510c2.

  Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the value 0 in the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control steady processing (step S1038), and returns to step S1004 again to detect the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is set to a value 0 for initialization, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, steps S1008 to step S1008. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processes of steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

  In this peripheral control unit steady process, first, in step S1008, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and the value is set to 1 in the steady process flag SP-FLG. In step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer start process is started. .., and step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, if the value 0 is set in the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control part steady processing, the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral controller steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be received is transmitted from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to the peripheral control IC 1510a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later and is executed in response to the input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[15-2. Peripheral controller V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed when the V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be received is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 183 (step S1045). As described above, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control power-on processing of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, the CPU does not change the value. Exit the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control steady processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB is detected. -The value 1 is set in FLG (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when executing the peripheral control unit steady process, and the peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045, that is, whether or not the peripheral control steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control steady processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is currently executed as the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 182. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning by forcibly canceling the process on the way, the peripheral control unit of FIG. In step S1008 of the power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process), the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady process in-process flag SP-FLG. In addition to notifying the V blank signal interrupt process, the peripheral control unit steady process is set by setting the value 0 to the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) of FIG. Is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, so that the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine. Whether or not the value is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been executed is determined. To have. In other words, this is a measure in the case where the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, resulting in so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady process of this time, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, it is determined next time in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 182. The system waits until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, which has been omitted, is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral controller steady process) of FIG. 182. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. Instead, it is only executed 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is dropped, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It doesn't collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is omitted, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

[15-3. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 182 will be described. . When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 184 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 182. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, ..., And the 32 1 ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

  In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is started. When the determination is made, this routine is finished as it is. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has a higher priority as the interrupt processing priority. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first occurrence of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1100 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, the CPU adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 182. This means that the number of times the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor / solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which form the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Drives an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid according to the drive data to be updated, updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in time series, and updates the pointer each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. To do.

  Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the movable effect unit provided on the game board 5 are input, and thus history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, original Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. From the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, it is possible to acquire the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies (various decorative bodies) provided in the movable effect unit provided in the game board 5. it can.

  Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, thereby determining the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the rotation operation unit). Rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. From the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, it is possible to acquire the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303.

  Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs backup processing (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied and backed up to the 1ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the contents stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are also backed up. The data is backed up by copying it to the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. In the present embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are set to different areas, and the SDRAM 1510c1 is set. , 1510c2 and the 1ms timer interrupt processing backup area and the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 regular processing backup area are set to different areas.

  As described above, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 are executed as the effect progresses within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 182, various processes related to the effects of step S1014 to step S1032 are executed as the effect progresses within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is finished as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will occur. The start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[15-4. Peripheral control block command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses this as a trigger to send the main circumference serial data to the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a for 1 byte (8 bits). ) Information is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is allocated as the 1st byte, the mode is allocated as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

  When the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 185 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  In the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs 1-byte (8-bit) information when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that it is within the receivable period, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, Step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, is fetched from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data is set. The value is 2 when taken out from the reception buffer, and the value 3 is taken out when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, that is, whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-cycle serial data, are sequentially output from the reception buffer. It is determined whether it has been taken out.

  In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that when the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3, that is, after the status that is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, the CPU is still the second byte of the main-cycle serial data. Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, is not sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the second byte of the main circumference serial data after the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data. When it is determined that the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data in a certain mode is sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). This calculation regards the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data and the mode, which is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data, which has already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, as a numerical value and sums them (sum value ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facility in the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge causes noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are regarded as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the main-circulation serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been changed to normal main-circulation serial data affected by noise. Can be determined.

  In the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a matches the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, with the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined that the received status is allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a (step S1216). ), And ends this routine.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that one byte (8 bits) of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 has not been reached when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period over which the information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines the sum value that is the third byte of the main-cycle serial data that has already been retrieved from the reception buffer in step S1202. Then, when it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, the routine ends as it is.

[15-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal interrupt processing executed when the power outage notification signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. 186 to determine whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. It is determined (step S1302). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in the determination in step S1302 that the power failure advance notice signal is not input, the CPU ends the routine.

  On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1302 that the power failure notice signal is input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. When it is determined in step S1304 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has not elapsed 2 macroseconds, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input, and the power failure warning signal is not input. When it is determined that this routine is finished as it is, when it is determined that the power failure advance notice signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing of this routine is started.

  In the determination of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal interrupt process of this routine is started and the power outage notification signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds, the CPU performs the power saving process. Perform (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off in order to reduce the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1. By suppressing the electric power of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). In this command reception standby processing, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least for a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC 1510a can receive the command being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a command backup process (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied to the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a for backup.

  Subsequent to step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S1312). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1312 that the power failure advance notice signal is input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a from being reset.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power outage notice signal is not input, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power outage notice signal is input. To determine. That is, it will continue to infinitely determine whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input. By continuing the determination infinitely in this way, in the determination of step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a cannot output the clear signal to the external WDT when it determines that the power failure notice signal is not input, While the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notice signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the WDT clear processing in step S1314 to CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 182 is restarted.

  In this way, when the power failure notification signal continues to be input in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. It doesn't take it. On the other hand, if the power outage notification signal is not continuously input and released in the endless loop as determined in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. Has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like and the noise is generated for a period of more than 2 microseconds and the determination at step S1302 is passed, If the input of the power failure notice signal is canceled in the infinite loop in the determination in S1312 and is canceled, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset because the WDT clear processing of step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment,
As a result, in the normal state, the central decorative body 3351 in the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located at the retracted position near the upper edge in the front view game area 5a, and the two first A first position in which a pair of the first projecting decoration part 3352a and the second projecting decoration part 3353a of the projecting decoration body 3352 and the second projecting decoration body 3353 respectively overlap with each other by two on the left and right sides of the central decoration body 3351. Is located in. Here, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a is arranged on the left side of the central decorative body 3351, and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a is arranged on the right side of the central decorative body 3351. From this, the central ornamental body 3351 can be seen near the upper edge in the front-view game area 5a, and the first protruding ornamental portion 3352a and the second protruding ornamental portion 3353a are provided one on each of the left and right sides of the central ornamental body 3351. The central decorating body 3351 and the two first projecting decorating parts 3352a and the second projecting decorating part 3353a are used to decorate the inside of the game area 5a to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. In a normal state, since the two first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portions 3353a located at the first position overlap in the front-rear direction, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3352a on the front side. Since only the decorative portion 3353a can be seen from the front side (on the side of the player), it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the rear side and the central decorative body 3351. It is possible to recognize that the first protruding decoration portion 3352a and the second protruding decoration portion 3353a are the numbers that are currently visible. In a normal state, when the LEDs mounted on the upper front central decorative board, the first projecting decorative section decorative board and the second projecting decorative section decorative board emit light, the central decorative body 3351, the first projecting decorative section 3352a and the Since the two-protruding decorative portion 3353a can be decorated with light emission, the central decorative body 3351, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a, and the second projecting decorative portion 3352a are formed by the central decorative body 3351, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a, and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a. The portion 3353a can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable ornament 3350 such as the central ornament 3351. Further, in a normal state, the central decoration body 3351 and the two first projecting decoration bodies 3352 and the second projecting decoration body 3353 are in the retreat position near the upper edge of the front view game area 5a, and thus the front view game. The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the area 5a is not interrupted by the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351, and is in a good state from the player side. The effect image can be visually recognized, and the player can entertain the effect image.

  In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a, and the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position toward the downward appearance position. Then, the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 descend together. At this time, on the left side of the central decorative body 3351 to the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the second protruding decorative body 3353, on the right side of the central decorative body 3351 to the first protruding decorative portion 3352a of the remaining first protruding decorative body 3352, The lower ends of the second link rods 3304 arranged on the left and right are attached respectively, and the upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 are attached respectively on the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable within a predetermined range. Since it is attached to the tip of the first link rod 3303, it is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the same vertical direction as the moving direction of the central ornamental body 3351, so that it is lowered together with the central ornamental body 3351. Two first projecting decorations 3352 and second projecting decorations 3353 (first projecting decorations 3352a and second projecting decorations) The second link rod 3304 of the left and right by part 3353A) is pulled to the same downwardly moving direction of the central decorative body 3351, respectively, the upper end portion of the second link rod 3304 is able to slide downwardly relative to the unit base 3301. The upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 can be slid vertically by the first link rods 3303 within a range shorter than the moving distance (elevation distance) of the central ornamental body 3351. Before the 3351 reaches the appearance position of the descending end, the upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 reach the lower ends in the sliding direction. Then, after the upper end portion of the second link rod 3304 reaches the lower end portion in the sliding direction, when the central decoration body 3351 further moves in the direction of the lower appearance position, the lower end portion of the second link rod 3304 further appears at the appearance position. Of the right side of the two first projecting decorations 3352 and the second projecting decorations 3353 that are going to descend together with the central decoration 3351 by the left and right second link bars 3304 because they cannot move in the direction (downward). The first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the left second projecting decorative portion 3353a are pulled toward the upper unit base 3301 side, and this force causes the two first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 to move to the central decoration. By the first connecting rod 3352b and the second connecting rod 3353b attached to the rear side of the body 3351, the center of the central decorative body 3351 Rotating in different directions with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction as a center, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the left and right sides are not overlapped in the front-rear direction from the first position in which they are overlapped in the front-rear direction. It will be moved to the second position. As a result, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a, which are seen as one on both the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, are rotated so as to become two and the fan spreads. One large decoration can be formed by the four first projecting decoration parts 3352a and the second projecting decoration parts 3353a that extend radially around the central decoration body 3351 and can be shown to the player. Therefore, the first projecting decoration part 3352a and the second projecting decoration part 3352a and the second projecting decoration part 3353a appear all around the central decoration body 3351 that has moved to the center of the game area 5a. By increasing the number of the projecting decorative portions 3353a, the player's surprise can be projected, and by spreading the four first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portions 3353a around the central decorative body 3351, the overall decoration It is possible to increase the player's interest, and to make a strong impact on the player, and to suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, as described above, when the central decoration body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position at the rising end to the appearance position at the falling end by the upper front drive motor 3302, the upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 move toward the lower end in the sliding direction. The two first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the third projecting decorative portion 3353a on both the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are overlapped with each other until reaching the (downward end of the tip of the first link rod 3303). In the state of the first position, the central decoration body 3351 descends together with the central decoration body 3351, and after the upper end portion of the second link rod 3304 reaches the lower end portion in the sliding direction, the central decoration body 3351 moves in the direction of the appearance position (downward). ) While rotating to the second position where the overlapping is eliminated from the first position where the two left and right first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a overlap each other. It will be spread radially around the central ornamental body 3351, and it is possible to show the player a movable effect in which the central ornamental body 3351 and the two first projecting ornamental bodies 3352 and the second projecting ornamental body 3353 move in two stages. Therefore, by appropriately controlling the upper front drive motor 3302, it is possible to stop the movement (production) in the first stage or move (production) to the second stage. It is possible to increase the variations of the movable effect using the two first projecting decorations 3352 and the second projecting decorations 3353, which can entertain the player with various effects and prevent the player from getting bored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  In addition, depending on the game state, the upper front drive motor 3302 can move the central decoration body 3351 from the retracted position at the rising end to the appearance position at the descending end. Therefore, in the normal state where the central decoration body 3351 is at the retracted position, When the game state changes, the player can be excited and excitement depending on whether or not the central ornamental body 3351 descends to the appearance position, which can entertain the player. Then, by lowering the central decoration body 3351 from the retracted position to the appearance position side by the upper front drive motor 3302, and moving it to the first stage where the first protruding decoration body 3352 and the second protruding decoration body 3353 do not rotate, Since the decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 move downward in the normal state, it seems that there is something good for the player. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game. Further, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the second stage, that is, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position of the descending end, the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a are radially spread around the central decorative body 3351. Then, a large decoration can be shown to the player by the central ornamental body 3351 and the four first protruding ornamental portions 3352a and the second protruding ornamental portion 3353a, and the central ornamental body 3351 and the four first protruding ornamental portions 3352a and The descending second projecting decoration portion 3353a can make the player feel as if he / she was given a heavenly notice, so that the player has an advantage in the advantageous game state. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get tired of the game. Against it is possible to suppress the lowering of interest.

  In this way, when the central ornamental body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position, the movements of the central ornamental body 3351 and the two first protruding ornamental bodies 3352 and the second protruding ornamental body 3353 can be changed in two steps. Therefore, for the player, there is a different possibility (expected value) of an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage when stopped in the first stage and when stopped in the second stage. It can be recognized that the expected value is higher in the second stage than in the first stage, and the central decoration body 3351 and the two first protruding decoration bodies 3352 and the second protruding decoration can be made. With the body 3353, various expected values can be displayed to the player.

  Further, the central ornamental body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position near the center in the front view game area 5a, and the central ornamental body 3351 descends to the appearance position to secure a space around the central ornamental body 3351. Since it becomes easier, the four first protruding decoration portions 3352a and the second protruding decoration portions 3353a can be moved from the first position to the second position and radially expanded around the central decoration body 3351 at the appearance position. The body 3351 and the two first projecting decoration bodies 3352 and the second projecting decoration body 3353 can form a decoration as large as possible. Therefore, when the central ornamental body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302 according to the game state, the central ornamental body 3351 and four first protrusions radially spread around the central ornamental body 3351 are formed in the vicinity of the center of the game area 5a. Since the player can see a large decoration by the decoration portion 3352a and the second protruding decoration portion 3353a, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the center of the game area 5a. In addition, it is possible to enjoy a large decoration by the central ornamental body 3351 and the four first protruding ornamental portions 3352a and the second protruding ornamental portion 3353a, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  Further, when the central decorative body 3351 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are located at the first position. To the second position, and the one upper front drive motor 3302 moves the central decoration body 3351 and the two first protruding decoration bodies 3352 and the second protruding decoration body 3353, When performing the effect (movable effect) using the central ornament 3351 and the two first protrusion ornaments 3352 and the second protrusion ornament 3353, it is sufficient to control only one upper front drive motor 3302. Such a load can be reduced. Therefore, when performing the effect using the central ornamental body 3351 and the two first protruding ornamental bodies 3352 and the second protruding ornamental body 3353, the effect using the other movable ornamental body or the light emitting ornamental body is simultaneously performed. Also, since it is possible to suppress an increase in the load on the control of the effect, the control of the effect becomes unstable due to the overload, so that the upper front drive motor 3302 causes the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352. It is possible to prevent the movement of the second protruding decorative body 3353 from being jerky, and to reliably produce the effect of using the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353. The pachinko machine 1 can achieve the above-described effects.

  In addition, as described above, from the middle of the central decorative body 3351 descending to the appearance position, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are moved to the second position. Since it is moved, the speed at which the first protruding decoration portion 3352a and the second protruding decoration portion 3353a move (rotate) to the second position becomes relatively faster than the moving speed of the central decoration body 3351. Therefore, the four first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portions 3353a can be made to move as if they suddenly spread around the central decorative body 3351. It is possible to entertain the effect using the first projecting ornament 3352 and the second projecting ornament 3353.

  Further, as described above, after the central ornamental body 3351 has moved to the appearance position from the retracted position to some extent, the first protruding ornamental portion 3352a and the second protruding ornamental portion 3353a on both the left and right sides of the central ornamental body 3351 are first removed. I am trying to move from the position to the second position. That is, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a are moved to the center side to some extent from the vicinity of the upper edge of the front view game area 5a, and then first spread radially around the center decorative body 3351. Since it moves from the position to the second position, when the four first projecting decorations 3352a and the second projecting decorations 3353a move to the second position, the first projecting decorations 3352a and the second projecting decorations 3352a. It is possible to make it difficult for the portion 3353a to come into contact with other members, and prevent damage to the first projecting decorative portion 3352a, the second projecting decorative portion 3353a, and other members.

  Further, when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front central decorative board, the first projecting decorative section decorative board and the second projecting decorative section decorative board are caused to emit light, the central decorative body 3351 and the four first projecting decorative sections 3352a and Since the second projecting decorative portions 3353a can be independently illuminated and decorated, the central decorating body 3351 and the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a can be light-emitted and decorated. The decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, before lowering the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 by the upper front drive motor 3302 from the retracted position to the appearance position, the upper front central decorative substrate, the first protruding decorative body, By illuminating and decorating the central decorative body 3351 and the first and second projecting decorative portions 3352a and 3353a on the left and right sides by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the partial decorative substrate and the second projecting decorative portion decorative substrate, Since it is possible to focus on the central ornamental body 3351 and the like, the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the central ornamental body 3351 and the like move to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302. I can do it.

  Then, the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position on the center side of the game area 5a by the upper front drive motor 3302, and four first projecting decorative parts 3352a and second projecting decorative parts 3353a are radially arranged around the central decorative body 3351. If it spreads to, the player can be surprised to think that something is good, and the player's expectation for the game can be increased. When the central ornamental body 3351 is moved down to the appearance position, the central ornamental body 3351 and the four first protruding ornamental portions 3352a and the first protruding ornamental portion decorative substrate and the second protruding ornamental portion decorative portion 3352a and When the two-protrusion decoration part 3353a is made to emit light, the player can see a large shining decoration in the center of the game area 5a, so that the player has an advantage in the advantageous game state (for example, "big hit game"). It is possible to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the front-view game area 5a, when the central ornamental body 3351 is lowered to the central appearance position in the game area 5a by the upper front drive motor 3302, the center Since the effect image (a part of) is blocked by the decorative body 3351, the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352, and the second projecting decorative body 3353, the player can be made aware of the descent of the central decorative body 3351 and the like. Therefore, it is possible to show the four first protruding decoration portions 3352a and the second protruding decoration portions 3353a that move from the first position to the second position and radially spread around the central decoration body 3351. Therefore, in the center of the game area 5a, a large decoration by the central ornamental body 3351 and the four first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a can be surely shown to the player, and the above-mentioned operational effect The pachinko machine 1 that reliably plays can be obtained.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a, and the game ball B is in the area excluding the center accessory 2500. You can play games that are distributed by. A front production unit 2600 having a single transparent front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame, and the rear effect unit is arranged through the front light guide plate 2610. The effect image displayed on the display device 1600 can be enjoyed. In this state, a predetermined LED 2630 among a plurality of LEDs 2630 mounted via a reflector 2620 on the upper peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 according to the game state that changes as a game is played in the game area 5a. When (any one of the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d) is made to emit light, identification on the peripheral surface of the front light guide plate 2610 corresponding to this LED 2630 is performed. The light incident portion 2612 (any one of the first specific light incident portion 2612a, the second specific light incident portion 2612b, the third specific light incident portion 2612c, and the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d) is irradiated with light, and the specific incident light is emitted. Designs 2614 (first design 2614a, second design 2614b, third design) corresponding to the light incident on the front light guide plate 2610 from the light section 2612. 2614C, so that the fourth picture 2614D, one) is the luminous display. More specifically, the periphery of the light guide plate body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed recessed portion 2621 of the reflector 2620, and the plurality of through holes 2622 penetrating the fixed recessed portion 2621 are directed toward the specific light incident portion 2612 side. Since a plurality of LEDs are attached to the reflector 2620 via the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 so as to face, the LED 2630 can be brought as close as possible to the peripheral surface (specific light entrance portion 2612) of the light guide plate body 2611. Therefore, the light from the LED 2630 can be surely applied to the corresponding specific light input portion 2612, and the light from the LED 2630 can be prevented from diffusing by the through hole 2622, and the specific light input that does not correspond. It is possible to prevent the portion 2612 from being irradiated with light.

  Then, the light that has entered the light guide plate body 2611 from the specific light incident portion 2612 corresponds to the corresponding reflection recess 2613 (first reflection recess 2613a, second reflection recess 2613b, third reflection recess 2613c, fourth reflection recess 2613d). , Any of the light) is reflected or refracted in a predetermined direction. At this time, since the reflection concave portion 2613 extends in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, in the predetermined direction of the light reflected or refracted by the reflection concave portion 2613. Since the direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate body 2611 is included, the eyes of the player seated in front of the game area 5a (light guide plate body 2611) are reflected by the light guide plate body 2611 by the reflection recess 2613. The light reflected or refracted in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the reflection concave portion 2613 appears to shine, and the pattern 2614 formed of the reflection concave portion 2613 appears to be illuminated. On the other hand, the light that has entered the light guide plate body 2611 from the specific light incident portion 2612 reaches the reflection concave portion 2613 that does not correspond to the specific light incident portion 2612. Since the light extends in a direction different from the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the specific light incident portion 2612 on which the light is incident, the direction of the light reflected or refracted by the reflection recess 2613 is perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate body 2611. The direction is inclined with respect to this direction, and it does not reach the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a, and the reflection concave portions 2613 that do not correspond do not appear to shine. As described above, when the LED 2630 irradiates the specific light incident portion 2612 with light, only the reflection recess 2613 corresponding to the specific light incident portion 2612 reflects or refracts light in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate body 2611. Then, it reaches the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a, and it is possible to make the player see as if only the pattern 2614 composed of the corresponding reflective recess 2613 is illuminated. .

  Therefore, by appropriately selecting the LED 2630 that emits light and changing the specific light entering portion 2612 that is irradiated with light, the pattern 2614 that is emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 can be variously changed, and thus various patterns can be obtained. By displaying 2614 as a light emission, the player can be surprised and entertained, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Since the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 are formed so as to be sequentially related to each other, the plurality of LEDs 2630 (first LED group 2630a, second LED group 2630b, third LED group) according to the game state. 2630c and the fourth LED group 2630d) sequentially emit light, a plurality of patterns (first pattern 2614a, second pattern 2614b, third pattern 2614c, fourth pattern 2614d) are sequentially emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 for animation. It is possible to show the player a moving light emitting display as described above.

  Specifically, the first design 2614a, the second design 2614b, the third design 2614c, and the fourth design 2614d are displayed in the order of light emission, and after the last fourth design 2614d, the first design 2614a is returned to the first design again. In the case where the light emitting display is repeated in order from the above, since the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 can show the player the light emitting display which continues to move from the outside toward the center, the game can be played by this continuous light emitting display. It is possible to make people feel that their momentum is concentrated, and to make them think that something good is happening, and to raise their expectations for the game. On the other hand, on the contrary, the fourth pattern 2614d, the third pattern 2614c, the second pattern 2614b, and the first pattern 2614a are made to emit light in this order, and after the last first pattern 2614a, the first pattern 2614a returns to the first and again the second pattern 2614a. When the light emitting display is repeated in order from the four patterns 2614d, the player can show the light emitting display that keeps moving from the center toward the outside by the plurality of patterns of the light guide plate. It is possible to make the player illusion of spreading from the center or the illusion that the player is moving forward, and it is possible to make the player feel that the gaming state is changing. In this way, since the player can see the light-emitting display in motion like animation, it is strong against the player by the moving light-emitting display by the front light guide plate 2610 which has never been seen in the pachinko machine 1 up to now. It is possible to give an impact, to attract the player's interest strongly, and to make the player think that an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs, and It is possible to raise expectations and suppress a decline in interest.

  Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front-view game area 5a, even if the design 2614 is illuminated by the LED 2630, the light is emitted. The displayed pattern 2614 does not hinder the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized by the player in a good state, which makes it difficult to see the game. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust and to enjoy the game in a good state.

  Further, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed recessed portion 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the conventional case where two members are attached. It is possible to eliminate rattling between the LED and the front light guide plate 2610, and to reliably position the plurality of LEDs 2630 at desired positions with respect to the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light incident portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LED 2630 can be reliably emitted to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 is displayed. It is possible to reliably perform light emission display.

  Further, since the pattern 2614 is configured by the plurality of reflection concave portions 2613 extending in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the specific light incident portion 2612, the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 of the light guide plate body 2611 are formed. The front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) can be disposed on a specific side (here, the upper side) of the peripheral edge, and by disposing the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 on the upper side of the light guide plate body 2611. It can be arranged only on the upper side of the light plate body 2611. As a result, the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) does not surround the outer circumference of the light guide plate body 2611, and a front cover (frame body) is provided over the entire circumference of the light guide plate body 2611. Since it is possible to avoid partitioning the effect image and the decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged in the rear, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the effect image and the like, and to the player. While it is possible to entertain the effect image in a good state and suppress a decrease in interest, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with a sense of openness because there is no frame-shaped partition in the game area 5a when viewed from the front. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having an appealing power that can enhance the appearance in the game area 5a and strongly attract the player's interest.

  Further, as described above, since a plurality of (here, four) patterns 2614 can be light-emitted and displayed by one front light guide plate 2610, there is no need to use a plurality of light guide plates as in the conventional case, and a plurality of light guide plates can be used. The front-rear dimension of the light emitting display of the pattern 2614 can be made as small (thin) as possible, and the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, so that the front light guide plate 2610 is directed to the player side. The positions can be set as close to each other as possible, and it is possible to easily secure a large space behind the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, a wide space can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610, so that the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. are provided on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. Can be arranged, which makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance in the game area 5a and having a high appealing power to the player, and in addition to the effect by the luminous display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable effect. By performing the movable effect by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like, it is possible to provide the player with various effects, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest. be able to.

  Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620) can be obtained by aligning the periphery of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. Or a plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made invisible to the player side, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be aware of the presence of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, when the pattern 2614 is caused to emit light, the front light guide plate is displayed. It is possible to surprise and give a strong impact to a player who thought that 2610 does not exist, and to entertain the luminous display of a plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, since the front cover 2650 prevents the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflector 2620 from being seen from the player side, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the inside of the game area 5a from being deteriorated due to the reflector 2620 being visible. , The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 are hidden from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630, and thus the LEDs 2630 can be made less visible. By causing the pattern 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 to display light emission, the player can be greatly surprised by the light emission display not predicted by the player, and the light emission display of the pattern 2614 can be enjoyed and the player Can be made to think that something is good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610, a light emission display of a plurality of different patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and an effect image by the effect display device 1600. Since it is possible to show the combined effect to the player, it is possible to perform various effects by appropriately combining them, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired, and also the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. With the effect produced by, the player can be entertained, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to add a sense of depth and stereoscopic effect to the pattern 2614 that is being displayed by displaying the effect image associated with the plurality of patterns 2614 that are displayed by emitting light on the front light guide plate 2610. The effect (display effect) capable of strongly attracting the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5 having the game area 5a, an upper rear left decoration 3220 in which decoration is formed on the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 which move in the vertical direction, An upper rear left decorative board 3240, an upper rear left decorative board 3220, and an upper rear left decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs for light emitting decoration of the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are mounted are attached. Therefore, the weight applied to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 is heavy, and the force of moving the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 downward due to gravity is large. In this state, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is transported or the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the pachinko machine 1 is tilted or vibrates on the pachinko machine 1. When a force for moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 is further applied due to the above, a rear upper left driving motor 3214 and a rear upper right driving motor 3234 and a left slider 3212, Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the right slider 3232 (the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240), the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 try to descend and the clutch mechanism 3250. Even when the output member 3253 on the output side of the roller 3254 tries to rotate, the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 causes the roller 3254 to be housed. When the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing 3251 and the roller 3254 is caught between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, a force for rotating the housing case 3251 by the plurality of rollers 3254 acts. Will be done. At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, frictional resistance is generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the housing case 3251 is held through the plurality of rollers 3254. The frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 resists the force to rotate the 3251, so that the housing case 3251 does not rotate and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. It becomes a state. In this way, the output is output according to the rotation load from the output member 3253 side (the upper rear left decoration body 3220 side and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, it is possible to restrict the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from freely descending. Therefore, since the clutch mechanism 3250 can lock the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be arbitrarily moved during transportation or installation. It is possible to prevent the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from colliding with other members at the moving end to damage the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 and other members at the moving end, and In addition, it is possible to surely entertain the movable effect by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when shipping the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) at the manufacturing factory, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are shipped at the origin position, the clutch mechanism 3250 causes the upper rear left. Since it is possible to prevent the ornamental body 3220 and the upper rear right ornamental body 3240 from moving arbitrarily, the origin adjustment of the upper rear left ornamental body 3220 and the upper rear right ornamental body 3240 when installed in the island facility of the game hall. It is not necessary to perform the above, and the labor for installing the pachinko machine 1 can be saved, and the burden on the installation can be reduced.

  Further, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is installed or maintained, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are moved from the regular position (origin position) for some reason. In this case, when the operator tries to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 by hand, the clutch mechanism 3250 causes the outer peripheral side of the housing case 3251 to be a tightening spring as a torque limiter. By tightening with 3255, the rotation on the output side is locked according to the load of rotation to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving. 3220 and upper rear right decorative body 3240 are moved by applying a stronger force to upper rear left decorative body 3220 and upper rear right decorative body 3240. When the force for rotating the storage case 3251 via the plurality of rollers 3254 becomes larger than the frictional resistance generated between the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, the storage case is resisted against the frictional resistance. A slippage occurs between 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the housing case 3251 rotates, and the output member 3253 rotates together with the housing case 3251 and the lock is released, and the output member 3253 rotates. Is transmitted to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side via the input member 3252, so that a strong force acting on the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 is applied. It can be released to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. It is possible to rear right decorative body 3240 and the clutch mechanism 3250 and the like can be prevented from being damaged.

  Also, according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear left unit 3210 in the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000. When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, its rotation is transmitted via the clutch mechanism 3250, and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 attached to the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 move to the front view game area 5a. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 attached to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 respectively move down from the upper part inside, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and Surprise the player by descending (appearing) the upper right decoration 3240 It is possible to make the player pay attention to the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to entertain the movement and decoration of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. By lowering the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to increase the sense of expectation for the game and lower the entertainment level. Can be suppressed.

  At this time, a clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 (the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240). Therefore, vibration from the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, other movable ornaments, etc., the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left ornament 3220, the upper rear right ornament 3240, and the upper portion. Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 attempts to rotate due to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 attempting to descend due to gravity or the like acting on the rear left decorative substrate and the upper rear right decorative substrate, the output member 3253. The roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the A state where the roller 3254 has been bitten between the inner surface and the cam surface 3253b of over scan 3251, the force to rotate the accommodating case 3251 by a plurality of rollers 3254 is to act. At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, frictional resistance is generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the housing case 3251 is held through the plurality of rollers 3254. The frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 resists the force to rotate the 3251, so that the housing case 3251 does not rotate and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. It becomes a state. In this way, the output is output according to the rotation load from the output member 3253 side (the upper rear left decoration body 3220 side and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, it is possible to prevent the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from descending without permission, and the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear left decoration 3220 can be controlled via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232. It is possible to prevent the upper rear right decoration 3240 from making an unexpected movement (fall), and the player feels distrust by the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 performing an unintended movement. Can be avoided, and the player can enjoy the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. The decrease in the flavor can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side try to descend, the clutch mechanism 3250 can restrict the rotation of the output member 3253 and lock the output member 3253. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at a position of an arbitrary height through the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be varied. It is possible to show the player a variety of effect patterns that stop moving up and down at a position, and it is difficult for the player to get tired of the movable effects of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and a decrease in interest is suppressed. Can be made.

  Further, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at arbitrary positions in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left The drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being overloaded, and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being prematurely damaged due to overload, and the upper portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to damage to the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 145 (d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are respectively locked by the lock springs 3260. In the case of urging the protrusions 3252a side close to each other, when a force for rotating the output member 3253 acts from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately pressed. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251, and the lock is activated after rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side. The rotation of the output member 3253 up to this time can be reduced as much as possible. Accordingly, when the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 move the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 downward, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 descend smoothly without jerking. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the movements of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and entertains the movable effect by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  Further, since the clutch mechanism 3250 has a relatively simple structure using the housing case 3251, the input member 3252, the output member 3253, the plurality of rollers 3254, etc., the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided with two planetary gear mechanisms. Since it is possible to easily downsize the whole as compared with the above, by downsizing the clutch mechanism 3250, a space for arranging the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (or another member) is provided. It is possible to make it easy to secure, and it is possible to make the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 relatively large and conspicuous, and by the large upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player by strongly attracting the player's interest.

  Further, since it has an upper rear left unit 3210 and an upper rear right unit 3230 each having an upper rear left decoration 3220 and an upper rear right decoration 3240, respectively, the respective upper rear left decoration 3220 and By appropriately raising and lowering the upper rear right ornamental body 3240 via the respective left slider 3212 and right slider 3232, a game in which various two patterns of movable production by the upper rear left ornamental body 3220 and the upper rear right ornamental body 3240 are played. It is possible to show the game to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. At this time, since the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper right right unit 3230 respectively include the clutch mechanism 3250, as described above, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, respectively. Smoothly move, the player can enjoy the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  Also, when the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 of the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 are moved downward according to the game state, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 By bringing the rear right decorative bodies 3240 into contact with each other, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be combined to form a large decorative body, and thus a large decorative body appears. By doing so, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous to the player due to the appearance of a large ornament (for example, " It is possible to think that a big hit game ”) will occur, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other and united, the upper rear right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 on the other side is moved by abutting each other. However, since each of them has the clutch mechanism 3250, as described above, the force to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (from the output side). Even if a force to rotate the roller 3254 is applied, the roller 3254 is caught between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. Of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from moving due to contact with each other, and It is also possible to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from returning due to movement, and surely play a movable effect in which the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 come into contact and unite. It is possible to entertain people and suppress a decline in interest.

  Also, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be illuminated and decorated by causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper rear left decorative board and the upper rear right decorative board to emit light according to the game state. Therefore, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be made conspicuous to attract the player's attention, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be decorated or moved. The upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 are light-embellished, which makes it possible for the player to think that something is good. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and suppress a decrease in interest. Also, by providing the upper rear left decorative substrate and the upper rear right decorative substrate, the weight of the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 increases, and the gravity and inertial force acting on the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 increase. Also, as described above, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be reliably stopped via the left base 3211 and the right base 3231. It is possible to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 capable of performing light emission decoration by the upper rear left decorative board and the upper rear right decorative board from unintentionally moving. It is possible to cause the upper right decorative body 3240 to make a desired motion with a high effect of effect, and entertain the player to suppress a decrease in interest. Rukoto can.

  Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, since the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255 and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256, the output member is output from the output side. By rotating 3253, the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253, and the roller 3254 is caught between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Thus, when a force to rotate the housing case 3251 acts via the plurality of rollers 3254, the force (torque) to rotate the housing case 3251 is the frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. Is larger than the space between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255. Rigashoji, the accommodating case 3251 is able to rotate. Then, as the housing case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates via the plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end portion of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 abuts on the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252, The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is rotated from the output side with a strong force, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 that tightens the housing case 3251 and the housing case 3251, and the torque is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be released by being transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side, the roller 3254 cannot be unlocked by being strongly bitten, or the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration. It is possible to prevent the body 3240, the output member 3253, and the housing case 3251 from being damaged, and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described operational effects.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, in the front view game area 5a, the lower central elevating base 3121 and the lower left side elevating bases 3151 and the lower right side on both left and right sides of the lower central elevating base 3121. After lowering the elevating bases 3171 respectively, a left side rotating ornament 3153 and a right side rotating ornament by a slider or the like (slide mechanism) attached to the respective lower left side elevating bases 3151 and lower right side elevating bases 3171. 3173 is slid to the outside in the left-right direction, and the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation section 301 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 below the game area 5a is retracted downward. In this normal state, the effect image displayed by the effect display device 1600 can be seen in the center of the front-view game area 5a, and the lower front central ornamental body 3111 (lower rear central ornament) in the left-right center in the lower portion of the game area 5a. The body 3122) and the four rotary decorations 3126 arranged in the left-right direction of the central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper part of the body are visible, and the left and right ends of the row of the four rotary decorations 3126 are separated from each other in the left-right direction. The left side rotary decoration 3153 and the right side rotary decoration 3173 of the lower left side effect unit 3150 and the lower right side effect unit 3170, respectively, and the left subside rotary decorative element 3155 and the right subside rotary decorative element 3175 can be seen above them. Further, on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 below the game area 5a, a production operation that can be operated by the player. As part 301 rotates the operation portion 302 of the annular and the pushing operation section 303 placed in the ring being visible.

  In this state, when the game state is changed by playing a game in the game area 5a (the first special lottery result or the first special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004). (Depending on the result of the special lottery), the four rotating ornaments 3126 arranged side by side on the upper side of the lower front center ornamental body 3111 rotate, or the four rotating ornaments arranged side by side by the lower center elevating base 3121. 3126 rises together with the lower rear central decoration body 3122, and the four rotating decoration bodies 3126 raised by the lower central lifting base 3121 rotate, and the lower left slide drive motor and the lower right side of the lower left side effect unit 3150. By the lower right slide drive motor (sliding mechanism) of the rendering unit 3170, a pair of left side rotating ornaments 3153 and a right support. The rotating body 3173 slides to the left and right, the rotating body 3153 on the left side rotates and the rotating body 3173 on the right side rotates, and the sliding mechanism and the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 cause the left side rotating decoration 3173 to rotate. The side rotary ornament 3153 and the right side rotary ornament 3173 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction with the four rotary ornaments 3126, the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155, and the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175, or the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155. Since the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 can be rotated or can be shown to the player as if it were moving, the player can move the central movable unit 3125 (four rotary decorations 3126) and the left side rotary decoration 3153. Right side rotating ornament 3173 and left sub side rotating ornament 3155 It is possible to focus on the right Sabusaido rotating decorative body 3175 and the like, it is possible to entertain the movable effects by them.

  Also, when the lower central elevating base 3121 is located at the lower end, the lower rear central ornamental body 3122 emits light and the lower front central ornamental body 3111 emits light to display a downward arrow or to elevate the lower central elevator. By raising the base 3121 and causing the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111 to emit light by the plurality of LEDs on the lower central decoration substrate, a large downward arrow is displayed to emit light, and a pair of lower left side elevations By elevating the base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 to cause the respective lower left side decoration 3152 and the lower right side decoration 3172 to emit light, a larger downward arrow can be emitted and displayed. Depending on the performance, the player can be entertained, and the light-emitting downwards Arrow makes it possible to guide the viewpoint of the player's downward staging operation unit 301, it is possible to prompt the operation of the staging operation unit 301 to the player. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, or the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, thereby participating in the player participation type effect. And can be entertained.

  Therefore, since various movable effects, light emission effects, and player participation type effects as described above can be performed, it is possible to provide the player with various patterns of effects by appropriately combining them. , It is possible to make the player less likely to get bored and to make it difficult for the player to predict the effect pattern, so that it is possible to surprise the player by performing an unexpected effect. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, four rotary ornaments 3126, a pair of left side rotary ornaments 3153 and right side rotary ornaments 3173, and a pair of left subside rotary ornaments 3155 and right subside rotary ornaments 3175 are respectively extended in the left-right direction. It is designed to rotate independently around the axis, and four decorative portions 3127, decorative portions 3154, and 3156 which are different from each other in the circumferential direction are provided. Therefore, when they are rotated, the player side is changed. The facing surface (decoration part 3127, decoration part 3154, decoration part 3156) can be changed, and the appearance (decoration) in the game area 5a can be changed variously to entertain the player.

  Further, when the four rotation decorations 3126, the pair of left side rotation decorations 3153 and right side rotation decorations 3173, and the pair of left subside rotation decorations 3155 and right subside rotation decorations 3175 are stopped to rotate, Various messages are displayed to the player as decorations by stopping the rotation of the decoration parts 3127, decoration parts 3154, and decoration parts 3156 facing the player side so that the combination becomes a predetermined combination. Since it can be provided, the combination of each decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, and the decorative portion 3156 that are stopped rotating may cause an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “big hit game”) that is advantageous to the player. By displaying the (expected value), each of the four rotary ornaments 3126 and the pair of left side rotary ornaments 3153 depending on the game state. And the right side rotary ornament 3173 and the pair of left subside rotary ornament 3155 and right subside rotary ornament 3175 are rotated to rotate with a combination of the ornamental part 3127, the ornamental part 3154, and the ornamental part 3156 having a higher expected value. Depending on whether or not the game is stopped, the player can be excited and thrilled, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the lower rear central decorative body 3122 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a which are arranged in a row in the vertical direction and can emit light independently of each other, if the plurality of light emitting regions 3122a are made to emit light at the same time, one A downward arrow can be displayed in a light emitting manner, and by repeatedly emitting light from a plurality of light emitting areas 3122a in order from above, the player's line of sight is directed to the lower performance operation unit 301 by light emission flowing from top to bottom. It is possible to make it easy to guide the player, and to further promote the operation of the effect operation unit 301 so that the player can surely operate the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, since the rotary operation unit 302 having an annular shape as the effect operation unit 301 and the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring are provided, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is performed for the player. Since it is possible to perform the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 and the pressing operation unit 303, it is possible to diversify the pattern of the player participation type effect by appropriately combining the operations of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. It is possible to prevent the user from getting tired of the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the pressing operation part 303 is arranged in the ring of the annular rotating operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 is surrounded by the rotating operation part 302, the diameter of the rotating operation part 302 should be increased. It is possible to strongly attract the player's interest with the large rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, as described above, when the player's line of sight is guided downward by the light emission display of the downward arrow by the lower rear central ornamental body 3122 and the lower front central ornamental body 3111, the rotation operation unit 302 (pressing operation unit 303 ) Is easily noticed, it is possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, and entertain the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the pressing operation portion 303 is arranged in the ring of the annular rotation operation portion 302, as described above, the downward arrow light emission display by the lower rear central decoration body 3122 or the lower front central decoration body 3111 is performed. When the player looks at the bottom of the arrow, the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 that are rotating can be seen, so that there is a possibility that an advantageous game state is generated for the player due to the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302. At the same time, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be strongly urged, the pressing operation unit 303 can be surely pressed, and the expectation for the game can be increased, It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the person.

  In addition, since the pressing operation unit 303 can be in a lowered state and a state protruding upward, the pressing operation unit 303 can be seen greatly in a state where the pressing operation unit 303 is protruding, so that a game is played. It is possible to make the player think that there is a high possibility that an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. On the other hand, since the pressing operation unit 303 is inconspicuous when the pressing operation unit 303 is descending, it is possible to make the player think that the possibility of the advantageous gaming state is low, and the pressing operation unit 303 Depending on the advancing / retreating position, the possibility (expected value) of the advantageous gaming state may be suggested to the player.

  Further, the forward / backward position of the pressing operation unit 303 can indicate to the player the possibility (expected value) of the advantageous game state, and thus, as described above, the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front. When the downward arrow is lit by the central ornamental body 3111 or the like, whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes can make the player feel irritated, which makes the player's expectation higher and the pressing operation. The operation of pressing the portion 303 can be enjoyed, the player is less likely to get bored, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image in the center of the front-view game area 5a is provided, in addition to the game performed in the game area 5a, an effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is used. Also, the player can be entertained, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a behind the lower movable effect unit 3100, the lower center elevating base 3121 is used together with the lower rear central ornamental body 3122 in accordance with the game state. The four rotating decorations 3126 are raised, and the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 together with the lower left side decoration 3152 and the lower right side decoration 3172 are combined with the left side rotating decoration 3153 and the right side rotating decoration. When the body 3173 is raised, a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is blocked by the four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decorations 3153, the right side rotating decorations 3173, and the like. Four rotating decorations 3126 and left side rotating decorations for the player Since it is possible to make the rise of the 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173 etc. notice, the effect using them can be shown to the player surely, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest. .

  Further, since the effect image can be displayed in the center of the front-view game area 5a, as described above, the lower front central decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, the lower right side. When a downward arrow is lit by the decorative body 3172 or the like to urge the player to operate the effect operation unit 301 below, the effect display device 1600 causes the effect display device 1600 to operate the effect operation unit 301 and an effect operation unit. By displaying an effect image that explains the operation of 301, an effect image that shows the relationship between the occurrence of the advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage and the effect operation unit 301, and the like, the effect operation unit 301 is displayed to the player. It is possible to strongly encourage the player to participate in the player participation type production, and to make it easier to operate the production operation unit 301, and enjoy the player participation type production. The reduction of interest can be suppressed Te.

  Further, as described above, since various combinations of effects can be shown to the player, for example, the lower central elevating base 3121, the lower left side elevating base 3151, and the lower right side elevating base 3171 are lowered. From the state, when the left and right left side rotating decorations 3153 and the right side rotating decorations 3173 are moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the slide mechanism such as the lower left slide driving motor and the lower right slide driving motor, the four side-by-side arrangements are made. The left side rotary ornament 3153 and the right side rotary ornament 3173 are located on the left and right sides of the row of the one rotary ornament 3126, and four rotary ornaments 3126 and a pair of the left side rotary ornament 3153 and the right side rotary ornament are included. Since the body 3173 and the body 3173 are arranged side by side, the player can be surprised and the player can enjoy themselves. It can be.

  In this state, the lower central elevating base 3121, the lower left side elevating base 3151, and the lower right side elevating base 3171 raise the four rotating decorations 3126 and the pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3173. And four rotation decorations 3126, a pair of left side rotation decorations 3153 and right side rotation decorations 3173, and a pair of left subside rotation decorations 3155 and right subside rotation decorations 3175 arranged in a row in the left-right direction. In this state, the player can see a large oblong decoration that crosses the inside of the game area 5a, which gives a strong impact to the player, and I think there is something good about it. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game.

  Then, the four rotating decorations 3126, the pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and the right side rotating decorations 3173, and the pair of left subside rotating decorations 3155 and the right subside rotating decorations 3175 are appropriately combined to the left and right. When the rotation is stopped after rotating them in a lined state, the combination of the decoration portions 3127, the decoration portions 3154, and the decoration portions 3156 will make the player feel irritated depending on whether or not the rotation is stopped in a desired combination. The rotation (moving effect) of the four rotating decorations 3126 and the like can be enjoyed, and when the decorations 3127 and the like are stopped in a desired combination, the advantageous game state for the player. It is possible to be confident of the occurrence of the game, and to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state, and to suppress the decrease in the interest.

  After that, the lower rear central decoration 3122 (the lower front central decoration 3111), the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right side decoration 3172 are caused to emit light to display a downward arrow, so that the player's line of sight is directed downward. The player can be guided to the section 301, and the player can be prompted to operate the effect operation section 301.

  At this time, since it is possible to suggest the possibility (expected value) of the advantageous game state by the size of the downward arrow displayed in the light emission, if the arrow displayed in the light emission is small, it continues to the player. It is possible to think that it can be recovered by the operation of the effect operation unit 301, and it is possible to be convinced that the advantageous gaming state occurs when the arrow that is light-emitted and displayed is small. Therefore, in any case, the expectation for the game is increased. It is possible to entertain the subsequent operation of the effect operation unit 301 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, as a main control board capable of controlling the progress of the game, the effect is produced based on the command from the main control board 1310 included in the main control unit 1300 of FIG. A peripheral control board 1510 included in the effect control unit 1500 of FIG. 13 is provided as an effect control board capable of controlling the progress. The pachinko machine 1 further includes a peripheral data ROM board 1520 shown in FIG. 148 as a ROM board and a liquid crystal output board 1530 shown in FIG. 148 as a video signal output board. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a peripheral data ROM 1520a shown in FIG. 148 as a ROM in which control information (peripheral data) regarding effects based on game specifications is stored in advance. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is capable of outputting to the effect display device 1600 a signal that is compatible with the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 of FIG. 130 as a display device.

  Between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a plug of the special connector SCN1 included in the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 148 and a special connector included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 of FIG. 148 are provided as first connectors. It is electrically connected to the socket of the SCN 3 by a board-to-board connector that can be connected to the board. Between the board of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, as a second connector different from the first connector, the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 148 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 of FIG. Is electrically connected to the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in the.

  The peripheral control board 1510 can control the progress of the production based on the control information (peripheral data) read from the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and can output the video signal to the liquid crystal output board 1530 in a plurality of types. . Examples of a plurality of types of video signal systems include RGB system, LVDS system, MIPI system, eDP system, and clockless system. In the present embodiment, as a system of a plurality of types of video signals, one system is an RGB system, two systems are an LVDS system (a first LVDS system and a second LVDS system), and four systems of a MIPI system (a total of four systems). ) Has been adopted.

  The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 of FIG. 148 as the same board box.

  In this way, the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the control information (peripheral data) related to the performance based on the game specifications is stored in advance is provided on the dedicated board called the peripheral data ROM board 1520 which is a separate board from the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device. A board that outputs a signal that matches a video signal system input to the 1600 is provided on a dedicated board, which is a liquid crystal output board 1530, which is a separate board from the peripheral control board 1510. That is, if the peripheral control board 1510 is not newly manufactured by being modified according to the control information (peripheral data) related to the effect based on the game specification, the peripheral control board 1510 is adapted to the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Since it is not modified and newly manufactured, it can be configured as a common substrate that does not depend on the game specification or the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. As a result, it is not necessary to manufacture a plurality of types of peripheral control boards 1510 according to the game specifications or the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and only the same peripheral control board 1510 is manufactured, which reduces costs. Can contribute to. Therefore, the cost of the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout passage 580a to which the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 of FIG. 93 are supplied is provided with the payout device 580 of FIG. 93. ing. The payout device 580 is provided with at least the payout motor 584 of FIG. 105 and the payout blade 589 of FIG. 105 as a ball feeding rotating portion. The payout motor 584 has a rotation shaft that can rotate by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle in response to being step-driven. The payout blade 589 rotates via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, in which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 constitutes a rotation transmission member. As a result, a plurality of sphere accommodating portions 589b are formed at equal intervals as the sphere receiving recesses capable of receiving and sending out the game sphere B one by one (three 120 spheres are formed at equal intervals). .

  The speed reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member is previously determined such that the number of times of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the sending of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer. Specifically, the reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588 by calculation by mechanics. The rotation angle of the payout blade 589 can be detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 of FIG. 105 as a light shielding piece provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589. Specifically, the blade rotation detection sensor 590 can detect the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

  As described above, the number of step driving operations to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer, and the reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member is determined in advance. The positioning position is different each time the ball is paid out. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, so that the adhesion positions of the tar and dust can be dispersed. Further, if the speed reduction ratio n of the above-described rotation transmitting member that naturally causes such a positioning error is set, the error accumulates, but even if the error accumulates every time one game ball is paid out, the payout blade 589 The rotation angle is reset by the accumulated errors accumulated to some extent by being detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 of FIG. 105, which are provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is guaranteed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, by changing the rotation position of the ball feeding rotating unit that receives and sends the game ball, the position where the tar and dust adhere is dispersed by changing the position of the ball every time the game ball is paid out. On the other hand, it is possible to have a strong dispensing device 580.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the production progress based on the ordinary lottery result, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result as the lottery result by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300. The peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 148 is provided as an effect control unit capable of controlling the. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a metal shield plate 1540 shown in FIG. 148 as a first shield, a metal back cover in the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 152 as a second shield, and a conductive coating portion. The conductive elastic member 1545 of 152 is provided. The metal shield plate 1540 is made of metal as a conductive member. The metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 is made of metal as a conductive member. The conductive elastic member 1545 is such that the surface of the foam body 1545b in FIG. 152 is covered with the conductive covering portion 1545a in FIG. 152 as a conductive member as a core material formed of the elastic member.

  The peripheral control board 1510 is arranged between the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, and the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are conductive. It is configured to be electrically connected via the elastic member 1545.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged between the metallic shield plate 1540 and the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600, which are formed by the conductive member. At the same time, the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected via the conductive elastic member 1545, so that the influence of electromagnetic noise on the peripheral control board 1510 can be reduced. This can be reduced by the shield plate 1540 made of metal and the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the gaming board 5 of FIG. 126, the ball tank 552 of FIG. 126, and the tank rail 553 of FIG. 126 are provided. The game board 5 is provided with a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 of FIG. 126 on the rear side as a box body to which the effect control unit 1500 of FIG. 126 is attached as a board box. The ball tank 552 can store game balls. The tank rail 553 can flow down the game balls stored in the ball tank 552 to the downstream side.

  The effect control unit 1500 as a board box is housed in the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5. The tank rail 553 is provided with a cutout portion 553aa shown in FIG. 126 as a hole into which foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) generated by the flowing down game ball B can drop. The game board 5 has an upper wall 3010a arranged below the tank rail 553 as an upper surface of a back box 3010 of a back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5 in a state of being attached to the pachinko machine 1. In this pachinko machine 1, foreign matter falling from the notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553 can be received by the upper wall 3010a as the upper surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5. .

  In this way, the foreign matter falling from the cutout portion 553aa formed in the tank rail 553 can be received by the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5, so that the foreign matter can be received. Even if it falls from the notch portion 553aa formed in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the falling foreign matter from entering the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5. As a result, it is possible to prevent an electrical trouble caused by a foreign substance falling onto the effect control unit 1500 as a board box housed in the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign substances falling from the tank rail 553.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 13 as the lottery result by the lottery means. 155 and the like. The power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 155 is provided as power supply means that can create various voltages based on the power supply voltage from the game hall outside the game machine. There is.

  The power supply board 630 is a plurality of parts having the same shape, and the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 of FIG. 155 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 of the same package type (TO-220F). , D10 at least. On the mounting surface of the power supply board 630, among the plurality of parts having the same shape, the silk printing TSLK9 of FIG. 158 (b) is a part other than this particular part as the silk printing for the particular part. Silk-printed so as to be distinguished from the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 in FIG.

  Specifically, as for the silk printing of the FETQ5 which is a specific component, the silk printing TSLK9 of FIG. 158 (b) is silk-printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630, but other specific components are excluded. The FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 of FIG. 155, which are components of FIG. 155, are the silk-screened TSLK1 to TSLK8 of FIG. 158 (a) mounted on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630, respectively. Silk printed. In the silk-printed TSLK9, a white diagonal line ad1 which does not exist in the silk-printed TSLK1 to TSLK8 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  Thus, as a plurality of parts having the same shape, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, of FIG. Even if D10 is provided on the power supply substrate 630, the silk-printed TSLK9 for the FET Q5, which is a specific component among the plurality of components having the same shape, is the other components other than the specific component, FET Q1, Q2. Since Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are silk-printed so that they can be distinguished from each other, the FET Q5, which is a noteworthy component, is replaced with the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, which are other components. Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 can be identified. There. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish the noteworthy part from the other parts among the plurality of parts.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 13 as the lottery result by the lottery means. The game can be progressed based on the above, and light emission control can be performed on the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 provided on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 167 as a light emitting means. As a possible light emission control means, a constant current drive circuit 402bax forming the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and a constant current drive circuit 402bbx forming the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are provided on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 167. As a strip-shaped decorative substrate formed in a predetermined shape, the door frame left of FIG. 167 And a left side under the decorative board 402b which is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the Id decorative body 404.

  The constant-current drive circuit 402bax and the constant-current drive circuit 402bbx are formed in a substantially rectangular planar shape, and each side of the constant-current drive circuit 402bax extends along both longitudinal sides of the strip-shaped left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. It is arranged to be non-parallel. Specifically, the edge sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx shown in FIG. 169 are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge side 402beg1 and the right edge side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Are arranged as.

  As described above, the strip-shaped lower left-side decorative substrate 402b includes the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx each having a substantially rectangular planar shape, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bax. The respective sides of the current drive circuit 402bbx are arranged so as to be non-parallel along both longitudinal edges of the strip-shaped lower left side lower substrate 402b. As a result, compared with the case where the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx are arranged so that the respective sides are parallel to each other in the longitudinal direction of the strip-shaped left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Since it is possible to form a large area sandwiched between both end sides in the longitudinal direction of the strip-shaped left side lower decorative substrate 402b and each side of the constant current driving circuit 402bax and the constant current driving circuit 402bbx, Wiring can be drawn from each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx and electrically connected to the ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region in which the wiring is drawn from each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx in the strip-shaped lower left lower decorative substrate 402b.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 13 as the lottery result by the lottery means. Based on the above, the game can be progressed, and LED mounting in which ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, provided on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 168 (a) as light emitting means are mounted. The left side lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 168 (a) having the surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by on which the light emitting means is not mounted is provided.

  The left side lower decorative substrate 402b is a white resist as a white coating film, and mounting lines are dashed lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 in FIG. 169 (a) (in FIG. 169 (a), the chain lines corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full color LEDs). LSLK4 and LSLK5 are shown respectively) and part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs of FIG. 169 (a) (in FIG. 169 (a), there are part numbers corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full color LEDs). Only certain LEDs 4 and 5 are shown respectively). The white resist is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the entire surface of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The mounting auxiliary symbol specifies chain lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 and full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 as auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are the numbers on the white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, which is a predetermined color different from the white resist and is yellow ( Alternatively, it is formed in black).

  As described above, auxiliary lines (that is, chain lines LSLK1 to LSLK10) indicating the mounting positions of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 169 (a) is a full-color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10 number (that is, the full-color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10 corresponding to the part number), and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. It is formed in yellow (or black) as a paint of a predetermined color different from the white resist on the white resist of the mounting surface 402by. That is, a white resist is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 168 (a), and the mounting positions of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 of FIG. 169 (a) are set. The auxiliary lines shown (that is, the yellow chain line (or the black chain line) LSLK1 to LSLK10) and the numbers specifying the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 in FIG. 169 (a) (that is, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and No corresponding yellow (or black) part number) is formed. Therefore, the numbers that specify hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs in FIG. 169 (a) (that is, the yellow (or black) part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs) and the full-color LEDs in FIG. 169 (a). Auxiliary lines (that is, yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10) indicating the mounting positions of the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  Further, the white resist formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 168 (a) corresponds to the full-color LEDs of hdLED1 to hdLED10 shown in FIG. 169), the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can be increased. Therefore, the numbers for specifying the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 in FIG. 169 (a) (that is, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10) are shown. A yellow (or black) part number corresponding to, and an auxiliary line (that is, a yellow chain line (or a black chain line) LSLK1 indicating the mounting positions of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 of FIG. 169 (a). LSLK10), the full color of Figure 168 (a) It is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance in the LED mounting surface 402bx on the left side under the decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 168 (a) of light emitted hdLED1~hdLED10 is ED. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 168 (a) from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 of FIG. 168 (a).

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, various boards inside the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 13 and the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 13). 1510) as a power supply means for supplying power to the power supply board 630 of FIG. The power supply substrate 630 is provided with the fuse FUSE1 of FIG. 161 as a fuse, the surge absorber SA1 of FIG. 161 as a surge voltage absorbing element, the rectifier circuit 630c of FIG. 161 as a rectifier circuit, and the power supply generation circuit 630f ′ of FIG. 161 as power supply means. There is. The fuse FUSE1 can be input with AC power from the island facility of the game hall as the outside of the game machine. The surge absorber SA1 is capable of absorbing the surge voltage of the AC power source input via the fuse FUSE1. The rectifier circuit 630c can rectify the AC power input via the surge absorber SA1 into a DC power supply. The power supply generation circuit 630f 'is capable of supplying electric power to various boards inside the pachinko machine 1 based on a DC power supply input via the rectifier circuit 630c.

  The surge absorber SA1 receives the commercial power supply voltage (AC100V) having a voltage higher than the power supply voltage for gaming machine (AC24V) as an AC power supply from the island facility of the game hall through the fuse FUSE1 and the surge voltage is allowed. It becomes possible to form a circuit in which the fuse FUSE1 is blown by causing a large current to flow into the fuse FUSE1 by breaking the fuse FUSE1.

  In this way, when the commercial power supply voltage (AC100V) having a voltage higher than the power supply voltage for gaming machines (AC24V) is input to the surge absorber SA1 via the fuse FUSE1 as the AC power supply from the island facility of the game hall, the surge voltage Is broken by exceeding the allowable voltage and is short-circuited, so that a circuit is formed in which a large current is passed through the fuse FUSE1 to blow the fuse FUSE1. As a result, even if the plug of the power cord for supplying the AC power from the island facility in the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of the commercial power voltage (AC100V), the power substrate 630 is destroyed. However, it is possible to reliably prevent destruction of various boards inside the pachinko machine 1 except the power supply board 630. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the various substrates inside the pachinko machine 1 from being destroyed when a commercial power supply voltage (AC100V) having a voltage higher than the game machine power supply voltage (AC24V) is supplied.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 13 as the lottery result by the lottery means. The game can be advanced based on the above, and the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, provided on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 173 (a) as light emitting means are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx. The left side lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 173 (a) to be mounted is provided.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b on which the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are mounted has a solid white resist as a reflection efficiency improving portion, and white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 as a reflection efficiency reduction preventing portion. Also, white resist removal characters of LED1 to LED10 that are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs are formed. The reflection efficiency improving section can improve the reflection efficiency of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b by the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. The reflection efficiency reduction prevention unit can prevent the reflection efficiency of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b from being reduced by the emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Specifically, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is coated with a white resist twice as a reflection efficiency improving portion to form a two-layer white resist, but the first layer is formed. The entire area is covered with the white resist of the eye and the entire area except the area masked by the white resist of the second layer, so that the masked area as the reflection efficiency reduction preventing portion is depressed as a concave portion. Areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are formed as white resist removal areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, and the LED1 to LED10, which is a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, are white resist. It is formed as a blank character.

  Thus, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 173 (a), the reflection efficiency improving portion (that is, white resist) and the reflection efficiency reduction preventing portion (that is, white resist removal region LSLK1) are provided. ~ LSLK10 and full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 corresponding to the part numbers corresponding to LED1 to LED10 (white resist removal characters) are formed, so that they are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. When the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 emit light, the reflection efficiency of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b by the emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 in the reflection efficiency improving portion (that is, white resist) is improved. To improve In the reflection efficiency reduction prevention unit (that is, white resist removal areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 and white resist removal characters of LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs), hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs. Since it is possible to prevent a reduction in the reflection efficiency of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (that is, a decrease in the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b) due to the emission of the light. This can contribute to making the LED mounting surface 402bx of the decorative substrate 402b a bright light emitting surface. Therefore, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can be a bright light emitting surface.

[17. Another example]
It is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and can be implemented in various modes as long as they are within the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, as the movable effect unit, the rotary decorative body 3126 having a plurality of (four) decorative portions 3127 that are rotatable about an axis extending in the left and right directions and are different from each other in the circumferential direction is provided in the left-right direction. Although it is shown that four coaxial units are provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and a rotating ornamental body that is rotatable around an axis extending vertically and has a plurality of decorative portions different from each other in the circumferential direction is formed. It may be provided with at least one, provided with at least one rotating decorative body that can rotate around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, provided with at least one movable decorative body that slides in the left-right direction, and the like. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 is used for the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 that move up and down via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a clutch mechanism 3250 may be provided between the drive motor and a movable decorative body that moves in the left-right direction, a movable decorative body that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the like.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 includes the housing case 3251, the input member 3252, the output member 3253, and the roller 3254. However, the clutch mechanism 3250 is not limited to this, and the rotation from the drive motor is performed. And a speed conversion unit that changes the speed of the reduced rotation and transmits the reduced rotation to the output side. The reduction unit is connected to the drive motor side of the first sun gear, the first planetary gear, and the rotation. And a second planetary gear mechanism having a non-fixable fixed ring gear and a second sun gear connected to the first sun gear, a second planetary gear and a rotatable planetary ring gear. A carrier provided with support shafts for supporting the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism on both sides, and the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism. And in may be those adapted to be transmitted at a reduced speed rotation from the drive motor to rotate the ring gear provided with a number of teeth difference between at least one gear of the ring gear and the sun gear.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 has the plugs of the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has the socket of the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 has the socket of the special connector SCN4. However, they may be arranged so that the direction in which information and signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and correspondingly, the side that receives information or signals can be a socket (or plug). For example, in the above-described embodiment, since various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data is not transferred. The ROM board 1520 serves as the transmitting side, and the peripheral control board 1510 serves as the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that becomes a socket) that serves as a plug, and correspondingly, when the peripheral control board 1510 becomes a socket, a special connector (or a plug). Can be provided with a special connector). Further, in the above-described embodiment, since the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a plurality of types of video signal systems to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 serves as the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 serves as the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket) serving as a plug, and correspondingly, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 serves as a socket, a special connector (or a plug serves as a socket). A special connector).

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a non-conductive resin and are transparently molded. The cover member 1501, the base member 1502, and the wiring cover member 1503 may be made of a resin and molded in an opaque black color. If the cover member 1501, the base member 1502, and the wiring cover member 1503 are made of a conductive resin, they may be molded in a semitransparent color. It may have been done. Even with this configuration, since the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin, the above-described peripheral control board is provided on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). By fixing various substrates such as 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with metal pan head screws, as described above, the circuit ground is connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates. Can be configured. As a result, noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can be made to flow to the ground (GND) of various substrates as a circuit ground, and the noise can be removed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the payout blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a having an arc shape extending outward in the shape of a flat plate at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. However, four may be provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. FIG. 187 is a modification of the payout device, and is a cross-sectional rear view of the payout device provided with a payout blade 589 including four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape and provided with a radio wave sensor. FIG. 187 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit corresponding to FIG. 105 described above, taken along the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction, and is denoted by the same reference numeral as FIG. 105. When the payout blade 589 includes four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape, although not shown in FIG. 187, the payout gear member 588 described above is a flat plate-shaped detection piece having an arc shape extending outward. Four 588b are provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and a 90-degree area in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588 is defined as a light-shielding range in a 45-degree area in which the detection piece 588b is formed. It is managed by 18-step rotation which is a combination of 9-step rotation of the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 and 9-step rotating of the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 with a 45 degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed as a light receiving range. Thus, the reduction ratio n is selected, and the rotation of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 18 steps for the payout of one ball of the game ball B. In other words, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 18 steps, the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, and the second transmission so that the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 can rotate 90 degrees. The reduction ratio n can be determined by selecting the number of teeth of the gear 587 and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, respectively.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the payout device 580 is equipped with the payout detection sensor 591 that detects the game ball B and that is attached by the payout device body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a. However, a radio wave sensor that detects radio waves may be provided near the payout detection sensor 591. The payout detection sensor 591 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch to detect the passage of the game ball B, but when the radio wave is affected, the game ball B is actually passing. Regardless of this, it is possible to make the game ball B appear to be in a state of not passing by malfunctioning. In this case, the payout control board 633 to which the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input determines, based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, that the payout of the game ball B is not completed, and the payout motor By controlling the rotation axis of 584 to rotate excessively, a large amount of game balls B will be paid out. In order to detect such an illegal act of illegally acquiring the game ball B (referred to as “radio wave goto”), as shown in FIG. 187, a radio wave sensor 594 is provided near the payout detection sensor 591 and a payout device 580. It can be provided in the. The detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594 is input to the payout control board 633, and when the payout control board 633 determines that an abnormal radio wave is being emitted, based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594, The rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is urgently stopped, and at the same time, a radio wave goto notification command to that effect is transmitted to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a radio wave goto notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives the radio wave goto notification command of 8-bit width from the payout control board 633, the radio wave goto notification command is changed from 8 bit width to 16 bit width, and the radio wave goto warning sound is set to the maximum volume. The information is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 by shaping the contents so that the radio waves can be notified by setting the LEDs to be emitted from the various speakers and setting the various LEDs to the warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode that blinks in red). When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the radio wave goto notification command having a 16-bit width, the effect display device 1600 displays a large message “Abnormality has occurred” and controls various LEDs in a warning notification light emission mode. To do.

  Instead of the radio wave sensor 594, a contact type ball passage sensor 594 ′ which is a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch may be used. The detection signal from the contact-type ball passage sensor 594 ′ is input to the payout control board 633, and the payout control board 633 receives the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and the detection signal from the contact-type ball passage sensor 594 ′. Based on this, it can be configured such that when the number of balls paid out of the game ball B does not match, it can be determined that some kind of fraud has occurred. When the payout control board 633 determines that some illegality has occurred, the payout control board 633 causes an emergency stop of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 and transmits a goto notification command to that effect to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a goto notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives the 8-bit width goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the goto notification command is changed from the 8-bit width to the 16-bit width, and the goto warning sound is set to the maximum volume to be output from various speakers. It is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 after being flown and shaped so that various LEDs can be set to a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode blinking in red) to notify a goto. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the goto notification command having a 16-bit width, the effect display device 1600 displays a large message “Abnormality has occurred” and controls various LEDs in the warning notification light emission mode. .

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor, but it may be a DC motor. In this case, when the DC motor is step-driven, the rotation shaft is stepwise rotated by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle accordingly. That is, the DC motor rotates its rotation axis 18 degrees in one step rotation.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is provided via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588 that constitute the rotation transmission member. It was configured to be able to decelerate and rotate the payout blade 589, but the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated at a low speed to rotate the rotation transmission member (a plurality of gears (for example, the first transmission gear 586 ′, The speed may be increased and the payout blade 589 may be rotated via the second transmission gear 587 'and the payout gear 588a') of the payout gear member 588). By doing this, the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmitting member is determined in advance so that the number of times of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is not an integer. The positioning position is different each time one ball is paid out. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, so that the adhesion positions of the tar and dust can be dispersed. Further, if the speed increasing ratio of the above-mentioned rotation transmitting member that naturally causes such a positioning error is set, the error accumulates, but even if the error accumulates every time one game ball is paid out, the payout blade 589 The rotation angle is reset by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 588b (light-shielding pieces) of the payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589, when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is guaranteed. Therefore, even in the pachinko machine 1 in which the speed increasing ratio of such a rotation transmitting member is predetermined, the rotational position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends the game ball is changed every time the game ball is paid out to cause tar and dust. It is possible to have the dispensing device 580 that is strong against tar and dust by dispersing the positions where the adheres.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540. In a state where the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and the various substrates by the above, a predetermined distance is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging the metal shield plate 1540 in this space. The two spaces are the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the metal shield plate. A first space 1505a having a first predetermined height distance dimension (12 mm in the present embodiment) between the shield plate 1540a and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a, and a surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. A second space 1505b having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the present embodiment) between the cover flat plate 1501a and the back surface thereof. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height is larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. When a large movable performance unit (an electric drive source and a drive mechanism capable of operating the movable performance body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position) is arranged on the game board 5, the depth direction When there is a margin in the distance dimension of, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the same distance dimension of the predetermined height. The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise in the first space 1505a, and heat the second space 1505b. By not accommodating various electronic components or the like that emit heat, heat generated from the various electronic components or the like in the first space 1505a can be efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal shield plate 1540d is provided with the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az, so that the product number printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b included in the peripheral control board 1510 can be changed. The type (or control number), the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (eg, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) can be visually confirmed. Also, the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the states of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, (Part number, pin number, etc.) and peripheral data ROM The product number or model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the board 1520, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are silk-printed respectively. Although the contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually confirmed, the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a are made of a metal corresponding to them. Alternatively, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the shield plate 1540d. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d so that the periphery thereof can be visually recognized. . Further, the shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to a larger area than the shape formed by the special connector SCN3), or to provide the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. From the shape of the board-to-board connector (shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector with the 1530 can be confirmed. Position of metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to large area It may be configured to provide a rectangular opening in.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, the cover side walls 1501b provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in one of the 1501e except the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side or in combination. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, and a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. . Even with such a configuration, foreign matters (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) generated by the game ball B drop toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling on the various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign substances falling from the tank rail 553. The reason for not forming the ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is provided through the ventilation holes 1501az. The foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) is dropped and invaded toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, and the foreign matter is electrically dropped by the foreign matter. This is because there is a high probability that trouble will occur.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, the cover side walls 1501b provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the 1501e except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. In this case, by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505. The reason why the ventilation holes 1501az are not formed on the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is, as described above, if the ventilation holes 1501az are temporarily formed on the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the ventilation holes 1501az are formed through the ventilation holes 1501az. A foreign substance (for example, a metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) generated by the game ball B drops into the peripheral control board box 1505 and enters the peripheral control board box 1505 to drop onto the various boards. This is because there is a high probability that electrical troubles due to foreign matter will occur.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 is formed with a plurality of cutout portions 553aa so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. However, one notch, hole, or groove may be formed in the ball passage along which the game ball B rolls, similar to the notch 553aa. Specifically, in the ball guiding unit 570 having a single guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner shown in FIG. 110, the metal of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a. Notches, holes, or grooves capable of removing powder from the guide passage 570a to the outside can be formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571 of the guide unit 570 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 110, a payout device 580, a board unit 620, and the like are arranged below the ball guiding unit 570. The payout device 580 has a board and the like on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted. The board unit 620 includes the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. 111, and various boards are arranged. Therefore, when forming a notch, hole, or groove on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571, a game ball that falls through the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the metal powder of B from adhering to various substrates arranged below the induction unit 570. Therefore, an eave-shaped member can be formed so as to project rearward along the upper side of the dispensing device rear lid 582 of the dispensing device 580 shown in FIG. 103, or can be formed on the rear surface of the guiding unit base 571. The positions of the cutouts, holes, or grooves to be cut and the positions of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580 is mounted can be configured to be staggered. It can also be configured. In addition, an eaves-shaped member is directed rearward along the upper side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, etc. shown in FIG. It can be formed by projecting, and the position of the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571, the power supply board cover 631, the payout control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636. The position and the position can be shifted, or both can be adopted.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, and the power destruction circuit 630g are provided on one substrate, which is the power substrate 630. Although various electronic components and the like were provided, it is possible to separately provide the two substrates. For example, the power supply board 630 includes a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B, and the first power supply board 630A and the second power supply board 630B are provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminals DCN5, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power supply switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B includes the diodes D5 and D6, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply generation circuit 630f, the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and the choke coil L2 shown in FIG. 155. , Fuse FUSE3, and wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 outputted from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power board 630A are connected to the wiring on the second power board 630B via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power wiring. When input to the connector B, in addition to being input to the rectifier circuit 630c, they are also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and input to the power generation circuit 630f. It will be. Various DC voltages such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V created in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the first power supply board 630A. It

  Further, the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 161 in the above-described embodiment can be divided into two boards, that is, a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A is the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuse FUSE1, the micro gap type arrester AL1, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B mainly configured by the connector A is the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply generation circuit 630f, the relay drive circuit 630i, the relay RL1 shown in FIG. The thermistor TH1, the choke coil L2, the fuse FUSE3, and the wiring connector B are mainly configured. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 outputted from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power board 630A are connected to the wiring on the second power board 630B via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power wiring. Input to connector B. Various DC voltages such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V created in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the first power supply board 630A. It

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is almost the same, and as shown in FIG. 169, the edge side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is , A configuration is adopted in which the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2, and a predetermined number of full-color LEDs are divided into a group 1 and a group 2. Although the configuration in which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged between the group 1 and the group 2 is adopted, the present invention can be applied to an elongated plate-shaped decorative substrate provided in the game board 5. As an elongated plate-shaped decorative board provided in the game board 5, for example, in addition to the decorative boards provided in the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300, the performance shown in FIG. 133. The front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 in the output unit 2600 may be mentioned.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 controls the light emission by passing a constant current through the eight full-color LEDs, but is not limited to the full-color LEDs, and white LEDs of single colors such as red, green, yellow, orange, blue, and green may be used. It is also possible to use monochromatic LEDs. In this case, one LED constant current drive circuit can control the emission of up to 24 single-color LEDs.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the + 12V DC from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, but in the constant current drive circuit of the LED constant current drive circuit. The internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the provided linear power supply (the linear power supply 283xa provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. 166) is used for LED lighting within the current allowable range of the linear power supply. It may be used as the voltage. For example, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, at most one monochromatic LED (for example, When the LEDs other than the red LED are electrically connected, the internal power source Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power source is input to the anode terminal of the single color LED, and The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat distribution resistor of the heat distribution circuit described above. Further, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, up to two single color LEDs (for example, When the red LEDs are electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the first-stage LED and the cathode terminal of the last-stage LED is It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat distribution resistance of the heat distribution circuit described above. The decorative board thus configured can be applied to the decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the DC + 12V from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the output channels LR1 to LR8 and LG1 of the constant current drive circuit are input. -LG8, LB1 to LB8, one output channel is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the LED element constituting one full-color LED via the heat dispersion resistance of the heat dispersion resistance circuit described above. However, a plurality of full-color LEDs may be electrically connected in series to one output channel. In this case, the number of full-color LEDs is 2 to 3. When it is necessary to further increase the number of full-color LEDs for one output channel, DC + 35V from the power supply board 630 is used as the voltage for LED lighting instead of + 12V DC from the power supply board 630. You may. The decorative board thus configured can be applied to the decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 of the door frame top decoration body 453 are the door frame top center decoration board 455 and the door. Since the frame top left decorative substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453, the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side of the decorative substrate is large. Although the edge sides of the land pattern are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper and lower edges of the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, About any one of the frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, and any two decorative boards The end side of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit, may be arranged so as to be non-parallel to the upper side and lower side of the decorative substrate. Then, the door frame top right decoration board 457 directly controls the light emission of the other right decoration board on which, for example, two full-color LEDs are mounted in addition to the full-color LED provided in itself by the LED constant current drive circuit provided in itself. Alternatively, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 may be directly provided with the LED constant current driving circuit provided with the other left decorative substrate on which one full color LED is mounted in addition to the full color LED provided with itself. The light emission may be controlled.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and the like are provided on the door frame 3. The LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of various decorative substrates included in each of the decorative bodies described above are solidly coated with a white resist, but instead of this, they may be printed by white silk printing. In this case, after the entire LED mounting surface and LED non-mounting surface of various decorative boards are printed by white silk printing, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed. It will be printed in yellow (or black), respectively.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, various decorative boards included in each decorative body provided on the door frame 3 such as the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are provided. On the LED non-mounting surface, the areas corresponding to the full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface of various decorative boards were printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as silk printing, but the mounting position of the full-color LED Of the full-color LED by adding the polarity mark of the full-color LED to the auxiliary line (that is, when the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed and printed with the yellow chain line (or the black chain line)). It may be configured to clearly indicate the mounting direction.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko machine, and gaming machines other than the pachinko machine, for example, slot machines (rotating drum type). It is also applicable to a gaming machine) or a fusion gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused (one that performs a slot game using a game ball). Here, a slot machine as a spinning-type gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 188, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door 6002 and a main body portion 6004. The front door 6002 and the main body portion 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). The front door 6002 can be opened from the main body portion 6004 by inserting a key into a keyhole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 with the hinge as a rotation center and turning the key clockwise.

  The upper half of the front door 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door 6002 is formed with a protruding portion that protrudes forward from the game panel 6006. The medal slot 6008, the bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 on this protrusion. A storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, and storage adjustment button 6022 are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game. Has been done. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) and an effect device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 are provided through the display window. You can see through. The three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side attachment member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004. On the other hand, the production device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door 6002.

  On these variable rotators, a light-transmissive pattern band, in which a plurality of types of patterns (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as pattern information, is attached to each tubular frame. ing. Such a tubular variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are drive-controlled by the main control board 1310, and as the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from the above-mentioned display window from top to bottom. Is visible.

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500, based on various commands from the main control board 1310, performs operation control of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of the effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, and the like. The progress of the production is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 described above.

  The main control board 1310, as a game medium, a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008, and based on the operation of the start lever 6014, the variable display of the symbol information is started. The left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the lapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as a game medium to the tray 6026.

  In the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008 ′, and the main control board 1310 inserts a predetermined number of game balls into the ball slot 6008 ′ as a game medium to operate the start lever 6014. The variable display of the symbol information is started based on this, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-providing state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as a game medium to the tray 6026.

  1 ... Pachinko machine, 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Door frame, 4 ... Main body frame, 5 ... Game board, 5a ... Game area, 558 ... External terminal board, 559 ... Frame earth board, 560 ... Dispensing unit, 570 ... Ball Induction unit, 580 ... Dispensing device, 580a ... Dispensing passage, 580b ... Ball discharge passage, 581 ... Dispensing device main body, 582 ... Dispensing device rear lid, 583 ... Dispensing device front lid, 584 ... Dispensing motor, 585 ... Drive gear, 586 ... first transmission gear, 587 ... second transmission gear, 588 ... dispensing gear member, 588a ... dispensing gear, 588b ... detecting piece, 589 ... dispensing blade, 589a ... blade piece, 589b ... sphere accommodating portion, 590 ... blade rotation detection Sensor, 591 ... Dispensing detection sensor, 592 ... Ball removal movable piece, 593 ... Ball removal lever, 600 ... Upper full ball path unit, 610 ... Lower full ball path unit, 630 ... Power supply board, 6 0a ... Power switch, 630b ... Noise countermeasure circuit, 630c ... Rectifier circuit, 630d ... Power factor correction circuit, 630e ... Smoothing circuit, 630f ... Power supply creation circuit, 630g ... Power supply destruction circuit, 633 ... Discharge control board, 1300 ... Main Control unit, 1310 ... Main control board, 1500 ... Production control unit, 1501 ... Cover body, 1502 ... Base body, 1503 ... Wiring cover body, 1510 ... Peripheral control board, 1520 ... Peripheral data ROM board, 1530 ... Liquid crystal output board, 1540 ... Shield plate, 1545 ... Conductive elastic member, 1600 ... Performance display device.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine you progress a game based on a lottery result by the selecting means,
A red light emitting element that emits red light, a green light emitting element that emits green light, and a blue light emitting element that emits blue light are provided with a decorative substrate on which a plurality of multicolor light emitting means are mounted.
Of the mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the specific mounting surface on which the multicolor light emitting means is mounted is
A first reflection efficiency reduction suppressing section capable of suppressing the reduction of the reflection efficiency of the specific mounting surface of the decorative substrate due to the light emission of the multicolor light emitting means;
And the first reflection efficiency reduction suppressing portion as compared to the multi-color light-emitting second reflection efficiency reduction suppressing portion is high reflection efficiency of the particular mounting surface of the decorative board according to the light emitting means,
Is formed, and is arranged so as to face the front of the gaming machine ,
The second reflection efficiency reduction suppressing portion is white,
The first reflection efficiency reduction suppressing portion is yellow ,
The first reflection efficiency reduction suppressing portion is formed in the vicinity of the multicolor light emitting means,
The multicolor light emitting means is an electronic component having a white exterior,
Electronic components mounted on a specific mounting surface of the decorative substrate, that have a white exterior,
A gaming machine characterized by that.